Results for: "Goals"
- How to clone/copy OKRs in Profit.co?In Profit.co, you can clone or copy existing OKRs to create duplicates, either as OKRs alone or along with their associated tasks, saving time and effort during OKR planning cycles. Table of Contents What is the Clone/Copy OKR feature in Profit.co? What are the Clone options available in Profit.co? How to clone/copy OKRs in Profit.co? Retaining Modified Planned Check-in Values During Key Result Cloning Behavior Comparison: Before vs. After the Update Best Practices for cloning OKRs in Profit.co Related Questions Frequently Asked Questions What is the Clone/Copy OKR feature in Profit.co? The Clone/Copy feature in Profit.co allows users to create an exact duplicate of an existing OKR. The cloned OKR retains the structure of the original, including the Objective name and key results, but starts with zero progress, regardless of how much progress the original OKR had achieved. Note: Even if the original OKR has recorded progress, the progress of the cloned or copied OKR will always start at zero. What are the Clone options available in Profit.co? Profit.co offers two cloning options based on your requirements: Clone Option Description Only OKRs Duplicates the Objective and its Key Results without any associated tasks OKRs with Tasks Duplicates the Objective, Key Results, and all associated tasks together How to clone/copy OKRs in Profit.co? Follow these steps to clone or copy an OKR in Profit.co: Step 1 Locate the OKR you wish to clone. Click on the More icon (⋯) next to the OKR and select Clone from the dropdown menu. Step 2 After selecting the Clone option, a side panel will appear with the available cloning options. If you wish to duplicate the OKR structure alone (without tasks), select Only OKRs from the side panel. A pop-up notification will confirm that the OKR has been cloned successfully. Step 3 If you wish to duplicate the OKR along with all its associated tasks, select OKRs with Tasks from the side panel. The OKR will be cloned along with its tasks and will appear on the OKRs List page. Retaining Modified Planned Check-in Values During Key Result Cloning The cloning behavior of Key Results has been improved to retain modified planned check-in values. Previously, when a Key Result with updated planned values was cloned, the modified plan was not carried forward, and the cloned Key Result reverted to a fresh state. With this update, any changes made to the planned check-in values are preserved during cloning. How It Works Step 1 Navigate to OKRs → Key Results. Perform check-ins and update the planned values as needed. Modify the planned trajectory of the Key Result based on actual performance. Step 2 Click Clone from the Key Result's More icon (⋯) menu. The cloned Key Result will now retain the modified planned check-in values. Behavior Comparison: Before vs. After the Update Behavior Before the Update After the Update Planned check-in values Reverted to default values Retained from modified trajectory Manual reconfiguration required Yes — user had to redo the plan No — plan carries forward automatically Cloned KR trajectory Started fresh, misaligned with actuals Reflects the adjusted trajectory Continuity of tracking Broken — plan had to be redefined Uninterrupted — tracking continues from adjusted plan Best Practices for cloning OKRs in Profit.co Use the Clone feature at the start of a new OKR cycle to carry forward recurring objectives without manual re-entry. Select OKRs with Tasks when the associated tasks are also relevant to the new cycle to preserve full context. After cloning, review and update the Objective name, Key Result targets, and owners to align with the new period's goals. Use cloning to replicate high-performing OKR structures across multiple departments or teams. Always verify the cloned OKR's progress starts at zero before sharing it with the team. Related Questions Click here to learn more about how to move OKRs in Profit.co. Frequently Asked Questions Q1. What does the Clone/Copy feature do in Profit.co? It creates a duplicate of an existing OKR, including its Objective and Key Results, either with or without associated tasks, starting at zero progress. Q2. Will the cloned OKR carry over the progress from the original OKR? No. The progress of a cloned or copied OKR always starts at zero, regardless of the progress recorded in the original OKR. Q3. What are the two cloning options available in Profit.co? Profit.co offers two options: Only OKRs (duplicates the Objective and Key Results only) and OKRs with Tasks (duplicates the Objective, Key Results, and all associated tasks).4 min read
- How do I create and manage an employee-driven individual development plan (IDP) in Profit.co?Profit.co's Employee Driven IDP workflow gives employees an active role in shaping their own development, adding activities, proposing the plan, and tracking progress, while HR, coaches, and HRBPs maintain oversight through a structured initiation, sign-off, and closure process. Table of Contents What is an Employee Driven IDP in Profit.co? Why the Employee-Driven IDP Workflow Matters Employee-Driven IDP Workflow Stages How to Configure IDP Settings How to Initiate an Employee-Driven IDP IDP Lifecycle: From Proposal to Closure Best Practices for Employee-Driven IDPs Related Questions Frequently Asked Questions What is an Employee Driven IDP in Profit.co? The employee-driven IDP is one of three configurable development plan workflows in Profit.co. In this model, HR creates the initial plan structure, but the employee takes ownership of adding activities, proposing the plan, and driving progress with coaches and HRBPs providing review, guidance, and formal sign-off at each stage. This workflow is best suited for organizations that prioritize employee ownership of career growth, where self-directed learning and role-based development activities are central to the development process. Why the Employee-Driven IDP Workflow Matters In a standard HR-led plan, employees receive a predefined development structure with limited input. The employee-driven workflow changes this by giving employees direct responsibility for proposing their own activities, covering both their current role and future career goals. This model increases engagement with the development process, produces more relevant activity plans, and ensures coaches and HR are reviewing plans that the employee has actively shaped rather than passively received. Employee-Driven IDP Workflow Stages The employee-driven plan follows a six-stage workflow from initiation to closure. Each stage has a defined owner and action: Stage Owner Action 1. HR Creates Plan HR Admin Initiates the IDP and defines the structure 2. Employee Adds Activities & Proposes Employee Adds development activities and proposes the plan 3. Mentor Reviews & Initiates Coach / Mentor Reviews the proposal, modifies details, and initiates the IDP 4. Employee Completes Employee Logs progress on assigned activities 5. Mentor Sign-off Coach / Mentor Reviews completion and signs off 6. HR Closes Plan HR Admin / HRBP Reviews the sign-off and formally closes the IDP How to Configure IDP Settings Step 1 Navigate to Settings → Performance → Development Plans from the left navigation panel. Under the Development Plan Workflow options, select Employee Driven Plan. Step 2 Switch to the Individual Development Plan tab. Enable the Individual Development Plan toggle. Step 3 Create the plan categories that will be available when building an IDP. Categories organize development activities by theme, competency area, or role type. How to Initiate an Employee-Driven IDP Step 1 Navigate to Performance → HR Administration from the left navigation panel. Switch to the Individual Plan tab. Click the + Initiate IDP button. Step 2 Enter the plan title and select the employee. Select the Coach / Mentor(s) and set the target date. Add activities for the Current Role and Future Role, then fill in all required details. Once all details are complete, click Send to Coach/Mentors. The IDP is generated and moves to Created status. IDP Lifecycle: From Proposal to Closure Employee Adds Activities and Proposes the Plan After HR initiates the IDP, the employee receives it and adds their development activities. The employee reviews the structure, adds activities for their current and future roles, and proposes the plan. The plan status moves to "Proposed" once submitted. Coach / Mentor Reviews and Initiates The coach reviews the proposed plan, modifies details if needed, and adds additional coach/mentors if required. The coach then formally initiates the IDP for the employee. Employee Tracks Progress Once initiated, the employee begins logging progress on their activities. Both the employee and mentor can collaborate and use the update button to log progress regularly. Sign-off and Closure Once activities are completed, the coach clicks Sign-off, adds comments, and confirms. The sign-off request is sent to the HRBP (the IDP initiator) for review. The HRBP reviews the sign-off and formally closes the IDP. Note: Individual Development Plans can be deleted directly from the HR Administration page when they are no longer needed or were created in error. Best Practices for Employee-Driven IDPs Select the Employee Driven Plan workflow in Settings before initiating any IDPs, the workflow type determines the stage sequence and should not be changed once active plans are running. Create Plan Categories aligned to your competency framework before the first IDP is initiated, so employees have a consistent structure when adding their activities. Brief employees on the Proposed stage before launch, in the Employee Driven workflow, the plan remains in Proposed status until the employee actively adds activities and submits, which can delay progress if employees are unprepared. Related Questions Click here to learn more about How to initiate an Individual Development Plan (IDP) in Profit.co? Click here to learn more about How does a user progress in the Individual Development Plan (IDP) in Profit.co? Click here to learn more about How to enable Individual Development Plan (IDP) in Profit.co? Frequently Asked Questions Q1. What happens if the employee does not add activities after receiving the plan? The plan remains in Proposed status until the employee actively adds activities and submits their proposal. The coach cannot initiate the IDP until this step is complete. HR Admins can monitor pending plans from the HR Administration page and follow up with employees as needed. Q2. Can additional coaches or mentors be added once the IDP is in progress? Yes. During the Mentor Reviews & Initiates stage, the coach can modify IDP details and add additional coach/mentors before formally initiating the plan. Changes to coaching assignments after initiation are not explicitly covered in the current documentation. Q3. Who can close an Employee Driven IDP, and can it be reopened? Only the HRBP who initiated the IDP can close it after the coach's sign-off is received. Once closed, HR retains the ability to reopen the IDP if ongoing refinement or corrections are needed, without requiring a new plan to be created from scratch.5 min read
- How to Create an Objective in Profit.co?In Profit.co, users can create Objectives directly from the OKRs module using a quick-form panel, with support for multiple owners to accurately reflect shared accountability across teams. Table of Contents What is an Objective in Profit.co? Why Objective Creation Matters How It Works: Step-by-Step Guide Multiple Owners on an Objective Best Practices for Creating Objectives Related Questions Frequently Asked Questions What is an Objective in Profit.co? An Objective in Profit.co defines what you want to accomplish within a given period. It serves as the top-level item in the OKR framework, under which Key Results are created to measure progress toward the goal. Objectives can be assigned to one or more owners, tagged for categorization, and set with specific visibility controls to determine who can view them across your organization. Why Objective Creation Matters Creating Objectives in Profit.co ties individual and team efforts to organizational strategy. When Objectives are properly configured with owners, visibility, and tags, teams operate with clear accountability and focused priorities. The ability to assign multiple owners to a single Objective eliminates ambiguity in cross-functional goals — every stakeholder responsible for the outcome is formally recognized, not just listed as a contributor. How It Works: Step-by-Step Guide Step 1 Navigate to the OKRs from the left navigation panel. Click the + Create Objective button. Step 2 A side panel will appear on the right side of the screen. Enter the Objective Name in the provided field. Choose the required Owner; you can select one or multiple users. Set the Visibility and add relevant Tags as needed. Once all required fields are filled, click the Create button. The newly created Objective will appear on the OKRs page. Note: Individual OKRs can be created under My OKRs. For departmental OKRs, you can create them by choosing the required department from the dropdown. Multiple Owners on an Objective Profit.co supports assigning multiple owners to an Objective, bringing it in line with how ownership works for Key Results. In the Owner field of the Create or Edit Objective panel, you can select multiple users — each will carry equal visibility and accountability for the Objective. This is particularly useful for cross-functional Objectives where more than one team or individual shares responsibility. Consider an Objective like Improve Customer Onboarding Experience: Stakeholder Role Reason for Ownership Product Manager Objective Owner Improves product onboarding flow Customer Success Manager Objective Owner Enhances onboarding support experience Marketing Manager Objective Owner Refines onboarding communication strategy Previously, only one person could hold ownership while others were added as contributors — even when responsibility was shared equally. With multiple ownership, all three stakeholders above can be formally assigned as Objective owners, accurately reflecting joint accountability. Best Practices for Creating Objectives Assign multiple owners only when stakeholders share equal, measurable accountability — avoid adding owners as a formality. Set Visibility deliberately: use Public for org-wide Objectives and Access List for cross-functional goals with defined participants. Use Tags consistently to enable filtering and reporting at scale — agree on a tagging convention across teams before creating Objectives. Write Objective names as clear, outcome-oriented statements rather than task descriptions — they should answer "What do we want to achieve?" not "What will we do?" Add Key Results immediately after creating an Objective to ensure it is measurable and actionable from day one. Related Questions Click here to learn more about how to enable multi-assignee in KR Assignment Click here to learn more about How do I Change an Objective Owner Frequently Asked Questions Q1. Can I edit the owners of an Objective after it has been created? Yes. You can edit an existing Objective and update the Owner field to add or remove owners at any time. All changes take effect immediately and are reflected across the Objective's view for all assigned owners. Q2. Is there a limit to how many owners can be assigned to a single Objective? Profit.co does not impose a fixed cap on the number of owners per Objective. However, assigning ownership should reflect genuine accountability — keeping the owner list focused ensures clarity and avoids diffused responsibility. Q3. Can I create an Objective without adding Tags or setting Visibility? Tags are optional and can be added or updated at any time. Visibility defaults to a system-level setting if not explicitly configured during creation. You can always revisit and update these fields by editing the Objective after it has been created.4 min read
- What are Competency Activities?In Profit.co, users can now create activities under competencies to document the actions they are taking to demonstrate or develop each competency. These activities appear during performance reviews alongside competencies, and the competency list shown to each user is filtered based on their assigned role. Table of Contents What are Competency Activities? Configuring Competencies for a Job Title How to Enable Competencies in Profit.co How Competency Activities Work How Role-Based Competency Visibility Works How Competencies and Activities Appear in Reviews Best Practices for Competency Activities Related Questions Frequently Asked Questions What are Competency Activities? Competency Activities are user-created entries under a specific competency that describe the concrete actions a user is taking, or has taken, to achieve or demonstrate that competency. They function similarly to how tasks relate to goals: a competency defines what is being measured, while activities capture how the user is working toward it. Multiple activities can be created under a single competency. These activities surface automatically during performance review assessments. Configuring Competencies for a Job Title Navigate to Settings → User Management and switch to the Job Titles tab. Click the Edit icon on the Job Title you want to configure. Under the Performance Competencies section, select the competencies relevant to that job title. Click Update to save. Users assigned this job title will now only see these competencies in their dropdown. How to Enable Competencies in Profit.co Competencies must be enabled before users can access the Competency list pages or create activities. Navigate to Settings → General → Apps from the left navigation panel. Click on the Performance Customize option. Enable the Competencies toggle, and click Done. The Competencies section will now appear in the left navigation panel. Enabling Company-Level Competencies By default, competencies are filtered per job title. To make a competency available across all employee competency activities — regardless of role assignment — use the steps below: Navigate to the Competency Settings section. Enable the Company Level Competency toggle while creating or editing a competency. Once enabled, the competency becomes available across all employee competency activities. How Competency Activities Work Creating Activities Under a Competency From the Competencies list page, users can open a competency and add one or more activities. Each activity describes a specific action taken to develop or demonstrate that competency. A single competency can have multiple activities logged under it. All activities associated with a competency carry over into the performance review automatically, no re-entry needed. To create an activity, follow the steps below. Step 1 Navigate to the Performance → Competencies from the left navigation panel. Click on the +Create Activity button. Step 2 On the Create Activity page, choose the required competency from the dropdown. Add the required Activity and click Save. Once Done, click Create. Note: When an employee checks in, completes, or deletes a competency activity, the manager receives an in-app notification - and vice versa. How Role-Based Competency Visibility Works When a user creates an activity, the competency dropdown is filtered to show only the competencies associated with the user's assigned job title or role. This means the available competency list adapts per user; there is no manual filtering required. User Role Competencies Shown in Dropdown CEO Competencies mapped to the CEO job title only Engineering Manager Competencies mapped to the Engineering Manager only Sales Associate Competencies mapped to Sales Associate only Any role without mapped competencies No competencies appear, mapping required in Settings Example: If a user is assigned the CEO role, the competency dropdown when creating an activity will only list competencies that have been explicitly mapped to the CEO job title in Settings → User Management → Job Titles. How Competencies and Activities Appear in Reviews When a performance review is initiated, competencies and their associated activities are displayed on the PMS review page alongside other review components such as OKRs and Goals. This gives reviewers a full picture of not just what competencies are being assessed, but the documented actions behind each one. Review Component What is Displayed Competencies Role-relevant competencies assigned to the user Competency Activities All activities logged under each competency by the user OKRs Objectives and Key Results linked to the review period Goals Performance goals included in the review template Note: Managers conducting an assessment can view the competency activities submitted by the employee before providing a rating, giving them direct context for the score they assign. Best Practices for Competency Activities Map competencies to job titles in Settings → User Management → Job Titles before the review cycle begins; users with unmapped roles will see an empty competency dropdown when creating activities. Encourage employees to log activities continuously throughout the review period rather than retroactively at review time. This builds a richer evidence trail for assessors. Write activities as specific, observable actions rather than general statements. For example: "Led cross-functional alignment meeting for Q3 product launch" is more useful in a review context than "Worked on communication." Managers should review the My Team Competencies page ahead of assessment to familiarize themselves with the activities logged before rating — the review page surfaces the same data but reviewing early avoids rushed assessments. If a competency applies across multiple roles, confirm it is mapped to each relevant job title individually in Settings — a competency mapped to one role does not automatically apply to others. Related Questions Click here to learn more about how to add competencies at the job title level Click here to learn more about how to add competencies in Profit.co Click here to learn more about how to fill out a Manager assessment form Frequently Asked Questions Q1. Can a user see competencies that are not mapped to their role? No. The competency dropdown when creating an activity is strictly filtered to the competencies mapped to the user's assigned job title. Competencies not mapped to their role will not appear, regardless of how many exist in the system. Q2. Can a manager create activities on behalf of a team member? Activities are created by the user from their own My Competencies page. Managers can view activities on the My Team Competencies page and during reviews, but activity creation is the responsibility of the individual user. Q3. Is there a limit to how many activities can be added under a single competency? Multiple activities can be created under each competency with no stated limit. Users should focus on logging activities that are specific and relevant to the current review period to keep the review context clear for assessors.6 min read
- How to create a Project in the PPM module?Profit.co provides an option for users to create a project within the Project Portfolio Management (PPM) module. This helps organizations define objectives, structure tasks, and monitor progress effectively, ensuring every project aligns with business goals. Table of Contents Why This Feature? What Details Are Required to Create a Project in Profit.co? What Are Milestones and Tasks in a Project? How to Create a Project in the PPM Module Best practices for uploading profile pictures in Profit.co Related Questions Frequently Asked Questions Why This Feature? Creating projects within the PPM module helps streamline project setup and execution by: Defining clear objectives, timelines, and milestones to keep teams aligned. Breaking down large initiatives into manageable tasks for easier tracking. Assigning ownership and setting accountability for each stage of the project. This structured approach enables efficient collaboration, progress visibility, and on-time delivery of outcomes. What Details Are Required to Create a Project in Profit.co? When creating a project, you’ll need to specify essential information that defines the project scope and setup. Field Description Project Name Title or name of the project. Project Code A unique identifier for the project. Portfolio The parent portfolio under which the project is managed. Timeline Start and end dates of the project. Billing Type Choose between Billable or Non-billable. Budget Specify the total estimated cost for the project. Closure Information Define criteria or notes for project completion. Note: Only Super Users and PPM Admin can create or manage projects in the PPM module. What Are Milestones and Tasks in a Project? Milestones are significant checkpoints representing major deliverables or goals within a project. Tasks are smaller, actionable steps required to achieve milestones. Each task can be assigned an owner, status, and progress percentage, which automatically updates the overall milestone completion rate. Example: For a “Product Launch” project, milestones may include Design Completion, Testing Phase, and Launch Execution. Each milestone can contain tasks like UI Design, QA Testing, or Marketing Campaign Setup. How to Create a Project in the PPM Module Follow the steps below to create a project and organize milestones and tasks. Step 1: Define Project Objectives Navigate to Portfolios and Projects → All Projects from the left navigation panel. Click the + Create Project button. This step involves defining your project’s objectives, scope, timelines, and milestones. It formalizes your plan and ensures alignment among stakeholders. Note: You can view the total number of projects at the top of the page. Step 2: Enter Project Details In the Create Project side panel: Enter the Project Name and Code. Define the Timeline, Status, and select the appropriate Portfolio. Choose the Billing Type (e.g., Billable) and set the Project Budget. Fill in Closure Information if available. Click Create once all fields are filled. Step 3: Add Milestones Click on the project you just created. Scroll down to the Milestones section and click + Create. Fill in the following details: Milestone Name Milestone Code Owner Description Start and End Dates Click Create to save the milestone. Note: While creating a milestone, users can link it to a Tollgate for better alignment. You can also add milestones directly from the Tollgate section. A new Project Source indicator now shows whether a project was created directly or from a request, improving traceability. Step 4: Create Tasks Select the Milestone you just created. Click the + Create Task button. Enter the Task Name, set the Owner, define Start/End Dates, add Tags, and select Status. Click Save. Use the new Assignee filter to view tasks by team member, see task counts, select one or multiple assignees, and quickly filter using search, Select All, or Clear All options. Note: You can set a specific progress percentage for each task status in Settings. Milestone progress will automatically update based on task statuses. Example:If “Scheduled” status is assigned 20% progress, marking a task as “Scheduled” will update the milestone’s progress to 20%. Step 5: Create Sub-Projects You can also create Sub-Projects from the project overview page. Step 6: Clone a Project Use the Clone option to quickly duplicate existing projects. Attributes will automatically adjust based on the project type, whether it’s a BOQ or a Standard Project, allowing relevant configurations to carry over. Best practices for uploading profile pictures in Profit.co Define your scope, budget, and objectives clearly before creation. Use milestones to divide projects into measurable stages. Regularly review task progress and update owners. Clone existing projects for repeatable workflows. Align projects with OKRs to connect execution with strategic goals. Related Questions How to create a new template for Projects? How to Link Projects to OKRs Using Strategic Alignment? Email Signature Editor Frequently Asked Questions Q1. Can I edit project details after creation? Yes. You can edit project information such as timelines, owners, and budget anytime from the Project Overview page. Q2. Can I create projects for multiple portfolios? Each project belongs to one primary portfolio, but you can track and manage multiple portfolios simultaneously through the All Projects view. Q3. What happens when I clone a project? The cloned project will inherit all configurations and details from the original, except for unique identifiers like project name and code.5 min read
- What does Milestone tracked Key Result imply?Profit.co offers multiple ways to track Key Results, and the Milestone Tracked type is specifically designed for goals that don't fit traditional numeric metrics but still require structured progress tracking. Table of Contents What is a Milestone Tracked Key Result? Why use Milestone Tracked Key Results? When should I use Milestone Tracked Key Results? How do Milestone Tracked Key Results work? Milestone Tracked vs. Other Key Result Types Flexible Check-ins for Milestone Key Results Best practices for using Milestone Tracked Key Results Related Questions Frequently Asked Questions What is a Milestone Tracked Key Result? A Milestone Tracked Key Result is a type of Key Result used when you need to track binary or sequential outcomes that don't have quantifiable KPIs. Instead of measuring progress with numbers, you break down the goal into distinct milestones or checkpoints, where each milestone represents a completed step toward achieving the Key Result. Why use Milestone Tracked Key Results? Milestone Tracked Key Results solve specific tracking challenges in OKR management: Benefit Description Binary outcome tracking Perfect for yes/no, done/not-done type goals Sequential clarity Breaks complex initiatives into clear, ordered steps Visual progress Shows completion percentage based on milestones achieved Flexible measurement Works when traditional KPIs aren't applicable Project-style tracking Bridges OKRs with project management methodologies Team alignment Makes it clear what needs to happen and in what order When should I use Milestone Tracked Key Results? There are scenarios where you find it difficult to associate any KPI with your Key Result. This typically happens when you have a binary outcome to track—something that's either complete or incomplete, with no middle ground for numeric measurement. Common use cases: Product Development: Launch product version 3.0 Complete beta testing phase Deploy new infrastructure Hiring & Team Building: Hire a sales manager Onboard five engineering team members Establish remote work policies Process Implementation: Establish a sales onboarding process Implement new performance review system Create customer success playbook Strategic Initiatives: Sign partnership agreement with vendor Open new regional office Achieve industry certification How do Milestone Tracked Key Results work? Structure of a Milestone Tracked Key Result A Milestone Tracked Key Result consists of: Key Result statement: The overall goal (e.g., "Launch product version 3.0") Individual milestones: Sequential steps required to complete the Key Result Progress calculation: Percentage based on completed milestones Progress calculation example: If your Key Result "Launch product version 3.0" has 5 milestones: Complete feature development Conduct QA testing Create user documentation Execute marketing campaign Deploy to production Progress tracking: Each milestone = 20% of total progress 3 milestones completed = 60% progress All 5 milestones completed = 100% (Key Result achieved) Milestone Tracked vs. Other Key Result Types Feature Milestone Tracked Numeric Tracked Task Tracked Best for Binary outcomes Measurable KPIs Multiple action items Progress type Milestone completion Numeric value Task completion Measurement % of milestones done Current vs. Target % of tasks done Complexity Sequential steps Single metric Multiple tasks Example Launch product Increase revenue to $1M Complete 15 sales activities Flexible Check-ins for Milestone Key Results By default, Milestone Tracked Key Results follow a scheduled check-in cadence. Profit.co also allows admins to enable Additional Check-ins — letting users log progress on a Milestone KR at any point between scheduled check-in dates, without waiting for the next scheduled window. Enabling Additional Check-ins Navigate to Settings → OKRs → Authoring → KPIs/Initiatives → Edit Milestone Tracked. Under the Additional Check-ins Policy, select Allow Additional check-ins. Note: Only Super Users can configure the Additional Check-ins Policy in Settings. Logging an Additional Check-in Open the Milestone Key Result and click Check In. Click the Additional Check-in date button. Select any date between your last scheduled check-in and the next scheduled check-in. Enter the progress value and any relevant comments, then submit. Both scheduled and additional check-ins appear in the check-in history. Additional check-ins display in a dedicated Additional Check-ins section, keeping them clearly distinguishable from the regular check-in cadence. How Additional Check-ins Work in Practice Check-in Type Date Action Last scheduled Feb 20 (Fri) Completed normally on schedule. Milestone achieved Feb 23 (Tue) Log an additional check-in immediately to capture the milestone. Next scheduled Feb 27 (Fri) Occurs as planned — the regular cadence is unaffected. Additional check-ins supplement the scheduled cadence — they do not replace or skip any regular check-in dates. Best practices for using Milestone Tracked Key Results Keep milestones meaningful: Each milestone should represent significant progress, not trivial steps. Limit the number: Aim for 3-7 milestones per Key Result for clarity and manageability. Define clear completion criteria: Make it obvious when a milestone is truly "done". Sequence logically: Arrange milestones in a natural order when dependencies exist. Add ownership: Assign responsible parties to milestones for accountability. Include deadlines: Set target dates for milestones to maintain momentum. Document dependencies: Note if certain milestones must be completed before others can begin. Regular check-ins: Review milestone status frequently to identify blockers early. Celebrate completions: Acknowledge when milestones are achieved to maintain team motivation. Related Questions Click here to learn more about how to define a Key Result of Milestone Tracked in Profit.co Click here to learn more about how to set up a new Milestone Sequence Click here to learn more about which Key Result type to choose Frequently Asked Questions Q1. Can I convert a Milestone Tracked Key Result to another type later? It depends on your Profit.co configuration. Generally, it's best to choose the correct Key Result type from the start. If you need to change it, you may need to create a new Key Result and archive the old one. Q2. How do milestones affect the overall Objective progress? Milestone completion contributes to the Key Result's progress percentage, which in turn rolls up to calculate the overall Objective progress based on all Key Results under that Objective. Q3. Can multiple people be assigned to different milestones within the same Key Result? Yes, you can assign different owners to individual milestones within a single Milestone Tracked Key Result, allowing for distributed responsibility while maintaining unified tracking.5 min read
- How do I set up phase-gate approval workflows in Profit.co?In Profit.co, you can configure phase-gate approval workflows for tollgate sequences, requiring projects to receive multi-level approvals before progressing to the next stage, ensuring governance and quality control throughout the project lifecycle. Table of Contents What are phase-gate approval workflows in Profit.co? What is a Tollgate in Profit.co? How do I access Tollgate Sequence settings? How do I configure approval flows for a stage? How do I set up multi-level approval sequences? Best practices for Phase-Gate Approval Workflows Related Questions Frequently Asked Questions What are phase-gate approval workflows in Profit.co? Phase-gate approval workflows are multi-stage approval processes configured for tollgate sequences. They require projects to pass through predefined approval gates before progressing to the next project stage, ensuring proper review, governance, and quality control at critical project milestones. What is a Tollgate in Profit.co? A Tollgate is a project governance checkpoint or gate where projects must meet specific criteria and receive approvals before proceeding to the next stage. Tollgates typically include: Checklist items that must be completed Deliverables that must be submitted Approval workflows that must be satisfied Criteria that must be met To learn how to create this, click here How do I access Tollgate Sequence settings? Before configuring approval flows, you need to access the tollgate sequence: Prerequisites: You need PPM Admin permissions to edit tollgate sequences Step 1 Access the tollgate sequence configuration. Refer to the Tollgate Creation post for creating new tollgate sequences. Locate the tollgate sequence you want to configure. Click "Edit" on the tollgate sequence. A side panel will open, showing the sequence details. How do I configure approval flows for a stage? Set up approval workflows for each stage in your tollgate sequence: Step 1 In the tollgate sequence side panel, choose the stage name you want to configure. Each stage can have its own unique approval workflow. Click the Edit option for the selected stage. In the side panel, switch to the Approval Flow tab. This displays the approval configuration options. Choose between a standard or rule-based approval flow. How do I set up multi-level approval sequences? Create a sequential approval workflow with multiple approval levels using a real business scenario. Business Use Case Example: The 4-Level Approval Flow: Technical Expert (Self-Designated) - Product Manager selects appropriate technical reviewer to validate feasibility PM's Direct Manager (Employee's Manager) - Validates team capacity and resource availability VP of Product (Department Head) - Ensures strategic alignment with department goals PMO (PPM Admin) - Final portfolio governance and prioritization check Configuration Steps: In the Approval Flow tab, click Add Sequence Select first approver type: Employees can designate their own approvers Click "Add Approver" again for the second level Select: Employee's Manager Continue adding levels: Department Head, then PPM Admin Result: Projects must progress through all four approval levels sequentially before advancing to the next stage. Note: Once you enable the Parallel Flow option, the approvers complete the approval process in parallel rather than sequentially. Best practices for Phase-Gate Approval Workflows Design approval sequences that align with your organization's governance model and decision-making hierarchy. Always include Employee's Manager as one approval level to ensure direct supervisors are aware of commitments. Reserve PPM Admin approval for final governance gates where portfolio alignment is critical. Create clear checklists and criteria for each tollgate stage so teams know what's required before submission. Train approvers on their responsibilities, expected turnaround times, and how to provide constructive feedback. Set service level agreements (SLAs) for approval turnaround at each level (e.g., 2 business days). Configure different approval sequences for different project types or risk levels (simple vs. complex). Review and optimize approval workflows quarterly to remove unnecessary levels or adjust approver types. Use consistent approval sequences across similar project stages to build organizational muscle memory. Related Questions To learn more about Tollgate Creation in Profit.co, click here Frequently Asked Questions Q1. Can I skip approval levels in a sequence? No, approval sequences must progress through each configured level in order. All approvers must approve before the project advances. Q2. What happens if an approver rejects the submission? The project returns to the submitter with feedback. The submitter must address concerns, revise as needed, and resubmit for approval. Q3. Can I have different approval workflows for different tollgate stages? Yes, each stage in your tollgate sequence can have its own unique approval workflow with different approver types and sequences.4 min read
- How do I set up phase-gate approval workflows in Profit.co?In Profit.co, you can configure phase-gate approval workflows for tollgate sequences, requiring projects to receive multi-level approvals before progressing to the next stage, ensuring governance and quality control throughout the project lifecycle. Table of Contents What are phase-gate approval workflows in Profit.co? What is a Tollgate in Profit.co? How do I access Tollgate Sequence settings? How do I configure approval flows for a stage? How do I set up multi-level approval sequences? Best practices for Phase-Gate Approval Workflows Related Questions Frequently Asked Questions What are phase-gate approval workflows in Profit.co? Phase-gate approval workflows are multi-stage approval processes configured for tollgate sequences. They require projects to pass through predefined approval gates before progressing to the next project stage, ensuring proper review, governance, and quality control at critical project milestones. What is a Tollgate in Profit.co? A Tollgate is a project governance checkpoint or gate where projects must meet specific criteria and receive approvals before proceeding to the next stage. Tollgates typically include: Checklist items that must be completed Deliverables that must be submitted Approval workflows that must be satisfied Criteria that must be met To learn how to create this, click here How do I access Tollgate Sequence settings? Before configuring approval flows, you need to access the tollgate sequence: Prerequisites: You need PPM Admin permissions to edit tollgate sequences Step 1 Access the tollgate sequence configuration. Refer to the Tollgate Creation post for creating new tollgate sequences. Locate the tollgate sequence you want to configure. Click "Edit" on the tollgate sequence. A side panel will open, showing the sequence details. How do I configure approval flows for a stage? Set up approval workflows for each stage in your tollgate sequence: Step 1 In the tollgate sequence side panel, choose the stage name you want to configure. Each stage can have its own unique approval workflow. Click the Edit option for the selected stage. In the side panel, switch to the Approval Flow tab. This displays the approval configuration options. Choose between a standard or rule-based approval flow. How do I set up multi-level approval sequences? Create a sequential approval workflow with multiple approval levels using a real business scenario. Business Use Case Example: The 4-Level Approval Flow: Technical Expert (Self-Designated) - Product Manager selects appropriate technical reviewer to validate feasibility PM's Direct Manager (Employee's Manager) - Validates team capacity and resource availability VP of Product (Department Head) - Ensures strategic alignment with department goals PMO (PPM Admin) - Final portfolio governance and prioritization check Configuration Steps: In the Approval Flow tab, click Add Sequence Select first approver type: Employees can designate their own approvers Click "Add Approver" again for the second level Select: Employee's Manager Continue adding levels: Department Head, then PPM Admin Result: Projects must progress through all four approval levels sequentially before advancing to the next stage. Note: Once you enable the Parallel Flow option, the approvers complete the approval process in parallel rather than sequentially. Best practices for Phase-Gate Approval Workflows Design approval sequences that align with your organization's governance model and decision-making hierarchy. Always include Employee's Manager as one approval level to ensure direct supervisors are aware of commitments. Reserve PPM Admin approval for final governance gates where portfolio alignment is critical. Create clear checklists and criteria for each tollgate stage so teams know what's required before submission. Train approvers on their responsibilities, expected turnaround times, and how to provide constructive feedback. Set service level agreements (SLAs) for approval turnaround at each level (e.g., 2 business days). Configure different approval sequences for different project types or risk levels (simple vs. complex). Review and optimize approval workflows quarterly to remove unnecessary levels or adjust approver types. Use consistent approval sequences across similar project stages to build organizational muscle memory. Related Questions To learn more about Tollgate Creation in Profit.co, click here Frequently Asked Questions Q1. Can I skip approval levels in a sequence? No, approval sequences must progress through each configured level in order. All approvers must approve before the project advances. Q2. What happens if an approver rejects the submission? The project returns to the submitter with feedback. The submitter must address concerns, revise as needed, and resubmit for approval. Q3. Can I have different approval workflows for different tollgate stages? Yes, each stage in your tollgate sequence can have its own unique approval workflow with different approver types and sequences.4 min read
- How do I set up phase-gate approval workflows in Profit.co?In Profit.co, you can configure phase-gate approval workflows for tollgate sequences, requiring projects to receive multi-level approvals before progressing to the next stage, ensuring governance and quality control throughout the project lifecycle. Table of Contents What are phase-gate approval workflows in Profit.co? What is a Tollgate in Profit.co? How do I access Tollgate Sequence settings? How do I configure approval flows for a stage? How do I set up multi-level approval sequences? Best practices for Phase-Gate Approval Workflows Related Questions Frequently Asked Questions What are phase-gate approval workflows in Profit.co? Phase-gate approval workflows are multi-stage approval processes configured for tollgate sequences. They require projects to pass through predefined approval gates before progressing to the next project stage, ensuring proper review, governance, and quality control at critical project milestones. What is a Tollgate in Profit.co? A Tollgate is a project governance checkpoint or gate where projects must meet specific criteria and receive approvals before proceeding to the next stage. Tollgates typically include: Checklist items that must be completed Deliverables that must be submitted Approval workflows that must be satisfied Criteria that must be met To learn how to create this, click here How do I access Tollgate Sequence settings? Before configuring approval flows, you need to access the tollgate sequence: Prerequisites: You need PPM Admin permissions to edit tollgate sequences Step 1 Access the tollgate sequence configuration. Refer to the Tollgate Creation post for creating new tollgate sequences. Locate the tollgate sequence you want to configure. Click "Edit" on the tollgate sequence. A side panel will open, showing the sequence details. How do I configure approval flows for a stage? Set up approval workflows for each stage in your tollgate sequence: Step 1 In the tollgate sequence side panel, choose the stage name you want to configure. Each stage can have its own unique approval workflow. Click the Edit option for the selected stage. In the side panel, switch to the Approval Flow tab. This displays the approval configuration options. Choose between a standard or rule-based approval flow. How do I set up multi-level approval sequences? Create a sequential approval workflow with multiple approval levels using a real business scenario. Business Use Case Example: The 4-Level Approval Flow: Technical Expert (Self-Designated) - Product Manager selects appropriate technical reviewer to validate feasibility PM's Direct Manager (Employee's Manager) - Validates team capacity and resource availability VP of Product (Department Head) - Ensures strategic alignment with department goals PMO (PPM Admin) - Final portfolio governance and prioritization check Configuration Steps: In the Approval Flow tab, click Add Sequence Select first approver type: Employees can designate their own approvers Click "Add Approver" again for the second level Select: Employee's Manager Continue adding levels: Department Head, then PPM Admin Result: Projects must progress through all four approval levels sequentially before advancing to the next stage. Note: Once you enable the Parallel Flow option, the approvers complete the approval process in parallel rather than sequentially. Best practices for Phase-Gate Approval Workflows Design approval sequences that align with your organization's governance model and decision-making hierarchy. Always include Employee's Manager as one approval level to ensure direct supervisors are aware of commitments. Reserve PPM Admin approval for final governance gates where portfolio alignment is critical. Create clear checklists and criteria for each tollgate stage so teams know what's required before submission. Train approvers on their responsibilities, expected turnaround times, and how to provide constructive feedback. Set service level agreements (SLAs) for approval turnaround at each level (e.g., 2 business days). Configure different approval sequences for different project types or risk levels (simple vs. complex). Review and optimize approval workflows quarterly to remove unnecessary levels or adjust approver types. Use consistent approval sequences across similar project stages to build organizational muscle memory. Related Questions To learn more about Tollgate Creation in Profit.co, click here Frequently Asked Questions Q1. Can I skip approval levels in a sequence? No, approval sequences must progress through each configured level in order. All approvers must approve before the project advances. Q2. What happens if an approver rejects the submission? The project returns to the submitter with feedback. The submitter must address concerns, revise as needed, and resubmit for approval. Q3. Can I have different approval workflows for different tollgate stages? Yes, each stage in your tollgate sequence can have its own unique approval workflow with different approver types and sequences.4 min read
- How to Set Up Multi-Stage Approval Workflows for Requests?Profit.co offers the option to establish multi-stage approval workflows for project requests, ensuring proper governance and authorization. Table of Contents What is a multi-stage approval workflow? Why are approval workflows important for requests? How do I set up approval workflows for request stages? How do I configure approval flows for a stage? How do I set up multi-level approval sequences? Best Practices for Approval Workflows Related Questions Frequently Asked Questions What is a multi-stage approval workflow? A multi-stage approval workflow is a structured process in which project requests move through defined stages, with approval requirements at specific stages that must be met before progressing. Why are approval workflows important for requests? Multi-stage approval workflows ensure proper governance, accountability, and strategic alignment before projects are initiated. Here's why this feature matters: Governance and Control: Ensures project requests go through proper review and authorization before receiving resources Strategic Alignment: Allows leadership to evaluate if requests align with organizational priorities and strategy Resource Protection: Prevents unauthorized projects from consuming limited organizational resources Accountability: Creates clear audit trail of who approved what and when How do I set up approval workflows for request stages? Follow these steps to configure multi-stage approvals: Navigate to Settings → Portfolios and Projects → Requests from the left navigation panel On the Request page, switch to the Stages tab Under this tab, you can create different stages for your request workflow Click "Edit" on the request stage. A side panel will open, showing the sequence details. How do I configure approval flows for a stage? Set up approval workflows for each stage in your tollgate sequence: Step 1 In the request stage side panel, choose the stage name you want to configure. Each stage can have its own unique approval workflow. Click the Edit option for the selected stage. In the side panel, switch to the Approval Flow tab. This displays the approval configuration options. Choose between a standard or rule-based approval flow. How do I set up multi-level approval sequences? Create a sequential approval workflow with multiple approval levels using a real business scenario. Business Use Case Example: The 4-Level Approval Flow: Technical Expert (Self-Designated) - Product Manager selects appropriate technical reviewer to validate feasibility PM's Direct Manager (Employee's Manager) - Validates team capacity and resource availability VP of Product (Department Head) - Ensures strategic alignment with department goals PMO (PPM Admin) - Final portfolio governance and prioritization check Configuration Steps: In the Approval Flow tab, click Add Sequence Select first approver type: Employees can designate their own approvers Click "Add Approver" again for the second level Select: Employee's Manager Continue adding levels: Department Head, then PPM Admin Result: Projects must progress through all four approval levels sequentially before advancing to the next stage. Note: Once you enable the Parallel Flow option, the approvers complete the approval process in parallel rather than sequentially. Best Practices for Approval Workflows To maximize the effectiveness of multi-stage approval workflows: Keep Approval Stages Minimal: Limit approval points to 2-4 stages maximum. Too many approvals slow down decision-making and frustrate requesters without adding value. Match Approver to Stage Purpose: Assign approvers with relevant expertise and authority for each stage manager for feasibility, finance for budget, and executives for strategic alignment. Set Clear Approval Criteria: Documenting what approvers should evaluate at each stage. This provides consistency, reduces approval time, and helps requesters prepare Related Questions How to create a project request in the PPM module: Click Here Frequently Asked Questions Q1. What happens if an approver rejects a request? The request typically moves to a rejected stage and returns to the requester with rejection comments. The requester can revise and resubmit, or the request may be closed depending on configuration. Q2. Can I skip the approval process for urgent requests? This depends on your governance policies. Administrators may have override capabilities, but all exceptions should be logged for audit purposes. Consider creating expedited approval workflows for urgent situations. Q3. Can the requester see who is reviewing their request? Yes, the request detail view typically shows current stage, designated approver(s), and approval status so requesters have visibility into the process.4 min read
- How to Set Up Multi-Stage Approval Workflows for Requests?Profit.co offers the option to establish multi-stage approval workflows for project requests, ensuring proper governance and authorization. Table of Contents What is a multi-stage approval workflow? Why are approval workflows important for requests? How do I set up approval workflows for request stages? How do I configure approval flows for a stage? How do I set up multi-level approval sequences? Best Practices for Approval Workflows Related Questions Frequently Asked Questions What is a multi-stage approval workflow? A multi-stage approval workflow is a structured process in which project requests move through defined stages, with approval requirements at specific stages that must be met before progressing. Why are approval workflows important for requests? Multi-stage approval workflows ensure proper governance, accountability, and strategic alignment before projects are initiated. Here's why this feature matters: Governance and Control: Ensures project requests go through proper review and authorization before receiving resources Strategic Alignment: Allows leadership to evaluate if requests align with organizational priorities and strategy Resource Protection: Prevents unauthorized projects from consuming limited organizational resources Accountability: Creates clear audit trail of who approved what and when How do I set up approval workflows for request stages? Follow these steps to configure multi-stage approvals: Navigate to Settings → Portfolios and Projects → Requests from the left navigation panel On the Request page, switch to the Stages tab Under this tab, you can create different stages for your request workflow Click "Edit" on the request stage. A side panel will open, showing the sequence details. How do I configure approval flows for a stage? Set up approval workflows for each stage in your tollgate sequence: Step 1 In the request stage side panel, choose the stage name you want to configure. Each stage can have its own unique approval workflow. Click the Edit option for the selected stage. In the side panel, switch to the Approval Flow tab. This displays the approval configuration options. Choose between a standard or rule-based approval flow. How do I set up multi-level approval sequences? Create a sequential approval workflow with multiple approval levels using a real business scenario. Business Use Case Example: The 4-Level Approval Flow: Technical Expert (Self-Designated) - Product Manager selects appropriate technical reviewer to validate feasibility PM's Direct Manager (Employee's Manager) - Validates team capacity and resource availability VP of Product (Department Head) - Ensures strategic alignment with department goals PMO (PPM Admin) - Final portfolio governance and prioritization check Configuration Steps: In the Approval Flow tab, click Add Sequence Select first approver type: Employees can designate their own approvers Click "Add Approver" again for the second level Select: Employee's Manager Continue adding levels: Department Head, then PPM Admin Result: Projects must progress through all four approval levels sequentially before advancing to the next stage. Note: Once you enable the Parallel Flow option, the approvers complete the approval process in parallel rather than sequentially. Best Practices for Approval Workflows To maximize the effectiveness of multi-stage approval workflows: Keep Approval Stages Minimal: Limit approval points to 2-4 stages maximum. Too many approvals slow down decision-making and frustrate requesters without adding value. Match Approver to Stage Purpose: Assign approvers with relevant expertise and authority for each stage manager for feasibility, finance for budget, and executives for strategic alignment. Set Clear Approval Criteria: Documenting what approvers should evaluate at each stage. This provides consistency, reduces approval time, and helps requesters prepare Related Questions How to create a project request in the PPM module: Click Here Frequently Asked Questions Q1. What happens if an approver rejects a request? The request typically moves to a rejected stage and returns to the requester with rejection comments. The requester can revise and resubmit, or the request may be closed depending on configuration. Q2. Can I skip the approval process for urgent requests? This depends on your governance policies. Administrators may have override capabilities, but all exceptions should be logged for audit purposes. Consider creating expedited approval workflows for urgent situations. Q3. Can the requester see who is reviewing their request? Yes, the request detail view typically shows current stage, designated approver(s), and approval status so requesters have visibility into the process.4 min read
- How to Set Up Multi-Stage Approval Workflows for Requests?Profit.co offers the option to establish multi-stage approval workflows for project requests, ensuring proper governance and authorization. Table of Contents What is a multi-stage approval workflow? Why are approval workflows important for requests? How do I set up approval workflows for request stages? How do I configure approval flows for a stage? How do I set up multi-level approval sequences? Best Practices for Approval Workflows Related Questions Frequently Asked Questions What is a multi-stage approval workflow? A multi-stage approval workflow is a structured process in which project requests move through defined stages, with approval requirements at specific stages that must be met before progressing. Why are approval workflows important for requests? Multi-stage approval workflows ensure proper governance, accountability, and strategic alignment before projects are initiated. Here's why this feature matters: Governance and Control: Ensures project requests go through proper review and authorization before receiving resources Strategic Alignment: Allows leadership to evaluate if requests align with organizational priorities and strategy Resource Protection: Prevents unauthorized projects from consuming limited organizational resources Accountability: Creates clear audit trail of who approved what and when How do I set up approval workflows for request stages? Follow these steps to configure multi-stage approvals: Navigate to Settings → Portfolios and Projects → Requests from the left navigation panel On the Request page, switch to the Stages tab Under this tab, you can create different stages for your request workflow Click "Edit" on the request stage. A side panel will open, showing the sequence details. How do I configure approval flows for a stage? Set up approval workflows for each stage in your tollgate sequence: Step 1 In the request stage side panel, choose the stage name you want to configure. Each stage can have its own unique approval workflow. Click the Edit option for the selected stage. In the side panel, switch to the Approval Flow tab. This displays the approval configuration options. Choose between a standard or rule-based approval flow. How do I set up multi-level approval sequences? Create a sequential approval workflow with multiple approval levels using a real business scenario. Business Use Case Example: The 4-Level Approval Flow: Technical Expert (Self-Designated) - Product Manager selects appropriate technical reviewer to validate feasibility PM's Direct Manager (Employee's Manager) - Validates team capacity and resource availability VP of Product (Department Head) - Ensures strategic alignment with department goals PMO (PPM Admin) - Final portfolio governance and prioritization check Configuration Steps: In the Approval Flow tab, click Add Sequence Select first approver type: Employees can designate their own approvers Click "Add Approver" again for the second level Select: Employee's Manager Continue adding levels: Department Head, then PPM Admin Result: Projects must progress through all four approval levels sequentially before advancing to the next stage. Note: Once you enable the Parallel Flow option, the approvers complete the approval process in parallel rather than sequentially. Best Practices for Approval Workflows To maximize the effectiveness of multi-stage approval workflows: Keep Approval Stages Minimal: Limit approval points to 2-4 stages maximum. Too many approvals slow down decision-making and frustrate requesters without adding value. Match Approver to Stage Purpose: Assign approvers with relevant expertise and authority for each stage manager for feasibility, finance for budget, and executives for strategic alignment. Set Clear Approval Criteria: Documenting what approvers should evaluate at each stage. This provides consistency, reduces approval time, and helps requesters prepare Related Questions How to create a project request in the PPM module: Click Here Frequently Asked Questions Q1. What happens if an approver rejects a request? The request typically moves to a rejected stage and returns to the requester with rejection comments. The requester can revise and resubmit, or the request may be closed depending on configuration. Q2. Can I skip the approval process for urgent requests? This depends on your governance policies. Administrators may have override capabilities, but all exceptions should be logged for audit purposes. Consider creating expedited approval workflows for urgent situations. Q3. Can the requester see who is reviewing their request? Yes, the request detail view typically shows current stage, designated approver(s), and approval status so requesters have visibility into the process.4 min read
- How do I view portfolio health metrics and heatmaps in Profit.co?In Profit.co, the Portfolio Dashboard provides comprehensive health metrics and visual heatmaps that help you monitor project performance, budget utilization, risk status, and strategic alignment across your entire portfolio in a unified view. Table of Contents What are Portfolio Health Metrics in Profit.co? How do I access the Portfolio Dashboard? What summary cards are available on the Portfolio Dashboard? What detailed widgets can I view on the Portfolio Dashboard? How do I view the Projects Progress widget? How do I download the Portfolio Dashboard as a one-pager? Presentation Export with Project Tollgate Tracking Best practices for monitoring Portfolio Health Metrics Related Questions Frequently Asked Questions What are Portfolio Health Metrics in Profit.co? Portfolio Health Metrics are comprehensive performance indicators that provide visibility into the overall status of your portfolio, including project progress, budget utilization, risk distribution, stage analysis, and strategic alignment. These metrics help portfolio managers make informed decisions about resource allocation and strategic priorities. How do I access the Portfolio Dashboard? Follow these steps to view your portfolio health metrics: Step 1 Click on Portfolios and Projects from the left navigation panel. Select Portfolios from the submenu. On the All Portfolios page, click on the portfolio you want to view. In the portfolio detail page, click on the Dashboard tab. You will now see the comprehensive portfolio dashboard with summary cards and detailed widgets. What summary cards are available on the Portfolio Dashboard? The Portfolio Dashboard displays key metrics as summary cards at the top: Summary Card Metric Total Projects Number of projects in the portfolio Projects Progress Overall completion percentage Budget Total allocated budget Spent Amount spent to date Budget Utilization Percentage of budget used What detailed widgets can I view on the Portfolio Dashboard? The portfolio dashboard includes multiple visualization widgets: Widget Purpose Projects Progress Timeline view showing project progress by week/month Tasks Completion Rate Trend analysis of task completion over time Projects by Stage Distribution of projects across lifecycle stages Risk Status Breakdown of portfolio risks by status Strategically Aligned Objectives OKRs and objectives linked to portfolio projects How do I view the Projects Progress widget? Projects Progress – Shows project completion progress over time with weekly or monthly granularity. Tasks Completion Rate – Line chart tracking the percentage of completed tasks over time. Projects by Stage – Donut chart showing the distribution of projects across different lifecycle stages. Risk Status – Donut chart displaying the distribution of risks by their current status. Strategically Aligned Objectives – Table showing OKRs and objectives linked to portfolio projects with progress tracking. How do I download the Portfolio Dashboard as a one-pager? You can export the entire Portfolio Dashboard for sharing or reporting: Step 1 Click on the More Options icon (three dots) in the top right corner of the dashboard. Select Download Portfolio One-Pager from the dropdown menu. Result: The system generates a comprehensive document containing all dashboard summary cards, widgets, and metrics that you can share with stakeholders or include in reports. Presentation Export with Project Tollgate Tracking In addition to the One-Pager export, Profit.co provides a PPM Presentation export at the portfolio level that includes tollgate tracking data for each project. This lets portfolio managers share a structured, stage-by-stage view of all projects in the portfolio as a downloadable PPT file. What is Tollgate Tracking in the PPM Presentation?Tollgates are structured checkpoint stages in a project's lifecycle; each tollgate represents a defined phase that must be reviewed and validated before the project advances. In the PPM Presentation, the tollgate tracking view surfaces the current stage, progress, and validation status of each project within the portfolio, giving stakeholders a governance-ready view of project execution. What the PPM Presentation Export Includes Tollgate tracking progress and current stage for each project in the portfolio Project-level status, timeline, and milestone alignment across the portfolio A consolidated, presentation-ready layout formatted for stakeholder reviews and portfolio governance meetings How to Download the PPM Presentation Navigate to the portfolio and click the required one. Click the Presentation icon to download the portfolio data as a .PPT file. At the Portfolio level, users can view the tollgate tracking process for each project included in the portfolio. This helps stakeholders understand the progress and stage of each project during portfolio reviews. Users can now download the portfolio presentation as a PPT file for offline viewing or sharing with stakeholders. Best practices for monitoring Portfolio Health Metrics Review the portfolio dashboard weekly to stay informed about portfolio health and identify issues early. Pay close attention to the Projects by Stage widget; too many projects in one stage may indicate a bottleneck. Monitor the Risk Status widget regularly and ensure "New" risks are being moved to "Implementation" status promptly. Use the tasks completion rate trend to identify if portfolio velocity is improving or declining over time. Track budget vs. spent vs. budget utilization to ensure spending aligns with project progress. Review strategically aligned objectives quarterly to ensure portfolio investments support strategic goals. Related Questions To learn more about portfolio management in Profit.co Click here Frequently Asked Questions Q1. How often is the portfolio dashboard data updated? The Portfolio Dashboard reflects real-time data and updates automatically as project information changes, providing current portfolio health information. Q2. What does "strategically aligned objectives" mean? These are OKRs or strategic objectives that have been explicitly linked to projects in the portfolio, showing how projects contribute to organizational goals. Q3. What's the difference between project progress and task completion rate? Projects Progress shows overall project milestone completion, while Tasks Completion Rate tracks the percentage of individual tasks completed across all projects.5 min read
- How do I track ROI metrics across the portfolio in Profit.co?In Profit.co, you can track comprehensive ROI (Return on Investment) metrics across your entire portfolio using the PPM Cockpit, which provides visual widgets and summary cards to monitor financial performance, strategic alignment, and benefit realization in a single view. Table of Contents What is ROI tracking in Profit.co? How do I access the PPM Cockpit? What ROI summary cards are available? What ROI widgets are available in the Cockpit? How do I create a folder and a subfolder in the Cockpit? How do I customize the Cockpit with ROI widgets? How do I add summary cards to the Cockpit? Best practices for tracking ROI metrics in Profit.co Related Questions Frequently Asked Questions What is ROI tracking in Profit.co?h2> ROI tracking in Profit.co allows you to monitor the return on investment across your entire portfolio using the PPM (Project Portfolio Management) Cockpit. This feature provides comprehensive financial metrics, strategic alignment analysis, and performance visualization through customizable widgets and summary cards. How do I access the PPM Cockpit? Follow these steps to navigate to the PPM Cockpit: Step 1 Click on Portfolios and Projects from the left navigation panel. Select Cockpit from the Portfolios and Projects menu. You will now see the Cockpit page, where you can create folders and customize your ROI metrics view. What ROI summary cards are available? The PPM Cockpit provides essential ROI summary cards displaying key financial metrics: Summary Card Metric Displayed Purpose Return Ratio Percentage return on investment Shows overall portfolio profitability Plan Planned financial targets Displays budgeted financial goals Actual Actual financial performance Shows realized financial results IRR (Internal Rate of Return) Percentage rate of return Indicates investment efficiency NPV (Net Present Value) Present value of future cash flows Measures investment value Payback Period Time to recover investment (in years) Time to recover investment (in years) Total Budget of Aligned Projects Total budget across portfolio Displays aggregate project funding What ROI widgets are available in the Cockpit? The PPM Cockpit offers multiple visualization widgets for comprehensive ROI analysis: Widget Purpose Investment Flow: Portfolio to Cost Category Shows budget distribution by strategic alignment status Budget Distribution by Strategic Alignment Displays budget allocation across strategically aligned initiatives IRR Distribution by Performance Visualizes the internal rate of return across performance categories CapEx, OpEx, and Amortization Trend Tracks capital expenditure, operating expenses, and amortization over time Budget Utilization Trend Monitors planned vs. forecast vs. actual budget consumption Budget Variance Analysis Compares planned, forecast, and actual spending to identify variances Benefits Realization Timeline Shows when benefits are expected vs. actually realized How do I create a folder and a subfolder in the Cockpit? Organize your ROI metrics by creating folders in the Cockpit: On the Cockpit page, click the + icon to create a new folder. In the pop-up window, enter the folder name (e.g., "Executive Dashboard"). Set the visibility (who can access this folder). Click Add to create the folder. Your new folder will appear in the Cockpit navigation and is ready for subfolders and widgets. Create subfolders within folders for detailed organization: Click on the folder where you want to add a subfolder. Click the + icon within the folder to add a subfolder. Enter the Subfolder Name (e.g., "Financial Metrics", "Strategic Alignment", "Benefits Tracking"). Click Add to create the subfolder. The subfolder will now appear nested under the parent folder. How do I customize the Cockpit with ROI widgets? Add widgets to your subfolder to visualize ROI metrics: Step 1 In your subfolder, click the Customize button. In the customization panel, use the Search Box to find specific widgets. Browse through available ROI widgets: Investment Flow: Portfolio to Cost Category Strategic Alignment of Budget Budget Distribution by Strategic Alignment IRR Distribution by Performance CapEx, OpEx, and Amortization Trend Budget Utilization Trend Budget Variance Analysis Benefits Realization Timeline Check the boxes next to the widgets you want to add. Click Add to include these widgets in your view. The selected widgets will now display your ROI metrics visually. How do I add summary cards to the Cockpit? Include summary cards alongside widgets for quick metric overview: In the customization panel (accessed via Customize button), switch to the Summary Card section. Select the summary cards you want to display: Return Ratio Plan Actual IRR NPV Payback Period Total Budget of Aligned Projects Check the boxes next to the desired summary cards. Click Add to include them in your view. Result: You can now view all ROI metrics in one single, comprehensive view combining both widgets and summary cards. Best practices for tracking ROI metrics in Profit.co Create dedicated folders for different stakeholder groups (executive dashboard, finance team, portfolio managers) with appropriate visibility settings. Use subfolders to organize metrics by theme: Financial Performance, Strategic Alignment, and Benefits Realization. Include both summary cards and widgets in each view for comprehensive insights: summary cards for quick numbers and widgets for detailed analysis. Use the Strategic Alignment of Budget widget to identify and reallocate funds from non-aligned to aligned initiatives. Monitor the Budget Utilization Trend widget monthly to catch spending anomalies before they become critical issues. Related Questions To learn more about portfolio management in Profit.co, Click here Frequently Asked Questions Q1. Can multiple users access the same Cockpit folder? Yes, folder access is controlled by visibility settings. You can share folders with specific users, teams, or make them organization-wide. Q2. How often are the ROI metrics updated in the Cockpit? ROI metrics are typically updated in real-time as project data changes, providing current financial performance information. Q3. Can I export the Cockpit view for presentations? Check for export options in the Cockpit. Many visualization tools offer PDF or image export functionality for sharing in reports.5 min read
- How to create a Project Request in the PPM module?Profit.co provides an option for users to create project requests in the Project Portfolio Management (PPM) module. Table of Contents What is a Project Request in PPM? Why Use the Project Request Feature? How to Create a Project Request How do I customize Request Stages in Profit.co? What are the different ways to create a Project in Profit.co? Best Practices for Managing Project Requests Related Questions Frequently Asked Questions What is a Project Request in PPM? Project Requests are preliminary submissions for potential projects that need to be evaluated, approved, and refined before becoming active projects. They serve as a gateway to ensure that only strategic, well-planned initiatives move forward into your project portfolio. Key characteristics: Structured entry point for all project ideas Go through customizable workflow stages Include stage-based checklists for evaluation Can be converted into full projects once approved Track the journey from idea to execution Why Use the Project Request Feature? Structured Project Intake Process The project request feature provides several key benefits for organizations: Centralized Idea Management: All project proposals flow through a single, standardized channel, eliminating scattered emails and informal requests that often get lost or overlooked. Strategic Alignment: By capturing all requests formally, leadership can evaluate each proposal against organizational goals, ensuring resources are allocated to initiatives that drive the most value. Improved Decision-Making: With all project ideas documented in one place, decision-makers can compare proposals side-by-side, assess resource requirements, and make informed choices about which projects to pursue. How to Create a Project Request Step 1 Navigate to Portfolios and Projects → Requests from the left navigation panel. On the Requests page, click the + Create Request button Note: Summary cards are available in the list view and provide a quick overview of request information. Step 2 Once you click the Create Request button, a side panel will appear where you'll enter all relevant information about your proposed project. Essential Request Information Request Name Request Type Estimated Cost Expected Return Priority Level Value Execution Factor Benefit Index Complexity Index After completing all necessary fields, click the Create button to submit your request. Step 3 Now that the request has been created: Click on the request name to dive deeper into the workflow You'll see multiple stages of the project lifecycle Each stage offers the flexibility to create customized checklists tailored to your needs To create a new checklist: Click the "Add Checklist" button Name the checklist appropriately If necessary, assign a different owner to complete it Add checklist items relevant to that stage Note: Request workflows now have stage-based access and automated progression, ensuring tighter control, smoother approvals, and reduced manual steps. Step 4 When the checklist in the final stage of the project request is completed: The request is ready to be converted into a new project Click the "Convert to Project" button The request will transition into an active project in your portfolio How do I customize Request Stages in Profit.co? You can add new request stages to match your organization's approval workflow: Navigate to Settings from the left navigation panel Go to Portfolios and Projects → Requests Switch to the Stages tab Click on the + Create button to add a new stage Enter the Stage Name and add other relevant details Click the Create button This customization allows you to tailor the request workflow to your organization's specific approval process and governance requirements. What are the different ways to create a Project in Profit.co? Besides converting a request, you can create projects through multiple pathways: Method 1: From Project Requests (Recommended) Follow the request workflow process described above, allowing for proper evaluation and approval. Method 2: From Prioritization Review projects based on prioritization criteria in the Prioritization/Optimization Grid Once identified as valuable, click the Convert to Project button Turn prioritized requests into actionable tasks Method 3: Direct Project Creation Navigate to My Projects from the left panel Click Create Project Enter the required details Click Create Note: The Project Request method is recommended as it ensures proper vetting and alignment with organizational goals. Best Practices for Managing Project Requests To maximize the effectiveness of Project Requests in your PPM module: Standardize Information: Create templates for request submissions to ensure consistency Clear Stage Definitions: Define what needs to be accomplished at each workflow stage Assign Stage Owners: Designate responsible parties for each stage to ensure timely progression Regular Reviews: Schedule periodic reviews of pending requests to prevent bottlenecks Communicate Status: Keep requestors informed about the status of their submissions Set Clear Criteria: Establish objective criteria for moving requests between stages Use Checklists Effectively: Create comprehensive checklists that cover all evaluation aspects Track Metrics: Monitor request volumes, approval rates, and conversion times Prioritize Actively: Use the Prioritization Grid to evaluate multiple requests simultaneously Document Decisions: Record why requests were approved, rejected, or postponed Related Questions How to create a Project in the PPM module, Click here What is the Prioritization and Optimization grid in the PPM module, Click here Frequently Asked Questions Q1. Who can create Project Requests in Profit.co? Permissions can be configured by administrators. Q2. Can I edit a Project Request after submission? Yes, requests can typically be edited during the workflow stages, though permissions may vary depending on your organization's settings and the current stage. . Q3. How long does the Request approval process take? The timeline depends on your organization's workflow configuration, the number of stages, and how quickly checklist items are completed at each stage.5 min read
- How to Link Portfolios to OKRs?Profit.co provides an option to link portfolios to strategic objectives by aligning them with OKRs through the Strategic Alignment tab. Table of Contents What is portfolio-to-OKR alignment? Why is linking portfolios to OKRs important? How do I link portfolios to OKRs? Best Practices for Portfolio-to-OKR Alignment Related Questions Frequently Asked Questions What is portfolio-to-OKR alignment? Portfolio-to-OKR alignment is the process of connecting portfolio collections to organizational objectives and key results, creating a clear relationship between strategic goals and portfolio execution. Why is linking portfolios to OKRs important? Connecting portfolios to OKRs ensures that entire collections of projects support strategic goals. Here's why this feature matters: Strategic Coherence: Ensures all projects within a portfolio collectively support organizational objectives and strategic direction Portfolio Justification: Provides clear rationale for portfolio existence and continued investment based on strategic contribution Resource Allocation: Helps prioritize resources across portfolios based on strategic importance and OKR alignment How do I link portfolios to OKRs? Follow these steps to create portfolio-to-OKR alignment: Step 1: Navigate to Portfolios Navigate to Portfolios and Projects → Portfolios from the left navigation panel The portfolios list page will display all available portfolios Click on the portfolio name you want to link to OKRs The portfolio overview page will open Step 2: Access Strategic Alignment Switch to the Strategic Alignment tab This tab shows current OKR alignments and alignment options Click on the Align OKRs option A selection panel will appear Step 3: Select Objective Browse or search for the relevant objective View available objectives from your OKR framework Select the objective that this portfolio supports Review the objective's key results if displayed Click on the Update button The portfolio is now linked to the selected OKR The alignment appears in the Strategic Alignment tab The aligned portfolio appears as a new key result under the objective, and its progress automatically updates the OKR progress. Best Practices for Portfolio-to-OKR Alignmen To maximize the effectiveness of portfolio-to-OKR linking: Review Alignment Annually: Reassessing portfolio-to-OKR connections each planning cycle, when OKRs are set ensures continued relevance as strategic priorities evolve. Limit Alignments to Relevant OKRs: Link portfolios only to objectives they genuinely support; avoid linking to every objective, which dilutes strategic focus and clarity. Related Questions How to Link Projects to OKRs Using Strategic Alignment, Click Here Frequently Asked Questions Q1.Should I align portfolios to Objectives or Key Results? Yes. Portfolios can be aligned to either Objectives or Key Results based on how you want progress to roll up and be tracked. Q2. How many OKRs should I link to each portfolio? Link to all truly relevant OKRs, typically 1-3. More than 3 may indicate the portfolio is too broad or alignment is too loose. Focus on quality over quantity of alignments. 3 min read
- How do I build a benefit plan in Profit.co?Profit.co allows organizations to track and analyze the financial benefits associated with projects and initiatives. This feature enables comprehensive Cost Benefit Analysis (CBA) by capturing tangible financial returns, helping decision-makers evaluate project ROI and prioritize investments. Table of Contents What is a Benefit Plan in Profit.co? How to Build a Benefit Plan in Profit.co? Best practices for building effective Benefit Plans Related Questions Frequently Asked Questions What is a Benefit Plan in Profit.co? A Benefit Plan in Profit.co is a structured framework that defines the expected financial benefits a project will deliver to the organization. It works in conjunction with the Cost-Benefit Analysis feature to provide a complete picture of project value How to Build a Benefit Plan in Profit.co? Step 1 Navigate to Settings → Portfolios and Projects → Project from the left navigation panel. Switch to the Financial tab Under Financials, enable Cost-Benefit Analysis (CBA) Why Enable CBA? Enabling Cost-Benefit Analysis is the foundation for building benefit plans. Without CBA enabled, you cannot define or track benefits at the project level. Step 2 Benefit types define the categories of value your projects will deliver: Why Create Custom Benefit Types? Align benefit tracking with organizational strategic goals Standardize benefit measurement across the portfolio Enable comparison of similar benefit types across projects Facilitate reporting on specific benefit categories Steps to Create Benefit Level: In the Financial tab, scroll to the Benefit Level section Click the + Create Benefit Level button A popup window will appear Enter the Name of the benefit type (Optionally, add a Description explaining how this benefit should be measured Click Create to save the new benefit type Repeat this process for each benefit type relevant to your organization. Steps to Create a Benefit Category: Click the + Create Benefit Category button A pop-up window will appear Enter the Name of the benefit type Click Create to save the new benefit type Step 3 Once CBA is enabled and benefit types are created, build the benefit plan for your specific project: Go to Portfolios and Projects from the main navigation Select the Project where you want to create a benefit plan Open the project details page Navigate to the Cost-Benefit Analysis tab Now you can define the specific benefits this project will deliver: Click + Add Benefit button In the right panel, click Create Benefit Category, choose the category, and then click Create. Add the planned values for all benefits, and later update them with the actual benefit values. Best practices for building effective Benefit Plans Include measurable financial benefits for ROI calculation Avoid overly optimistic benefit projections Record all assumptions, calculations, and data sources Related Questions Learn how to use cost-benefit analysis in Profit.co. Click Here Frequently Asked Questions Q1.Is Cost-Benefit Analysis required for all projects? This depends on your organization's policies. Many organizations require CBA for projects above a certain investment threshold or strategic importance level. Q2.How often should I update actual benefit realization? Monthly or quarterly updates are common, depending on project duration and benefit measurement cycles. Establish a regular cadence and stick to it. Q3.Can external stakeholders see our benefit plans? Visibility depends on your permission settings.3 min read
- How do I Import Goals in Profit.co?In Profit.co, you can import multiple goals at once using a CSV file, allowing you to quickly set up goals for individual without manual data entry. Table of Contents What is the Import Goals feature in Profit.co? What file format is required for importing goals? How do I access the Import Goals feature? How do I upload my goals CSV file? Best practices for importing goals in Profit.co Related Questions Frequently Asked Questions What is the Import Goals feature in Profit.co? The Import Goals feature allows you to bulk upload multiple goals from a CSV file instead of creating them one by one. This saves time when setting up goals for multiple team members or when migrating goals from another system. What file format is required for importing goals? Only the Comma-Separated Value (.csv) format is accepted for goals import. Other file formats like Excel (.xlsx), text (.txt), or PDF (.pdf) are not supported and will be rejected during upload. How do I access the Import Goals feature? Follow these steps to start importing goals: Click on Performance from the left navigation panel. Select Goals from the Performance menu. Click on the +Create Goals dropdown button. Select Import from the dropdown options. You will now see the User Goal Import page, where you can upload your CSV file. How do I upload my goals CSV file? Once you have prepared your CSV file with goals data: Step 1 On the User Goal Import page, click the Browse button. Navigate to the location of your CSV file on your computer. Select the file and click Open. After the file is uploaded, click Next to proceed to field mapping. Note: The only accepted file type is Comma Separated Value (.csv) format. The system will display your uploaded file name and begin the import process. Step 2 Field mapping automatically matches the columns in your CSV file to the corresponding fields in Profit.co. Step to Complete Field Mapping: Review the automatic field mapping. Click Next to proceed to validation. Step 3 Profit.co validates your imported data across four categories to ensure data quality: Validation Type What is Checked Mandatory Values Ensures all required fields have values Data Format Verifies dates, numbers, and text are in correct format Duplicates Checks for duplicate goal entries Reference Data Validates that referenced users, teams, or categories exist in the system The system will display validation results for each category. All validations must pass before you can proceed. Step 4 All these fields must contain valid data in your CSV file for the import to succeed. The Start Import section shows the summary of your records. Once everything is good to go, you can click on the Start Import button. Your data will be successfully imported. Best practices for importing goals in Profit.co Always download and review the sample CSV file before creating your own import file to ensure correct formatting. Prepare your CSV file in a spreadsheet application like Excel or Google Sheets, then export to CSV format. Use the exact column headers provided in the sample CSV file to ensure automatic field mapping works correctly. Validate your data in the spreadsheet before uploading to catch errors early (check for empty cells in mandatory fields). Import goals during off-peak hours if you're uploading a large number of records to avoid system slowdowns. Review the imported goals immediately after import to ensure all data appears correctly in the system. Related Questions To learn more about how to create and manage goals in Profit.co Click here Frequently Asked Questions Q1.Can I import goals in Excel format (.xlsx)? No, only CSV (.csv) format is supported for goals import. If your data is in Excel format, save it as a CSV file before uploading.. Q2.How many goals can I import at once? While there's typically no strict limit, it's recommended to test with smaller batches first and contact your administrator if you need to import hundreds or thousands of goals. Q3.What date format should I use in the CSV file? Check the sample CSV file for the exact format. Common formats are MM/DD/YYYY or DD/MM/YYYY. Consistency is key—use the same format throughout your file.4 min read
- How to configure peer assessment in performance reviews?Peer assessments in Profit.co help employees reflect on their performance through structured feedback from colleagues. By configuring peer assessment settings, organizations can ensure reviews are meaningful, contextually relevant, and aligned with their performance management goals. Table of Contents What are the benefits of configuring peer assessments in Profit.co? How to configure peer assessment in performance reviews? Best practices for configuring peer assessments in Profit.co Related Questions Frequently Asked Questions What are the benefits of configuring peer assessments in Profit.co? Configuring peer assessments allows organizations to customize how peer feedback is collected and used in performance reviews. Key Benefits: Structured Feedback: Peer assessments can be configured to focus on specific competencies, goals, OKRs, and Q&A relevant to each role. Quality Control: Role-based restrictions ensure feedback comes from appropriate organizational levels. Authentic Input: Flexible options allow peers to contribute where they have genuine experience. Reduced Administrative Burden: Automated controls eliminate manual validation and oversight. Scalable Process: Consistent standards can be maintained across large organizations. How to configure peer assessment in performance reviews? Follow these steps to set up and customize peer assessments in Profit.co: Step 1 Navigate to Settings → Performance → Reviews from the left navigation panel. Switch to the Review Template tab. Select the Review Template you want to configure and click on the Edit icon. Step 2 On the Edit Review Template page, select the Review Process section. Click on the Edit icon for Peer Assessment. Step 3 In the Peer Assessment Options section, you can configure various settings to customize how peer feedback is collected and managed. The following table outlines all available toggle options: Toggle Option Description Who can nominate peers? Control which roles (HR, HR BP, Manager, Employee) have permission to select peer reviewers for performance assessments Auto approve peer nominations Enable automatic approval of peer nominations without requiring manual review by HR or managers Limit the number of peers for each employee assessment Set a maximum number of peer reviewers that can be assigned to evaluate each employee Limit the number of Peer assessments each employee can perform Restrict how many peer assessments an individual employee can be asked to complete Peer can provide rating only for Peer's Q&A Allow peers to review and provide feedback only on specific questions and answers, not on other components Peer can provide rating only for Peer's Competency Enable peers to evaluate only competencies, allowing focused feedback on skill-based assessments Peer can provide rating only for Peer's Goals Restrict peer feedback to goals only, enabling reviewers to assess goal achievement and progress Peer can provide rating only for Peer's OKRs Allow peers to provide ratings exclusively for Objectives and Key Results (OKRs) Employees can suggest peer Reviewers Enable employees to nominate or suggest their own peer reviewers (can be set as Optional, Mandatory, or disabled) Employees can choose their Reviewees Allow employees to select which colleagues they want to provide peer feedback for Anonymize individual peer reviews Hide the identity of peer reviewers to encourage honest and unbiased feedback Limit peer Assessment Reviewers Restrict peer reviewer selection to specific Job Titles or Grades, ensuring feedback comes from appropriate organizational levels Allow 'Not Applicable' option in peer assessments Enable peer reviewers to skip competency questions they don't have enough context to evaluate, improving feedback quality Note: Enabling/Disabling these options will be reflected in new performance reviews only. Step 4 In the Performance Review Assessment Includes section, select the components that can be evaluated in the review (Q&A, Goals, OKRs, Competencies). In the Who can view peer assessment? section, set and restrict visibility for peer reviews based on your organization’s privacy requirements. Step 5 Once you’ve configured all settings, navigate back to the Review Process tab page and click on Update to save your changes. Best practices for configuring peer assessments in Profit.co Define clear criteria: Use role-based restrictions to ensure peers are at appropriate levels to provide meaningful feedback. Enable flexibility: Allow the “Not Applicable” option to improve feedback authenticity. Focus feedback: Configure assessments to include only relevant components for each role. Set appropriate visibility: Balance transparency with confidentiality based on your organizational culture. Review regularly: Periodically assess your peer assessment configuration to ensure it meets evolving needs. Related Questions To learn more about how to reopen peer assessment from HR Dashboard, click here. Frequently Asked Questions Q1. Can I restrict who can be selected as a peer reviewer? Yes, you can enable the "Limit peer Assessment Reviewers" toggle and filter by Job Title or Grade to restrict peer reviewer selection to specific roles. Q2. What happens if a peer doesn't feel qualified to rate a competency? If you've enabled the "Allow 'Not Applicable' option," peer reviewers can uncheck any competency they don't have enough context to evaluate, and it will be excluded from their assessment. Q3. Can I configure different peer assessment settings for different review templates? Yes, peer assessment settings are configured at the review template level, allowing you to customize settings for different types of reviews or employee groups.5 min read
- How to Link Projects to OKRs Using Strategic Alignment?Profit.co provides an option to link your projects to strategic objectives by aligning them with OKRs through the Strategic Alignment tab. Table of Contents What is strategic alignment in PPM? Why is linking projects to OKRs important? How do I link projects to OKRs? What happens after linking projects to OKRs? Best Practices for Strategic Alignment Related Questions Frequently Asked Questions What is strategic alignment in PPM? Strategic alignment is the process of connecting projects to organizational objectives and key results, creating a clear relationship between execution and strategy. Why is linking projects to OKRs important? Strategic alignment between projects and OKRs ensures that execution drives strategic results. Here's why this feature matters: Strategic Contribution: Aligning projects with OKRs ensures every project contributes to your organization's top priorities and strategic goals. Progress Visibility: Track how project execution directly influences key results and strategic progress in real-time. Resource Justification: Demonstrate clear connection between project investments and strategic outcomes How do I link projects to OKRs? Follow these steps to create strategic alignment: Step 1 Navigate to Portfolios and Projects from the left navigation panel Click on the project you want to link to OKRs The project overview page will open Step 2 Switch to the Strategic Alignment tab This tab shows current OKR alignments and alignment options Click on the Align OKRs option. Step 3 Browse or search for the relevant Objective Select the objective that this project supports Note: Projects can now be aligned to OKRs even when their timeframes only partially overlap. You may see visual indicators during alignment: Orange color - Indicates the project period does not fully match the OKR period "Does not overlap" label - Shows periods that have no overlap You can proceed with alignment even if periods only partially match Click on the Update button The project is now linked to the selected OKR The alignment appears in the Strategic Alignment tab Controlling progress tracking for partial period alignments: When a project is partially aligned to an OKR, you can control whether its progress appears in the OKR using the "Allow past/future period check-ins" toggle in OKR settings: Toggle enabled - Progress from the partially aligned project appears in the OKR Toggle disabled - Progress from the partially aligned project does not appear in the OKR Example: A project running from December 29 to March 29 can align to a Q2 OKR, and you can control whether its progress contributes to the OKR metrics. What happens after linking projects to OKRs? On the Project: Strategic Alignment tab shows linked OKR(s) Project context includes strategic objective Project details reference aligned key results Clear strategic purpose displayed On the OKR: OKR shows linked projects Progress influenced by project completion Portfolio view includes aligned projects Strategic progress visibility enhanced For Reporting: Dashboards show project-to-OKR connections Reports include strategic alignment data Portfolio views filtered by OKR alignment Executive views show strategy execution Best Practices for Strategic Alignment To maximize the effectiveness of project-to-OKR linking: Align During Project Planning: Link projects to OKRs during project initiation, not as an afterthought,ensures strategic intent from the start and better resource allocation decisions. Review Alignment Quarterly: Reassess project-to-OKR connections each quarter when OKRs are reviewed, ensuring continued relevance and allows for strategic pivots as priorities evolve. Limit Alignments to Relevant OKRs: Link projects only to OKRs they genuinely support,avoid the temptation to link to every objective, which dilutes strategic focus and clarity. Related Questions How do I create a Key Result using Project tracked in Profit, Click here Frequently Asked Questions Q1. Should I align projects to Objectives or Key Results? Typically, you align to Objectives, which represent the strategic goal. The system may show the Objective's Key Results for context, helping you understand how the project contributes. Q2. How many OKRs should I link to each project? Link to all truly relevant OKRs, typically 1-3. More than 3 may indicate the project is too broad or alignment is too loose. Focus on quality over quantity of alignments. Q3. Can I align a project to someone else's OKR? Yes, if you have visibility to the OKR and your project genuinely supports it. This is common for projects that support cross-functional or company-wide objectives.4 min read
- How do I set the department visibility and the access list?In Profit.co, you can set visibility for department OKRs as well as Individual and team OKRs. This feature allows you to control who can view and access specific department objectives and key results within your organization with flexible visibility options tailored to your organizational hierarchy. Table of Contents What is the Department Visibility and Access List feature? Why does this feature matter? How to set department visibility and access lists in Profit.co What are the five visibility levels in Profit.co? Best practices for setting department visibility in Profit.co Related Questions Frequently Asked Questions What is the Department Visibility and Access List feature? Profit.co's visibility and access control feature enables organizations to manage the transparency of department, team, and individual OKRs. You can choose from five visibility levels (Public, My Management, My Directs, My Team, and Access List) to ensure that the right people have access to the right information at the right time. Why does this feature matter? Department visibility and access lists enhance organizational efficiency by granting appropriate personnel access to relevant information and controls. This ensures: Streamlined communication across teams and departments Minimized errors by restricting sensitive information to authorized users Enhanced collaboration among team members who need shared visibility Better security by controlling who can view strategic objectives Flexible transparency allows you to balance openness with confidentiality Hierarchical alignment ensures managers and leadership have appropriate visibility How to set department visibility and access lists in Profit.co Follow these steps to configure visibility settings for your department's OKRs: Step 1 Go to Settings in your Profit.co account Navigate to Strategy Execution and click Authoring On the General tab, under Visibility and Access Control, ensure the required visibility levels are enabled for your organization Only visibility levels enabled here will appear in the dropdown when creating objectives Step 2 Go to OKRs and click on the My OKRs menu from the left navigation panel. Switch to the Department OKR Tab (e.g., Marketing, Corporate). Click on the Create Objective button. A side panel will open, displaying the Visibility option. When you click on the Visibility dropdown, you'll see five options: Once you select the appropriate visibility level, click on the Create button to apply your settings. Note: By default, visibility is set as Public. What are the five visibility levels in Profit.co? Understanding each visibility level helps you make informed decisions about OKR transparency: Visibility Level File Names Who Can View Best Used For Public Everyone in the company Company-wide initiatives, transparent goals, and cross-functional objectives My Management Your manager and all managers above them Goals requiring leadership oversight and approval My Directs Only the people you manage directly Tactical team objectives for immediate reports My Team All employees reporting to you directly or indirectly Department-wide goals across your entire team hierarchy Access List Only selected individuals, teams, or departments Sensitive projects, confidential initiatives, or selective cross-functional collaboration Best practices for setting department visibility in Profit.co Start with appropriate defaults: Consider your organization's culture if transparency is valued, default to Public visibility; if confidentiality is important, use hierarchical options or Access List. Match visibility to sensitivity: Use Public for general initiatives, My Management for goals requiring oversight, and Access List for confidential projects. Communicate visibility choices: Let team members know why certain OKRs have restricted visibility to avoid confusion or mistrust. Related Questions Click here to learn more about how to set visibility for team OKRs in Profit.co Frequently Asked Questions Q1. Can I change the visibility of an existing department OKR? Yes, you can modify the visibility settings of an existing department OKR by editing the objective and selecting a different visibility level from the dropdown menu. Q2. What is the default visibility setting for new department OKRs? By default, visibility is set as Public for new department OKRs, making them visible to all users in the organization. Q3. What's the difference between "My Directs" and "My Team"? My Directs shows the OKR only to people who report directly to you (your immediate team members). My Team shows the OKR to all employees in your reporting hierarchy, including people who report to your direct reports.4 min read
- How to perform check-in through Profit.co mobile application?Profit.co’s mobile app lets you update Key Result progress anytime, anywhere, ensuring real-time visibility and consistent OKR tracking on the go. Table of Contents Why Use Mobile Check-ins in Profit.co? How to Perform a Check-in Using the Profit.co Mobile App Best Practices for Mobile OKR Check-ins Frequently Asked Questions Why Use Mobile Check-ins in Profit.co? Mobile check-ins help you stay aligned with your goals even when you’re away from your desk. With instant updates and real-time progress tracking, teams can make faster decisions and stay accountable without delays. How to Perform a Check-in Using the Profit.co Mobile App Step 1: Open the OKRs Menu Tap the ellipsis (⋮) icon in the top-left corner of the app. Select OKRs from the menu. Step 2: Choose the OKR View Select All OKRs or My Departments / Employees OKRs, based on your access. Step 3: Select the Objective Tap the Objective you want to update. Step 4: Update Key Result Progress Under the Key Results section, Click and drag the check-in slider to update progress. Tap Check-in to save the update. Best Practices for Mobile OKR Check-ins Update progress immediately after completing key activities. Add accurate progress values to reflect real performance. Perform check-ins regularly to avoid last-minute updates. Review Objective progress before submitting check-ins. Use mobile check-ins during meetings or field work for accuracy. Frequently Asked Questions Q1. Can I check in to OKRs from anywhere? Yes. The Profit.co mobile app allows check-ins from any location. Q2. Who can perform mobile check-ins? Users with access to the Objective or Key Result can perform check-ins. Q3. Does mobile check-in update reports instantly? Yes. Progress updates sync in real time across dashboards and reports.2 min read
- What options are available in the 'Settings' section of the Profit.co mobile application?The Settings section in the Profit.co mobile application lets you manage your account, preferences, users, and app appearance, ensuring a secure, personalized, and efficient mobile experience. Table of Contents Why is the Settings section important in the Profit.co mobile app? How do I access the Settings section in the Profit.co mobile app? What options can I configure in the Settings section? Best practices for using the Settings section in Profit.co mobile app Frequently Asked Questions Why is the Settings section important in the Profit.co mobile app? Mobile apps play a central role in managing work on the go. The Settings section in Profit.co helps users: Personalize the app experience Secure their account access Manage users and permissions Switch roles when acting as a proxy Control app appearance and device access This ensures smooth goal tracking and management anytime, anywhere. How do I access the Settings section in the Profit.co mobile app? Step 1: Tap the Profile icon from the bottom-right corner of the app. Step 2: A side panel opens. Tap the Settings (⚙️) icon, where you can manage all available options. What options can I configure in the Settings section? When you tap the Settings icon, you can manage the following: 1. Theme Choose between Light, Dark, or System Default Improves visual comfort based on user preference 2. Settings Preferences – Change Password Enter your current password Set and confirm a new password Save changes securely User Management Users by Directory View the list of all active users Terminated Users View the list of terminated users Time Zone Update your time zone Ensures accurate check-ins, reminders, and reports Support TV & Devices Superusers can set up Profit.co on Apple TV Monitor organizational OKRs on large screens Access goals from multiple locations and devices 3. User Information The User Information section displays your basic profile details, including: Manager name Date of joining Department Grade Other organizational information This helps users quickly view their employment details without switching platforms. 4. Product Help Access help resources related to the Profit.co mobile app Useful for understanding features and workflows on the go 5. Log Out Log out of the Profit.co mobile application anytime Recommended when using shared or public devices Switch User If assigned as a Proxy, you can switch to another user’s account Click the Profile again at the top and select the users to switch accounts. Helps track and manage activities on behalf of that user Best practices for using the Settings section in Profit.co mobile app Update your time zone to ensure accurate check-ins Use strong passwords and change them regularly Assign proxy access only when necessary Choose themes that reduce eye strain Log out when accessing from shared devices Frequently Asked Questions Q1. Where can I find the Settings option in the new mobile app? Tap the Profile icon (bottom-right) → Settings icon from the side panel. Q2. Can I change my password from the mobile app? Yes. Go to Settings → Preferences → Change Password. Q3. Can I view my manager and department details in the app? Yes. All basic details are available under User Information.3 min read
- How to initiate a Performance Improvement Plan (PIP) in Profit.co?In Profit.co, HR teams and managers can initiate a Performance Improvement Plan (PIP) to help employees improve performance in specific skill or role-related areas through a structured and guided approach. Table of Contents What is a Performance Improvement Plan (PIP) in Profit.co? Why Use the Performance Improvement Plan Feature? Who Can Initiate a PIP in Profit.co? How to Initiate a Performance Improvement Plan (PIP) in Profit.co What Happens After PIP Initiation? Tracking and Completing the PIP Signing Off and Closing the PIP Best Practices for Using Performance Improvement Plans (PIP) in Profit.co Related Questions Frequently Asked Questions What is a Performance Improvement Plan (PIP) in Profit.co? A Performance Improvement Plan (PIP) is a structured development plan used to support employees who are struggling to meet performance expectations. It clearly defines improvement areas, goals, timelines, and coaching support. PIPs in Profit.co ensure transparency, accountability, and continuous guidance throughout the improvement journey. Why Use the Performance Improvement Plan Feature? The PIP feature in Profit.co helps organizations: Support employees with clear improvement goals and expectations Personalize performance improvement based on individual needs Enable managers and mentors to coach effectively Track progress and outcomes in a structured manner Ensure fair and documented performance management Who Can Initiate a PIP in Profit.co? HR Admins HR Business Partners (HRBPs) Authorized Initiators Note: Only HR Admins and HRBPs can delete a Performance Improvement Plan. How to Initiate a Performance Improvement Plan (PIP) in Profit.co Step 1: Navigate to the PIP Section Go to Performance → HR Administration from the left navigation panel On the HR Administration page, click Performance Improvement Plan Click Initiate PIP to create a new plan Step 2: Enter PIP Details Clicking + Initiate PIP opens a side panel Enter all required PIP details (employee, focus areas, timeline, goals, etc.) Send the PIP for approval Once sent for approval, the PIP is created with a Proposed status. Step 3: Initiate the PIP The assigned coach or mentor can review and modify details if needed Add additional coaches or mentors, if required Click Initiate to start the PIP What Happens After PIP Initiation? Once initiated, the PIP remains in Pending status The employee can Accept or Reject the PIP under My PIPs Note: Accept and Reject options are available for all development plans (IDP, PIP, and SDP). Tracking and Completing the PIP After acceptance, the PIP moves to the Initiated stage Both the employee and mentor can collaborate and track progress Use the Update button to log progress regularly Signing Off and Closing the PIP Once the required progress is completed, the coach clicks Sign-off Add comments and confirm the sign-off The sign-off request is sent to the HRBP (PIP initiator) The HRBP reviews and closes the PIP Notes PIPs can be deleted directly from the HR Administration page Deleting a PIP triggers notifications to relevant stakeholders Only HR Admins and HRBPs have deletion privileges Best Practices for Using Performance Improvement Plans (PIP) in Profit.co Define clear, measurable goals aligned with role expectations. Personalize the PIP based on individual performance gaps. Assign the right coach or mentor for continuous guidance. Track progress regularly with timely updates and feedback. Complete sign-off promptly once improvement goals are met. Related Questions To learn the process of initiating an Individual Development Plan [PIP], click here. Frequently Asked Questions Q1. Can employees reject a PIP in Profit.co? Yes. Employees can accept or reject a PIP from the My PIPs section. Q2. Who can close a Performance Improvement Plan? Only the HRBP who initiated the PIP can close it after coach's sign-off. Q3. Are PIPs mandatory for all employees? No. PIPs are initiated only when performance improvement support is required.4 min read
- How do I set up rule-based point allocations in Profit.co?Profit.co allow administrators to automatically distribute additional recognition points to employees based on specific criteria such as department, role, or custom attributes. Table of Contents What are Rule-Based Point Allocations? What employee attributes can I use for Rule-Based Point Allocations? How to Set Up Rule-Based Point Allocations in Profit.co? How to delete a rule-based point allocation? Best practices for Rule-Based Allocations Related Questions Frequently Asked Questions What are Rule-Based Point Allocations? Rule-based point allocations allow administrators to automatically distribute additional recognition points to employees who match specific criteria, such as Department or Role. These points are applied on top of the standard point allocation, ensuring that specific groups (e.g., the Marketing department) receive the necessary budget for their specific needs. What employee attributes can I use for Rule-Based Point Allocations? Profit.co supports various employee attributes for creating allocation rules. The most commonly used attributes include: Department: Target specific departments (e.g., Marketing, Sales, Engineering, Customer Support) Role/Position: Allocate points based on job titles or organizational levels Location: Distribute points to employees in specific offices or geographic regions Employment Type: Differentiate between full-time, part-time, contract, or temporary employees Custom Attributes: Use organization-specific fields configured in your Profit.co instance How to Set Up Rule-Based Point Allocations in Profit.co? Follow these steps to configure Rule-Based Point Allocations: Step 1: Navigate to Recognition Settings Navigate to Settings→Recognition→Reward from the left navigation panel. Scroll to the Rule-Based Point Allocations section The configuration options will now become available Step 2: Define Your First Rule Click the +Create Rule button Enter a descriptive Rule Name (e.g., "Marketing Department Bonus") Choose the Attribute Type from the dropdown (Department, Role, Location, etc.). Enter the points Click Save Rule to activate the allocation How to delete a rule-based point allocation? Once you click the Delete option, a pop-up appears with two choices: Delete Now or Delete from Next Month, allowing you to decide when the deletion should take effect. Best practices for Rule-Based Allocations Layering Points: Remember that these points are additive. If a user receives 100 standard points and you add a rule for 50 points, they will receive 150 total. Review Periodically: Check your rules quarterly to ensure they still align with your current departmental budgets or organizational goals. Related Questions To set points for each employee, click here. Frequently Asked Questions Q1. Is there a limit to how many rules I can create? There is no technical limit, but we recommend keeping rules manageable (typically 5-15 rules) for easier administration and employee understanding. Q2. How often are rule-based points allocated? The allocation frequency depends on your configuration. You can set rules to allocate points monthly, quarterly, annually, or as a one-time allocation. 3 min read
- How does the Key Result weight roll-up approach work based on KPI in Profit.co?In Profit.co, the Key Result (KR) weight roll-up approach helps calculate a parent Key Result’s progress automatically using its Sub-Key Results. When using the KPI-based roll-up, progress is derived from KPI values rather than manual aggregation, ensuring accurate and meaningful roll-ups. Table of Contents What is the Key Result roll-up approach in Profit.co? Why use the Key Result roll-up approach? Roll-up calculation types available in Profit.co How to configure KPI-based roll-up for Key Results How does Say-Do Ratio roll-up work? Best Practices for Key Result Roll-Up Approaches Related Questions Frequently Asked Questions What is the Key Result roll-up approach in Profit.co? The roll-up approach defines how a parent Key Result’s progress is calculated from its Sub-Key Results. It ensures that complex goals are measured consistently, even when broken down into multiple Sub-KRs. Why use the Key Result roll-up approach? Using roll-ups helps teams: Reflect the true impact and importance of Sub-Key Results Reduce manual progress updates on parent Key Results Maintain consistent progress tracking across OKR hierarchies Choose calculation logic that aligns with business priorities Roll-up calculation types available in Profit.co When syncing progress from Sub-Key Results, you can choose one of the following roll-up approaches: 1. Equally Weighted All Sub-Key Results contribute equally to the parent KR Best suited when all Sub-KRs have the same priority This is the default roll-up option 2. Percentage Weighted Manually assign different weights to each Sub-Key Result Useful when certain Sub-KRs have higher impact than others Parent KR progress reflects the assigned weight distribution 3. KPI-Based Parent KR progress is calculated based on matching KPI values Progress rolls up only from Sub-KRs that share the same KPI type Ensures KPI-driven accuracy without manual adjustments 4. Say-Do Ratio Parent KR progress is calculated based on status Measures how many Sub-KRs are on track versus off track Available only for Percentage Tracked KPIs How to configure KPI-based roll-up for Key Results Step 1: Enable roll-up from Sub-Key Results Open the parent Key Result Navigate to the View Details page. Enable Sync from Sub-Key Results Select a roll-up approach Note: Equally Weighted is selected by default Step 2: Select KPI-Based roll-up Choose KPI-Based as the roll-up approach Parent KR progress updates automatically based on Sub-KR KPI values Important notes: Sub-Key Result KPI type must match the parent KR Only matching KPIs contribute to the roll-up Example: If the parent KR uses customer video interviews as its KPI: Sub-KRs with the same KPI will update the parent automatically Sub-KRs with different KPIs will not affect the parent KR’s progress How does Say-Do Ratio roll-up work? If you select Say/Do Ratio as the Roll-up Approach, the parent key result progress will be calculated based on the status of its sub-key results. The system evaluates how many sub-key results are on track versus off track and updates the parent key result accordingly. Note: This roll-up option is available only when the parent key result uses the Percentage Tracked KPI type. You must enable the Say: Do Ratio type in settings Calculation logic: Say/Do Ratio = (On-Track KRs / (On-Track KRs + Off-Track KRs)) × 100 Example: Sub-KR 1 → On track Sub-KR 2 → Off track Result: 1 / (1 + 1) × 100 = 50% The parent Key Result progress updates to 50% automatically. Selective Sub-Key Result Inclusion for Say-Do Ratio You now have full control over which Sub-Key Results contribute to the Say-Do Ratio calculation. You can selectively include only the relevant ones. How it works: Open a parent Key Result using Say-Do Ratio Click the edit icon next to Say-Do Ratio in the roll-up dropdown A popup displays all Sub-Key Results Use checkboxes to select which Sub-KRs should contribute Click Update to save Result: Only the selected Sub-Key Results will influence the parent KR’s progress. Best Practices for Key Result Roll-Up Approaches Ensure parent and Sub-Key Results align to the same outcome before enabling roll-up Keep Sub-Key Results comparable in scope to avoid distorted parent progress Review roll-up settings whenever Sub-Key Results change Choose the roll-up type based on how progress should be measured, not convenience Validate parent progress during check-ins to ensure roll-up accuracy Related Questions To learn more about the process of distributing weights for subkey results, click here Frequently Asked Questions Q1. When should I use KPI-based roll-up? Use it when progress must be calculated strictly using matching KPI metrics rather than averages. Q2. Can Sub-Key Results with different KPIs affect the parent KR? No. Only Sub-KRs with the same KPI type contribute in the KPI-based roll-up. Q3. Is the Say-Do Ratio available for all KPI types? No. Say-Do Ratio is supported only for Percentage Tracked Key Results.4 min read
- How to set weights for Goals?Table of Contents Why set weights for goals? How to enable goal weights in Profit.co How to assign weights to goals What happens after setting weights? Best practices for goal weighting Related Questions Frequently Asked Questions Profit.co allows you to assign weights to goals so progress is calculated based on each goal’s relative importance. Why set weights for goals? Setting weights for goals helps you: Reflect the true importance of each goal in progress calculations Prioritize critical goals over less impactful ones Get a more accurate and meaningful performance score Focus effort on high-value objectives How to enable goal weights in Profit.co Step 1: Enable goal weighting Navigate to Settings → Performance → Goals from the left navigation panel Open the General tab Enable the Allow users to define weights for goals toggle How to assign weights to goals Step 2: Apply weights to individual goals Go to My Goals from the main menu On the Goals page, click the Weights icon Enter the desired weight value for each goal Click Apply to save the changes What happens after setting weights? The assigned weights are applied to the respective goals Overall goal progress is calculated based on weight distribution High-priority goals contribute more to the final performance score Best practices for goal weighting Ensure total goal weights add up logically Assign higher weights to business-critical goals Avoid giving equal weight to goals with different impact levels Review and adjust weights when priorities change Keep goal weights simple and transparent for teams Related Questions To learn more about the difference between OKRs and Goals, Click here Frequently Asked Questions Q1. Can I change goal weights after setting them? Yes. You can update goal weights anytime from the My Goals page. Q2. Who can enable goal weighting in Profit.co? Only users with access to Settings can enable the goal weighting option. Q3. Does goal weight affect performance scores? Yes. Goal progress is calculated based on assigned weights, impacting overall performance results.2 min read
- How do I Customize Widgets in the PPM Cockpit in Profit.co?The PPM Cockpit in Profit.co allows project managers and portfolio owners to customize and monitor performance metrics across multiple projects from a single, centralized dashboard. This feature provides comprehensive visibility into progress, resource utilization, financial health, and risks, helping leaders make informed, data-driven decisions. Table of Contents What is the purpose of PPM Cockpit customization? What are the key capabilities of PPM Cockpit customization? How do I customize the PPM Cockpit in Profit.co? How do I manage widget visibility? What do the widget labels mean? How do I personalize and adjust my layout? What widgets are available in the PPM Cockpit? What are Summary Cards in the PPM Cockpit? Best Practices for PPM Cockpit Customization Related Questions Frequently Asked Questions What is the purpose of PPM Cockpit customization? The PPM Cockpit streamlines project tracking and portfolio management by enabling users to tailor widgets according to their organization’s execution metrics. By customizing widgets, users can: Gain real-time visibility into project and portfolio performance. Track key indicators such as budget utilization, task progress, and risk exposure. Make informed decisions aligned with overall business goals. What are the key capabilities of PPM Cockpit customization? Personalized dashboard setup based on portfolio, project, or subfolder. Ability to add, remove, and rearrange widgets to reflect relevant KPIs. Categorization of widgets by purpose Project Insights, Task Insights, Resource Management, and Custom Insights. Flexible visibility settings (Public, Private, Access List). Support for interactive layout adjustments such as resizing and repositioning widgets. How do I customize the PPM Cockpit in Profit.co? Follow these steps to customize widgets in your Portfolios and Projects Cockpit. Step 1 Navigate to the Cockpit Go to Portfolios and Projects → Cockpit → Customize. Step 2 You can create folders and subfolders in the PPM Cockpit to organize and manage dashboards effectively. To create a new folder: Click the ‘+’ icon beside the folder list. A new folder will be created in the Cockpit. Once a new folder is created, an untitled Subfolder will automatically appear beneath it. Click the More (⋮) option next to the subfolder name to Edit or Delete it as needed. Step 3 In the Customize Subfolder window, review all available widgets categorized under: Project Insights Task Insights Resource Management Custom Insights Click Add Custom Widget to create a personalized chart or metric. Use the Remove button to hide any widgets that are not relevant. Step 4 Use filters such as Phase and Relevance to narrow results. Use the Search Bar to locate a specific widget quickly. Once you’ve finalized your selection, click Update to apply the changes. How do I manage widget visibility? Profit.co allows you to define who can view or manage widgets through the following visibility settings: Visibility Setting Description Public Accessible to all users within the organization or team. Private Restricted to the owner or creator only. Access List Shared with specific users or groups assigned by the owner. What do the widget labels mean? Widgets in the PPM Cockpit are labeled to help users identify their purpose and relevance: Label Description Best Practices Represents essential metrics based on proven success methods. Recommended Tailored suggestions based on user behavior, team goals, or frequent use. New Highlights the latest widgets added to the platform for exploration. Note: You can filter widgets by label to quickly find the most relevant and effective tools for your dashboard. How do I personalize and adjust my layout? Choose your Folder and Subfolder and click Customize. The selected widgets will appear on your dashboard. You can drag and resize widgets dynamically to optimize layout, visibility, and readability. What widgets are available in the PPM Cockpit? Below are some commonly used widgets available for customization: Note: 1. The PPM Cockpit now includes enhanced financial reporting capabilities with 5 new widgets: Strategic Alignment of Projects, Strategic Alignment of Budget, Budget Distribution by Strategic Alignment, Benefits Realization Timeline, IRR Distribution by Performance, and Investment Flow: Portfolio to Cost Category. 2. The Task by Assignee widget in the PPM Cockpit now includes an Export option for easy data download and sharing. What are Summary Cards in the PPM Cockpit? Summary Cards provide quick, at-a-glance insights into key portfolio metrics without requiring detailed widget configuration. These cards appear at the top of your dashboard and display critical information instantly. Available Summary Cards: Summary Card Description # of Projects Aligned Number of projects linked to strategic objectives. Actual Total actual spend across the projects. Forecast Projected total cost to complete all projects based on current performance and trends. IRR Expected annualized rate of return on investment across the projects. NPV Total net present value of expected cash flows across all projects, discounted at the organization's cost of capital. Payback Period Expected time to recover the initial investment from the projects. Plan Total planned budget across the projects. Return Ratio Portfolio return on investment is calculated as NPV divided by total budget, indicating value generated per dollar invested. Total Budget of Aligned Projects Total budget allocated to strategically aligned projects. Best Practices for PPM Cockpit Customization Choose widgets that align with organizational goals and reporting needs. Regularly review and refine dashboard layouts for clarity. Label and categorize widgets for easy discovery and reuse. Utilize Custom Insights for department-specific KPIs. Share useful dashboards with stakeholders using Public or Access List settings. Related Questions How do I track project risks in Profit.co? Click here How do I create custom widgets in Profit.co, click here Frequently Asked Questions Q1. Can I share my customized Cockpit dashboard with others? Yes, if the visibility is set to Public or includes others in the Access List. Q2. How many widgets can I add to a subfolder? There’s no strict limit, but it’s recommended to keep dashboards concise for performance. Q3. Can I duplicate a widget setup across portfolios? Yes, you can reuse or clone dashboards using the Copy function in Cockpit settings.5 min read
- How do I Configure Project Closure Settings in Profit.co?As a system administrator, you can customize Profit.co's Project Closure feature to align with your organization's project lifecycle standards. Configure custom closure reasons, add additional fields specific to your requirements, and establish approval flows to ensure projects close with appropriate governance and documentation standards. Table of Contents What project closure settings can administrators configure? How do I access Project Closure configuration settings? How do I customize additional closure fields? How do I configure approval flows for project closure? Best practices for configuring Project Closure Related Questions Frequently Asked Questions ⚡ Quick AnswerTo configure Project Closure in Profit.co, go to Settings → Portfolios and Projects → Projects → Project Closure. From there, administrators can define closure reasons, add custom fields via the Master Layout, and set up sequential or parallel approval flows. Changes take effect immediately and apply to all projects organization-wide. How do I configure approval flows for project closure? Under the Approval Flow section, choose between a Standard or Rule-Based approval flow. A standard flow applies the same approval chain to all closure requests. A rule-based flow lets you define conditional chains based on project attributes. What project closure settings can administrators configure? Administrators have comprehensive control over the project closure process, enabling customization across three key areas: Closure Reasons Configuration: Define the categories that describe why projects end in your organization Additional Fields Customization: Add custom fields to capture organization-specific closure information beyond standard fields Approval Flow Setup: Establish governance controls requiring stakeholder approval before projects can be formally closed These configuration options ensure project closure processes align with organizational standards, compliance requirements, and knowledge management objectives. How do I access Project Closure configuration settings? Before closing projects, administrators should configure closure reasons that align with organizational project lifecycle standards. Step 1: Navigate to Project Closure Settings Go to Settings from the main navigation Select Portfolios and Projects Choose Projects Click Project Closure Step 2: Create Custom Closure Reasons Click Add Closure Reason Define reason names that fit your organization's needs Common Closure Reason Examples: Closure Reason Use Case Example Scenario Successfully Completed Project achieved all objectives on time/budget Product launch delivered with all features Cancelled Project terminated before completion Budget cuts eliminated funding On Hold Project paused temporarily Awaiting regulatory approval Scope Change Original scope no longer valid Business priorities shifted dramatically Resource Constraints Unable to staff adequately Key team members departed Technology Obsolescence Selected technology no longer viable Vendor discontinued platform support How do I customize additional closure fields? Beyond standard closure fields (Achievements, Lessons Learned, Checklist, Reason), organizations can add custom fields to capture specific information required for governance, compliance, or knowledge management. Customize Additional Fields (Optional) Click the Customize option in the Project Closure settings The Master Layout window opens Navigate to Additional Fields section Add custom fields specific to your organization's closure requirements Examples: Budget variance explanation, Configure field types (text, dropdown, date, etc.) based on data needs Save field configuration How do I configure approval flows for project closure? Under the Approval Flow section, choose between a Standard or Rule-Based approval flow. A standard flow applies the same approval chain to all closure requests. A rule-based flow lets you define conditional chains based on project attributes. Build Your Sequential Approval Chain Use Add Sequence to define each approval level in order. The example below shows a 4-level chain for a product team: Level Approver Type Role in Workflow Level 1 Technical Expert (Self-Designated) Product Manager designates technical reviewer Level 2 PM's Direct Manager (Employee's Manager) Validates team capacity and resource availability Level 3 VP of Product (Department Head) Ensures strategic alignment with department goals Level 4 PMO (PPM Admin) Final portfolio governance and prioritization check To configure this chain in the Approval Flow tab: Click Add Sequence and select the first approver type: Employees can designate their own approvers. Click Add Approver again and select: Employee's Manager. Continue adding levels — select Department Head, then PPM Admin for the final level. Note: Once you enable the Parallel Flow option, all approvers complete the approval process simultaneously rather than sequentially. Use sequential flow when each level must validate before the next can act. Best practices for configuring Project Closure Start with essential closure reasons and expand over time: Begin with 5-7 core closure reasons (Successfully Completed, Cancelled, On Hold, etc.) and add specialized reasons as patterns emerge. Avoid overwhelming users with 20+ options from the start, let organizational needs drive expansion. Limit required additional fields to critical information: Every required field increases closure friction. Only mandate fields essential for governance, compliance, or critical knowledge capture. Make nice-to-have fields optional to balance thoroughness with usability. Align approval flows with organizational maturity: Early-stage organizations may not need approval flows, while enterprises require PMO oversight. Match approval requirements to your governance sophistication—overcontrolling immature processes creates bureaucracy without value. Related Questions How do end users close projects? Click Here Frequently Asked Questions Q1. Can I modify closure reasons after projects are closed using them? Yes, you can edit or rename closure reasons at any time. Already-closed projects will retain their original closure reason even if you modify the reason name or remove it from the active list. This preserves historical accuracy while allowing configuration evolution. Q2. What happens if I delete a closure reason that's been used? Deleting a closure reason removes it from the available options for new closures, but does not affect projects already closed with that reason. Historical data remains intact. Consider renaming instead of deleting if you want to discourage future use while preserving clarity for existing closed projects Q3. Can different project types have different closure configurations? Currently, closure configuration applies organization-wide across all projects. However, you can use conditional logic in custom fields to show/hide fields based on project attributes. Contact Profit.co support about advanced project type-specific configuration requirements. Execute your strategy with confidence Connect OKRs, tasks, and teams in one place with Profit.co Start Free Trial | Book a Demo5 min read
- How to Enable Accept/Reject Goal Options in Profit.coProfit.co provides an Accept/Reject option for all users to confirm or decline goals assigned to them, fostering accountability, clarity in goal ownership, and better alignment across teams during the performance management cycle. Table of Contents What is the Accept/Reject Goal feature in Profit.co? How to enable Accept/Reject Goal options in Profit.co? How to enable Email Notifications for Goal Acceptance and Rejection in Profit.co? Best Practices for using the Accept/Reject Goal feature in Profit.co Related Questions Frequently Asked Questions What is the Accept/Reject Goal feature in Profit.co? The Accept/Reject Goal feature in Profit.co allows goal assignees to formally confirm or decline goals that have been assigned to them by a manager or admin. Once enabled, employees receive a notification requesting their response whenever a new goal is assigned to them, giving them a voice in their goal assignments and ensuring clear ownership from the start. Only Super Users have access to Settings in Profit.co and can enable the Accept/Reject Goal option for the organization. How to enable Accept/Reject Goal options in Profit.co? Follow these steps to enable the Accept/Reject Goal feature in Profit.co: Step 1 From the left navigation panel, go to Settings → Performance → Goals. On the Goals page, switch to the Authoring tab. Under the Goal Permissions & Limits section, enable the toggle "Require employee acceptance for assigned goals". Step 2 Once the feature is enabled, whenever a goal is assigned to a user, the assignee will receive a notification with the option to either Accept or Reject the assigned goal. Employees can also review and respond to pending goal assignments from the Home page by navigating to the Actions section and looking for "Goals assigned to you". How to enable Email Notifications for Goal Acceptance and Rejection in Profit.co? Follow these steps to ensure managers and assignees receive automated email notifications when goals are accepted or rejected: From the left navigation panel, go to Settings → General → Notifications. Switch to the Action Center tab and click on the Performance tab. On the Performance tab, navigate to the Goals section. Click the Edit icon next to Assigned Goals Rejected or Assigned Goals Accepted. On the side panel, enable the Email Notification toggle and click Update. Once enabled, automated email notifications will be sent that include key details such as the goal name, status, comments (if any), and the approver's name. Best Practices for using the Accept/Reject Goal feature in Profit.co Enable the Accept/Reject Goal feature at the start of a new performance cycle to ensure all goal assignments are formally acknowledged before tracking begins. Encourage managers to provide clear context and rationale when assigning goals so employees have the information needed to accept or reject them meaningfully. Set a defined response window for employees to accept or reject assigned goals to avoid delays in the goal-setting process. Enable email notifications for both Accepted and Rejected goals so managers can promptly follow up on rejections and realign goal assignments. Use the Goals assigned to you section on the Home page to regularly review pending goal assignments and respond promptly. Related Questions Click here to learn more about Performance Management features in Profit.co. Frequently Asked Questions Q1. What is the Accept/Reject Goal feature in Profit.co? It is a feature that allows goal assignees to formally accept or reject goals assigned to them, ensuring clear ownership, accountability, and better goal alignment across the organization. Q2. Who can enable the Accept/Reject Goal feature in Profit.co? Only Super Users have access to Settings and can enable the Accept/Reject goal option for the organization. Q3. Where do I enable the Accept/Reject Goal option in Profit.co? Navigate to Settings → Performance → Goals, switch to the Authoring tab, and under the Goal Permissions & Limits section, enable the toggle "Require employee acceptance for assigned goals".4 min read
- What is Review Summary Information and How the Scores are calculated in Performance Reviews?Table of Contents Why this feature? How to Enable Review Summary Information Understanding Score Calculations in Review Summary Information Best Practices for Review Summary Information Related Questions Frequently Asked Questions Profit.co’s Review Summary Information dashboard provides a consolidated view of all performance review scores, including Goals, Competencies, OKRs, and reviewer ratings. This helps employees clearly understand how their final scores are calculated. Why this feature? Review Summary Information helps users: View all performance scores in one summarized dashboard Understand score calculations across different sections Customize which categories appear in the summary Compare ratings from managers, peers, self, secondary reviewers, and calibration How to Enable Review Summary Information Note: Only Super Users can enable and configure Review Summary Information. Step 1: Open Review Template Settings Go to Settings → Performance → Reviews. Switch to the Review Templates tab. Click the Edit icon on the desired template. Select the Summary Info tab. From this section, you can configure which score components appear in the summary. Understanding Score Calculations in Review Summary Information Profit.co calculates scores for: Overall Percentage Goal Score Competency Score OKR Score Reviewer Ratings (Manager, Self, Peer, Matrix Manager, etc.) All formulas are standardized across performance reviews. Overall Percentage The Overall Percentage represents the final percentile value of the combined assessment scores. How it is calculated Profit.co takes the average of these three: OKR Score Goal Score Competency Score Then converts the combined value into a percentage, which becomes the Overall Percentage. Goal Score The Goal Score indicates the ratings you obtained for each of your goals. 1. Goal Score Without Weights The Average of Given Ratings for the number of Goals is calculated as the Goal Score. Example Goal Name Given Ratings Max Rating Scale Goal 1 5 5 Goal 2 4 5 Goal 1 3 5 2. Goal Score With Individual Weights In the performance review, the goal's weight will be calculated as given in the scoring bucket. For Goals, Profit.co provides the option to choose the weights calculated based on individual goals. Converted weights are calculated based on the weight distribution given to the overall Goals in performance reviews. Formula Individual Weights x Goal Bucket score / Goal individual weight Example Goal Name Given Rating Max Rating Scale Individual Weights in % Converted Weights in % Goals Score Goal 1 5 5 30% 18% 0.90 Goal 2 4 5 20% 12% 0.48 Goal 3 3 5 0% 0% 0 Average 4 5 50% 30% 1.38 Goal Score = 1.38 3. Goal Score With Overall Weights The Goal Score calculation with weightage will be based on the Average of Given Ratings X Goal Score weightage. For Example, If the Goal weightage is 30% Goal Name Given Ratings Max Rating Scale Goal 1 5 5 Goal 2 4 5 Goal 1 3 5 Average 4 5 Calculation = Average 4 X 30%, Therefore, the Goal Score is 1.2. Competency Score 1. Competency Score Without Weights The Average of Given Ratings for the number of competencies is calculated for the Competency Score. For Example, Competency Name Given Ratings Max Rating Scale C1 5 5 C2 4 5 C3 3 5 C4 2 5 Average 3.5 5 2. Competency Score Calculation with Individual Weights (100%) In the performance review, the Competency scores will be calculated with the weights given in the scoring bucket. Converted weights are calculated based on the weight distribution given to the overall competencies in performance reviews. For Example, Competency Name Given Ratings Max Rating Scale Individual Weights in % Converted Weights in % Competency Score C1 5 5 30% 9% 0.45 C2 4 5 20% 6% 0.24 C3 3 5 0% 0% 0 C4 2 5 50% 15% 0.30 Average 3.5 5 100% 30% 0.99 3. Competency Score With Overall Weights The Competency Score calculation with weightage will be based on the Average of Given Ratings X Competency Score weightage. For Example, If the Competency Score weightage is 30%. Competency Name Given Ratings Max Rating Scale C1 5 5 C2 4 5 C3 3 5 C4 2 5 Average 3.5 5 Calculation = Average 3.5 X 30%, Therefore, Competency Score is 1.05. Competency Perfect Score: The competency perfect score displays the ratings you obtained based on the assessments as quantitative variables. OKR Score The OKR Score indicates the ratings you obtained for each of your OKRs. 1. OKR Score Without Weights The Average of Given Ratings for the number of OKRs is calculated for the OKR Score. For Example, OKR Name Given Ratings Max Rating Scale OKR 1 5 5 OKR 2 4 5 OKR 3 3 5 OKR 4 2 5 Average 3.5 5 2. OKR Score With Individual Weights In the performance review, the OKRs weight will be calculated as given in the scoring bucket. For OKRs, Profit.co provides the option to choose the weights calculated based on the individual OKR. Converted weights are calculated based on the weight distribution given to the overall OKRs. For Example, OKR Name Given Ratings Max Rating Scale Individual Weights in % Converted Weights in % OKR Score KR 1 5 5 12% 7% 0.34 KR 2 0 5 20% 11% 0 KR 3 0 0 0% 0% 0 KR 4 0 5 38% 22% 0 Average 1.25 5 70% 40% 0.34 OKR Score = 0.34 3. OKR Score With Overall Weights The OKR score calculation with weightage will be based on the Average of Given Ratings X OKR weightage. For Example, if the OKR weightage is 40%. OKR Name Given Ratings Max Rating Scale OKR 1 5 5 OKR 2 4 5 OKR 3 3 5 OKR 4 2 5 Average 3.5 5 Calculation = Average 3.5 X 40%, Therefore, OKRs Score is 1.4. Performance Score: The Performance Score displays the ratings you obtained based on the assessments you received in all of your performance reviews. Users can configure the Performance Score by selecting labels, calculation methods, enabling weights, and customizing score visibility for various reviewers. Reviewer Rating Calculations Manager’s Overall Rating The Manager’s Overall Rating indicates the ratings you obtained from your manager’s assessment. The Average of the Manager’s rating will be taken into consideration and will be displayed in the Review Summary Information. Note: Users can customize the Label type for the Manager’s Overall Rating and also choose the type formula for the rating. Self’s Overall Rating The Self’s Overall Rating indicates the ratings from your self-assessment. The Average of Self’s rating will be taken into consideration and will be displayed in the Review Summary Information. Secondary Reviewer’s Overall Rating The Secondary Reviewer's Overall Rating indicates the ratings you obtained from your secondary reviewer’s assessment. The Average of the Secondary Reviewer's rating will be taken into consideration and will be displayed in the Review Summary Information. Matrix Manager’s Overall Rating The Matrix Manager Overall Rating indicates the ratings you obtained from your Matrix Manager’s assessment. The Average of Matrix Manager’s rating will be taken into consideration and will be displayed in the Review Summary Information. Calibration Rating Calibration is a process of determining and re-evaluating the scores in performance reviews. The calibrated members are those in higher management who reevaluate the ratings given to employees by their managers and calibrated ratings display the same. Peer’s Overall Rating The Peer’s Overall Rating score is calculated based on the cumulative average of the Peer’s scores obtained during the review process. Final Overall Rating The Final Overall Rating score is calculated based on the cumulative average of the participant's scores obtained during the review process. Note: The selected participant's overall scores will be considered as the cumulative average for the Final Overall Rating. Best Practices for Review Summary Information Enable only the score components that are relevant to your review process. Maintain consistent weightage rules across all departments for fair evaluation. Review and verify calculation methods before launching the performance cycle. Clearly communicate how scores are calculated to avoid confusion among employees. Regularly audit and update your review templates to match evolving performance policies. Related Questions To learn more about the HR Dashboard, click here. Frequently Asked Questions Q1. Who can enable or edit the Review Summary Information? Only Super Users can enable and customize the Summary Info settings in the review template. Q2. Can I choose which scores and ratings appear in the summary? Yes. You can toggle each component, Goal Score, OKR Score, Reviewer Ratings, etc., based on your organization’s needs. Q3. How is the Final Overall Rating calculated? It is the cumulative average of all enabled reviewer ratings selected in the Summary Info configuration.7 min read
- How do you Reflect/Reset OKRs?Table of Contents What is Reflect/Reset in Profit.co? Why should you use Reflect/Reset? How to use Reflect/Reset in Profit.co Reset Options for Key Results Best Practices for Using Reflect/Reset Related Questions Frequently Asked Questions Profit.co provides a Reflect/Reset feature that helps teams review their OKRs at the end of a cycle, learn from the results, and reset goals for the upcoming quarter. What is Reflect/Reset in Profit.co? Reflect/Reset allows teams to look back on their OKR performance, capture learnings, and decide which Objectives and Key Results should continue, change, or close. This ensures continuous improvement and alignment between quarterly cycles. Reflection helps teams celebrate accomplishments, identify gaps, and make informed adjustments. Resetting ensures that OKRs stay relevant and actionable for the next period. Why should you use Reflect/Reset? Teams use this feature to: Review performance at the end of each quarter Apply learnings before planning the next cycle Carry forward, update, or discontinue OKRs based on relevance Improve goal-setting accuracy over time Maintain continuity between strategic objectives Reflect/Reset ensures that OKRs evolve with progress and remain aligned to business priorities. How to use Reflect/Reset in Profit.co Step 1: Enable Reflect/Reset in Settings Note: Only Superusers can enable this option. Navigate to Settings → OKRs → Authoring. Switch to the Reflect/Reset tab. Enable the Enable Reflect/Reset toggle. Select Question Builder to add reflection questions. Use Add Sections to include additional Q&A sections or Reflection prompts. Define a Reflect/Reset Timeframe to control when employees can perform the action. Step 2: Reflect on an Objective Open the OKR you want to review. Select the Objective → View Details. Click the ellipsis (⋮) → Reflect/Reset. In the Reflection section, answer the listed questions. Click Reflect to complete the reflection process. Step 3: Reset the Objective and Key Results After reflection, click Reset to update the Objective and Key Results for the next quarter. To reset your OKR, you have three options: Objective Side Panel View Details Page More Options Menu In this example, we will use the third option. Click on Reset. Edit the Objective You can update: Objective name Period (e.g., Q3 → Q4) Visibility Tags Owner OKR Category Click Next to proceed to Key Results. Reset Options for Key Results Profit.co provides five ways to carry forward or close Key Results: 1. Complete & Close You can select this option if the key result has been completed, and the key result won’t be added in the next quarter. 2. Extend as is You can select this option if the key result is not complete but is still relevant. So, you continue with the key result as is. Here you can change the name of the key result, the Target Date, and the Check-in Frequency of the Key Result. 3. Modify & Continue You can select this option to modify the numbers and continue with the key results to work on the next quarter. Here you can change the name of the key result, the Target Date, and the Check-in Frequency of the Key Result including the check-in values. 4. Add to Backlog You can select this option if the key result is completed or not completed, but you don't want to work in the upcoming quarter. 5. Do not carry forward You can select this option to stop carrying forward a partially completed Key Result to the next quarter. This keeps the KR open in the current cycle with its existing progress, helping you maintain accurate historical tracking without marking it as completed. After completing all steps, your Objective (e.g., Q3 Objective) will be reset to the next period (e.g., Q4). Best Practices for Using Reflect/Reset Reflect honestly: Capture real learnings to improve future OKRs. Reset only relevant KRs: Avoid carrying forward outdated or low-impact work. Refine targets: Use performance insights to sharpen targets for the next cycle. Align with leadership: Validate resets with managers or OKR champions. Document insights: Use reflection questions to track progress over multiple cycles. Related Questions Learn more about Reflect/Reset OKRs in Profit.co, click here. Frequently Asked Questions Q1. Who can enable the Reflect/Reset feature in Profit.co? Only Superusers can enable or configure Reflect/Reset settings. Q2. Can users be restricted from performing Reflect/Reset? Yes. Admins can control access by defining a Reflect/Reset Timeframe in the settings. Q3. Do all Key Results need to be carried over during Reset? No. Profit.co allows you to choose which KRs to continue, modify, close, or move to backlog.4 min read
- How do I use Agile Epics and User Stories in Profit.co?In Profit.co, you can use Agile Epics and User Stories to structure work effectively, ensuring clear alignment and progress tracking. Table of Contents What are Agile Epics and User Stories in Profit.co? Why use Agile Epics, Stories, and Issue Types in Profit.co? Profit.co Issue Type Hierarchy at a Glance Parent and Child Issues in Profit.co How to enable Issue Types in Profit.co? Best Practices for Using Agile Epics and User Stories in Profit.co Related Questions Frequently Asked Questions What are Agile Epics and User Stories in Profit.co? In Profit.co, Issue Types are structured around agile best practices. Each type plays a unique role in planning and execution: Epic: Represents a large body of work or strategic initiative that spans multiple sprints or projects. Epics help teams organize and monitor progress toward major business goals. Example: Launching a new customer mobile app. Story: Breaks down an Epic into smaller, user-focused requirements. Stories capture functionality from the perspective of the end user. Example: As a user, I want to sign up with Google so I can create an account quickly. Task: Represents a specific unit of work required to complete a Story. Tasks are often technical or operational in nature. Example: Design the Google sign-up screen. Sub-task: A smaller piece of work within a Task, used to split responsibilities or track granular actions. Example: Create UI components for the sign-up form. Bug: Tracks defects that need resolution to maintain quality and progress. Example: Fix the error where Google sign-up fails when an email contains special characters. This hierarchy ensures that every piece of work is connected back to business value, while giving teams flexibility to adapt as project needs evolve. Why use Agile Epics, Stories, and Issue Types in Profit.co? In Profit.co, you can use Agile Epics and User Stories to structure your work effectively. Epics represent big-picture goals, while Stories capture user needs. Tasks and Sub-tasks break those needs into actionable work, and Bugs highlight defects to be fixed. This layered structure ensures that every piece of work is connected back to business value. Key benefits: Plan large initiatives with Epics: Break down strategic goals (e.g., launching a new app) into manageable Stories. Capture user needs with Stories: Define functionality from a user’s perspective to ensure value-driven delivery. Organize execution with Tasks and Sub-tasks: Translate Stories into concrete work items and split them further if needed. Respond quickly with Bugs: Highlight issues or defects that require immediate attention without losing visibility in the overall plan. Stay flexible as work evolves: Convert between types as scope changes, for example, a Task becoming a Story if it needs subtasks. Maintain transparency & accountability: Teams can see dependencies, ownership, and progress across all levels. Profit.co Issue Type Hierarchy at a Glance Issue Types Purpose Example Use Case Epic Represents a large, strategic initiative spanning multiple sprints or projects Launch a new customer mobile app Story Breaks the Epic into user-focused requirements As a user, I want to sign up with Google Task Specific work item required to complete a Story Design the Google sign-up screen Sub-task Smaller action item within a Task Create UI components for the sign-up form Bug Defect found during execution that impacts the delivery of the above Fix the error where Google sign-up fails when the email contains special characters Parent and Child Issues in Profit.co In Profit.co, issue types follow a clear parent - child relationship that helps teams organize work at different levels: Epic → Parent to Stories, grouping multiple user requirements under one strategic initiative. Story → Parent to Tasks and Sub-tasks, breaking work into deliverable features. Task → Parent to Sub-tasks, dividing technical or detailed work into smaller actions. Sub-task → Always a child item, linked to a Task or Story, and cannot exist on its own. Bug → Can be linked at any level, depending on where the defect impacts the work. This hierarchy ensures that large initiatives are broken down into smaller, actionable items while maintaining visibility of how each piece contributes to the overall goal. How to enable Issue Types in Profit.co? Step 1: Enable Issue Types Navigate to Settings → Tasks from the left navigation panel and switch to the Issue Types tab. Enable the Issue Types toggle on the Issue Type page. Note: Only Superusers can enable or disable the Issue Type via Settings. Note: At the Workspace level, enable the Issue Type toggle to ensure all Boards created under it support Issue Types. Step 2: Use Issue Types in Workspaces and Boards Once enabled, Issue Types can be applied inside Workspaces and Boards. When creating or managing tasks, you can classify them as Epics, Stories, Tasks, Sub-tasks, or Bugs based on the work requirement. Best Practices for Using Agile Epics and User Stories in Profit.co Use a clear hierarchy: Keep Epics at the strategy level, Stories at the user level, and Tasks/Sub-tasks for execution. This ensures alignment from vision to delivery. Prioritize by value: Always define Stories from a user’s perspective. Focus on features that provide the greatest impact before moving to technical or support tasks. Limit issue types: Don’t overload teams with too many classifications. Stick to Epics, Stories, Tasks, Sub-tasks, and Bugs unless you have a clear need for customization. Maintain consistency across teams: Standardize how issue types are used in Profit.co so reporting and progress tracking remain accurate. Convert when scope changes: If a Task grows into a larger feature, convert it to a Story. If a Story turns into a defect, reclassify it as a Bug. Use conversion flexibly to keep work aligned. Review regularly: Periodically audit your Workspaces and Boards to ensure issue types are being applied correctly and reflect your team’s current workflow. Related Questions Learn how to reclassify work items with Converting Agile Epics and User Stories in Profit.co, Click here. Click here to learn more about how to create Workspaces and Boards in Profit.co. Frequently Asked Questions Q1. What are the different Task Issue Types in Profit.co? Profit.co supports five issue types: Epics, Stories, Tasks, Sub-tasks, and Bugs. Each type represents a different level of work granularity. Q2. Can I convert one issue type into another in Profit.co? Yes. Profit.co supports conversion between issue types while preserving data integrity. For example, a Task can become a Story if its scope expands, or a Story can be reclassified as a Bug. Q3. Who can enable or disable Issue Types in Profit.co? Only Superusers can enable or disable Issue Types from the system settings. Regular users can use them once enabled.6 min read
- How does the Baseline option work in Control KPIs?Profit.co now provides a Baseline option in Control KPIs to ensure progress tracking starts from the true initial value of your metric, not zero. This makes KPI evaluation more accurate, fair, and reflective of the actual effort delivered during the goal cycle. Why this feature? Accurate progress tracking: Progress reflects only incremental gains during the KPI cycle, avoiding inflated numbers caused by pre-cycle achievements. Fair evaluation: Teams are measured based on the real contribution made within the period, ensuring recognition for actual effort. Clear goal alignment: Users can now visualize how their baseline compares to the target while tracking KRs, making goal-setting more transparent. Reliable insights: Leaders and managers get a clear picture of baseline vs. target progress, improving decision-making and reporting. Note: Baseline applies only to newly created Control KPIs. Existing KPIs remain unchanged, ensuring historical data consistency. Baseline Calculation in Control KPIs: The Baseline option is applicable for: Distance from target, as of the check-in date Average of all check-ins divided by average of targets Sum of all check-ins divided by sum of all targets When creating a new Key Result with a Control KPI, you will see a Baseline field. Baseline Conditions: 1. For At Least KPIs, the target value must be greater than the baseline value. Reason: At least KRs measure growth or improvement, so the target must exceed the starting point for progress to be meaningful. Example: “Maintain at least 130 blog posts” → Baseline = 10, Target = 130. 2. For At Most KPIs, the baseline value must be greater than the target value. Reason: These KRs measure reduction, so the baseline must be higher than the target to capture improvement. Example: “Maintain at most 30 blog posts” → Baseline = 50, Target = 30. Calculation Methods: 1. Distance from target, as of the check-in date The Distance from Target method calculates progress based on how close the actual value is to the defined target at the time of each check-in. Unlike other methods, it considers every check-in independently, showing immediate progress toward or away from the goal. This approach provides a transparent view of performance and motivates continuous improvements, as progress reflects proximity to the target rather than cumulative totals. 1.1 At Least Type: Let’s consider the same Key Result and values for Distance from target Check-ins. I have made one check-in for this KR with the value of 10 So, Baseline value = 5 Target value = 10 Actual value (Check-in) = 10 Progress = (Actual Value - Baseline Value) / (Target value - baseline value ) * 100 Progress = (10 - 5) / (10 - 5) *100 = 100% 1.2 At Most Type: For example, I created the Key Result: “Publish at most 10 Blog Posts” For this Key Result, I set the baseline value to 15 and entered a check-in value of 12. So, Baseline value = 15 Check-in value (Actual) = 12 Progress = (Baseline - Actual) / (Baseline - Planned) * 100 Progress = (15 - 12) / (15 - 10) * 100 = 60% 2. Average of all check-ins divided by average of targets In this type of progression, the average of all the check-ins will be taken into consideration, whether the check-in is successful or unsuccessful. The progress will happen, and the final calculation will be based on the average. Additionally, based on the target date, we have the QTD/YTD value in the check-in slider. If the Key Result is in the Quarter, it will be mentioned as QTD. If it is in an Annual period, it will be mentioned as YTD. The average of all the check-ins will be taken as the QTD/YTD value in the check-in slider, and the progress achievement score will be calculated with this value. 2.1 At Least Type: Let’s consider the same Key Result and values, but this time for Average check-ins. I have made two check-ins for this KR: the first with a value of 6 and the second with a value of 10. So, Average of Actual value = 8 Average of Baseline value = 5 Average of all targets = 10 Average of all Baseline = 5 Progress = (Average of Actual Value - Average of Baseline Value) / (Average of all targets - Average of all baselines) * 100 Progress = (8 - 5) / (10 - 5) * 100 = 60% 2.2 At Most Type: Let’s consider the same Key Result and values, but this time for Average check-ins. I have made two check-ins for this KR: the first with a value of 12 and the second with a value of 14. So, Average of Actual value = 13 Average of Baseline value = 15 Progress = (Average of Baseline Value - Average of Actual Value) / (Average of Baseline Value - Average of Planned Value) * 100 Progress = (15 - 13) / (15 - 10) * 100 = 40% 3. Sum of all check-ins divided by sum of all targets The Sum of All Check-ins method calculates progress by adding up every check-in value over the cycle and comparing it to the total target. Both successful and unsuccessful check-ins are included, giving a complete picture of overall performance. This approach ensures that consistent effort across all periods is recognized, while also highlighting gaps when targets are repeatedly missed. It’s especially useful for cumulative metrics where progress builds steadily over time. Note: When using the Sum of All Check-ins method, you need to decide whether the Key Result will be tracked incrementally or cumulatively: 1. Incremental: The baseline and target values are applied to each check-in period separately. Example: “Publish at least 10 blog posts per month.” Each month’s check-in is compared against that month’s baseline and target. 2. Cumulative: The baseline and target values are applied to the overall total across the entire cycle. Example: “Publish at least 130 blog posts in a quarter.” All check-ins are summed together, and progress is calculated toward the quarter’s total target. This ensures users choose the right setup depending on whether their KR measures recurring goals (incremental) or a single total goal (cumulative). 3.1 At Least Type: For example, I created the Key Result: “Maintain at least 130 Blog Posts.” For this Key Result, I set the baseline value to 10 and entered a check-in value of 40 for the first month. So, Baseline value = 10 Check-in value (Actual) = 40 Duration = 3 Months (Last day of the Month) Total target value = 3 × 130 = 390 Total baseline value = 10 ×3 = 30 Progress = (Actual Value - Baseline Value) / (Sum of all targets - Sum of all baselines) * 100 Progress = (40 - 10) / (390 - 30) = 0.083 * 100 = 8% Note: If a check-in is made with 0 progress, the value calculation will show a minus, but the progress will still display as 0% 3.2 At Most Type: For example, I created the Key Result: “Publish at most 10 Blog Posts” For this Key Result, I set the baseline value to 15 and entered a check-in value of 12. So, Baseline value = 15 Check-in value (Actual) = 12 Progress = (Baseline - Actual) / (Baseline - Planned) * 100 Progress = (15 - 12) / (15 - 10) * 100 = 60% Note: Baseline is not applicable for ‘Successful check-ins(target achieved) divided by the total no. of check-in types’ calculation method, as progress is purely based on whether each check-in meets the target criteria (successful) or not (unsuccessful).6 min read
- How does the check-in discipline process work in Profit.co?Profit.co generates check-in discipline reports to improve performance and productivity. Why this feature? By using this feature you can view the check-in discipline report. The report is used to ensure that individuals or teams are regularly checking in on their progress toward their goals, and taking the necessary steps to stay on track. The total no. of check-ins is calculated and distinguished as follows: On-time Missed Late Future Legacy Not Applicable Pending Scenario: Consider a key result with check-in frequency weekly on Friday. On-time Check-in In this scenario, we are considering a check-in frequency that is weekly on Friday, let's say Mar 10, If the user check-ins anytime between Mar 4 and Mar 10, it is considered as On-time check-in. Missed Check-in Considering the same scenario of On-time check-in, If the user misses the Mar 10 check-in and has not recorded the progress in the applicable period (i.e.) from Mar 4 - Mar 16, the Mar 10 will be considered as Missed check-in any time after Mar 17 which is the next check-in date. Late Check-in Consider a scenario where the user needs to check-in on Mar 10, If the user fails to check-in on Mar 10 and if he does the check-in between the period Mar 11 - 16, it is considered as Late check-in. Future Check-in Consider you checked in on Mar 10. The following check-in cycle then starts on Mar 11 for the check-in date Mar 17. The Mar 24 and Mar 31 check-in cannot be progressed until Mar 17's check-in is done. Therefore, in this case, March 24 and March 31 are considered Future check-in dates. Legacy Check-in The Legacy check-in helps you take a look at the past history of check-ins happening based on the below criteria. Note: You can view the Legacy check-in history of a Key Result When the Key Result type is changed. When the KPI is changed. When the From value is changed. When the Target Period is changed. There will be no impact on the progress when the To value and target period Due Dates are changed. Not applicable Check-in Consider a key result created on Mar 20. When check-in is made the progress falls on Mar 17. Hence the Mar 3 and Mar 10 check-ins will be considered as Not Applicable check-ins. Note: If the Check-in is performed for the not applicable past dates, it will be considered as On-time check-in. Pending Check-in Consider a scenario where the user needs to check-in on Mar 10, but the user misses the check-in and does not perform any check-in until Mar 16, Then the key results will be considered as it is in the Pending check-in state. Note: If the Check-in is performed between (Mar 11- Mar 16), it will be considered as late check-in. Out of Office Check-in The Out of Office check-in helps you manage check-ins during approved time-off. When a user goes on OOO and the request is approved, all scheduled check-ins for that period are automatically paused. These check-ins are not marked as missed or late, but instead counted as On-time to ensure fairness. Managers have visibility into the OOO request and its approval status, so team alignment is maintained. This eliminates the need to justify missed check-ins after returning from time off, as everything is logged and tracked in advance. Related Answer Post To learn more about the use of the Cockpit Dashboard, click here.3 min read
- How does the Saved View feature works in Profit.co’s PMS module?The Saved View feature in Performance Goals allows you to quickly access frequently used, custom-filtered views without applying filters every time. Why this feature? No need to reapply filters every time, just save your preferred views and access them instantly. Easily share views with other users to align review discussions and reporting. Step 1 Navigate to Performance → Saved Views from the left navigation panel. On the Saved Views page, click the ‘+’ icon to create a new view. In the pop-up: Enter a name for the view. Apply filters such as Status, Tag, Owner, Approval status, and Progress. For example, you can filter by status levels to view specific statuses for goals. Click Save, and your filtered view will now be available under Saved Views anytime. Note: When you add a saved filter to Favorites, it will show up in the Favorites View section. Users can now download presentations, expand or collapse sections, edit, share, and manage saved views, including options to remove from favorites or delete views.1 min read
- How to associate OKRs with goals to automate the process in Profit.co?Profit.co provides an option to associate OKRs with your goals to automate the progress of your goals. Why this feature? By associating OKRs with goals, you can automate the progress of your goals via the check-ins that you make. Navigate to Performance → Goals from the left menu. Choose the goal for which you want to link the OKRs. In the edit goal page, click on the Add button. A list of objectives, KPIs, and Initiatives will appear on the Associated OKRs page; select from it. Associate an OKR for this Goal. Finally, click Add. Now the objective will be associated with the particular goal. According to the check-ins made in the objective, the progress will be automatically updated in the Goals.1 min read
- How to set up the check-in frequency for OKRs at the department level?Profit.co allows you to set the check-in frequency for OKRs at both the department level and in the settings. Why this feature? This feature ensures consistency by standardizing the check-in frequency across all Key Results within a department, streamlining the OKR management process for teams. By allowing OKR Champions to set the frequency at the department level, it provides flexibility, enabling tailored check-in intervals for different departments while maintaining alignment with organizational goals. This feature simplifies the OKR management process by allowing the check-in frequency to be set at the department level or in settings, eliminating the need for individual configuration during Key Result creation. To set the check-in frequency at the Settings level, follow the steps below: Note: Only Super Users can perform this action. Step 1 Navigate to the Settings → User Management from the left navigation panel and switch to the Departments tab. Edit the required department for which you want to set a check-in frequency. Step 2 On the Update Department page, scroll down to set the check-in frequency for the desired department. Select the required frequency and click Update. To set the check-in frequency at the Department level, follow the steps below: Note: Only OKR Champions can perform this action. Step 1 Navigate to the OKRs from the left navigation panel and choose the desired department from the dropdown. Step 2 Once the department is selected, click on the Champions button at the top. A side panel will appear, where you can select the required frequency for the department. Once done, click Save. The selected frequency will be set for all the Key Results created in the department. Related Answer Post To learn more about how to add OKR Champions in a department, click here.2 min read
- How to create a BSC in profit.co?In Profit.co, you can create a Balanced Scorecard (BSC) to align organizational activities with strategic goals and provide a comprehensive view of performance across multiple perspectives. Table of Contents What is a Balanced Scorecard in Profit.co? Who can create and access a Balanced Scorecard? How do I enable the Balanced Scorecard in Profit.co? How do I create a new Balanced Scorecard? How do I add Vision and Mission to my Balanced Scorecard? How do I create Strategic Objectives in a Balanced Scorecard? How do I create Measures/KPIs in a Balanced Scorecard? How do I create Projects/Initiatives in a Balanced Scorecard? What additional actions can I perform on Balanced Scorecard elements? Best practices for uploading profile pictures in Profit.co Related Questions Frequently Asked Questions What is a Balanced Scorecard in Profit.co? A Balanced Scorecard is a strategic management framework that helps organizations translate their vision and strategy into actionable objectives across multiple perspectives. It provides a comprehensive view of organizational performance by balancing financial and non-financial measures. Who can create and access a Balanced Scorecard? Only specific roles have permission to create and access Balanced Scorecards in Profit.co: Role Access Level Balanced Scorecard Admin Users with this role can create, view, and manage all scorecards Department Head Users with this role can create, view, and manage their own scorecards OKR Champions Can create and manage BSCs within their scope How do I enable the Balanced Scorecard in Profit.co? Before creating a Balanced Scorecard, you must first enable the feature in your settings: Step 1 Go to Settings from the left navigation panel. Select General, then click on Apps. On the Apps page, locate the Balanced Scorecard toggle. Enable the toggle to activate the Balanced Scorecard feature. Once enabled, you can access the Balanced Scorecard from the left navigation menu. How do I create a new Balanced Scorecard? After enabling the Balanced Scorecard feature, follow these steps to create your first scorecard: Step 1 Navigate to Balanced Scorecard from the left navigation menu. Choose the required Department from the dropdown menu. Click on the + Create button in the top right corner of the page. Your new Balanced Scorecard overview page will be created and ready for configuration. How do I add Vision and Mission to my Balanced Scorecard? The Vision and Mission provide strategic context for your Balanced Scorecard: Step 1 Click on the More Options icon (three dots) in the top right corner. Select Edit from the dropdown menu. In the Update Balanced Scorecard side panel, enter your Vision statement. Enter your Mission statement. Select the Period for which this scorecard applies. Click Update to save your Vision and Mission. Your Vision and Mission will now appear at the top of your Balanced Scorecard overview page. How do I create Strategic Objectives in a Balanced Scorecard? Strategic Objectives define what you want to achieve within each perspective: Step 1 Hover over the Strategic Objectives box for the desired perspective. Click + Create Strategic Objective, or click the Create button at the top of the page. Select a Strategic Objective and choose the perspective to create it. In the Create Strategic Objective side panel, enter the name of the strategic objective. Select the period for this objective. Choose the visibility level (who can view this objective). Assign an owner responsible for this objective. Click Create to save the strategic objective. The newly created strategic objective will appear in the selected perspective on your overview page. How do I create Measures/KPIs in a Balanced Scorecard? Measures/KPIs track progress toward your Strategic Objectives: Hover over the Measures/KPIs box for the desired perspective. Click on + Create Measures/KPIs. Enter all required information for the measure or KPI. Configure targets, units, and tracking parameters as needed. Click Create to save the measure or KPI. The newly created Measure/KPI will appear linked to the appropriate strategic objective on your overview page. How do I create Projects/Initiatives in a Balanced Scorecard? Projects/Initiatives are the action plans that drive your strategic objectives: Hover over the Projects/Initiatives box for the desired perspective. Click on + Create Projects/Initiatives. In the side panel, fill in all required details for the project or initiative. Define scope, timeline, resources, and deliverables as needed. Click Create to save the project or initiative. The newly created Project/Initiative will appear linked to the appropriate measures and objectives on your overview page. What additional actions can I perform on Balanced Scorecard elements? Profit.co provides several advanced actions for managing your Balanced Scorecard elements. You can access these options by clicking the three dots (More Options) menu on any Strategic Objective, Measure/KPI, or Project/Initiative: Best practices for uploading profile pictures in Profit.co Start with a clear Vision and Mission statement to provide strategic context for all scorecard elements. Create Strategic Objectives that directly support your Vision and Mission across all four perspectives. Ensure each Strategic Objective has at least one measurable KPI to track progress effectively. Link Projects/Initiatives to specific Measures/KPIs to show how actions drive performance. Assign clear ownership for each strategic objective to ensure accountability. Use the cloning feature to quickly replicate similar objectives, measures, or projects across perspectives. Choose appropriate periods that align with your organization's planning and review cycles. Regularly review and update your Balanced Scorecard to reflect changing strategic priorities. Use the PDF export feature to share scorecard views with stakeholders who don't have system access. Balance the number of objectives across perspectives to maintain a holistic strategic view. Related Questions To learn more about the use of the BSC Cockpit Dashboard in Profit.co, Click Here Frequently Asked Questions Q1. Can I create multiple Balanced Scorecards for different departments? Yes, you can create separate Balanced Scorecards for different departments by selecting the appropriate department from the dropdown before creating each scorecard. Q2. Can I move Strategic Objectives between perspectives after creating them? Yes, you can move strategic objectives between perspectives using the Move option in the More Options menu for each objective. Q3. How many Strategic Objectives should I create for each perspective? While there's no strict limit, best practice suggests creating 2-5 strategic objectives per perspective to maintain focus and clarity without overwhelming your team.6 min read
- What are the unique features of Profit?From the outset, Profit.co understood the common issues, challenges, and dysfunctions around OKR implementation. We designed the platform to solve them and make companies and teams more likely to succeed with OKRs. One of the important aspects of Profit.co is its Scalability and Flexibility. Profit.co can be implemented across any company/industry irrespective of size. Profit.co is an all-inclusive Results Management Platform including OKR Management, Task Management, Employee Engagement, and Performance Management. Users can take their 1-5 year strategic initiatives and use OKRs to break them down into a prioritized list that can be executed quarter over quarter. The Reflect/Reset feature enables you to reflect on the achievement for the current quarter (celebrate!!!) and apply the learnings to reset them for the next quarter. The 6 Key Result types help users to accurately define targets with easy creation of outcome-based measurable key results, and for non-measurable using trackable Key result types. 300+ Built-In KPIs, a step-by-step guide for creating OKRs, and a predefined templates facility to build more. Users have options like Sub KRs to further delegate the key results to the next level and can also tag them. Multiple assignment/alignment options are available with top-down assignments and bottom-up alignment (Contribution). Profit.co has different user roles to access, manage and perform job titles based on which the associated features and modules vary. Each employee of an organization can be assigned a suitable role based on their designation. Users can view Reports and Dashboards (radar, heatmap) in downloadable formats. Schedule meetings (1-on-1 or with a team) to discuss the progress of their weekly and quarterly progress, and use our End of Quarter & OKR Progress Presentations to drive discussion. The OKR Cockpit offers a single view to track progress, align goals, and monitor key metrics in real time, all within the PEEL framework (Plan, Execute, Engage, Learn). The KPI Summary provides a clear visual comparison of actual metrics against goals, highlighting trends and offering precise insights for quick decision-making. Profit.co's AI Assistant delivers smart insights and recommendations, automating tasks and optimizing OKRs to keep your team aligned and efficient. Task Management helps users to manage, prioritize and automate the Task life-cycle with an exclusive task dashboard to view progress. Employee Engagement helps users to know employees better, and it is also built-in with hashtags, @mentions, comments, and more. Performance Management can be used along with OKRs to remove biases and improve the process. Profit.co’s intuitive and user-friendly interface allows the company's HR to have an excellent overview of active/closed performance reviews that are highly customizable. Use Goals to coordinate your own professional goals in order to monitor and manage work progress and performance. Profit.co also provides amazing content just a click away. 800+ FAQs, the OKR examples series gives you the best examples to get started with OKRs right away. Profit.co also has a certified program for OKR Coaching & Consulting programs 3 min read
- What are Scores in the Review Summary Information, and how are the scores calculated in Performance Reviews?Profit.co provides an option to view the scores of their performance review assessment in a detailed way from a single Review Summary Information dashboard. Why this feature? Scores in the Review Summary Information provide a complete view of an employee’s performance by consolidating ratings from multiple sources, enhancing transparency. This feature allows users to customize which scores are displayed in the review summary, ensuring that the most relevant feedback is highlighted. Note: Only Super Users can enable and customize the Review Summary Information. To learn more about the review summary information, click here Score Scores in the Review Summary represent the performance ratings given by peers, managers, and other stakeholders, providing a comprehensive view of an employee’s overall performance. The Score category includes Performance Score Goal Score OKR Score Task Score Proficiency Matches Performance Score The Performance Score displays the ratings you obtained based on the assessments you received in all of your performance reviews. Users can configure the Performance Score by selecting labels, calculation methods, enabling weights, and customizing score visibility for various reviewers. Average Competency Rating: The Average Competency Rating is the average of all competency ratings, providing an overall performance score across all competencies. Sum Competency Rating: The Sum Competency Rating is the total of all competency ratings, reflecting the cumulative performance across all competencies. Goal Score The Goal Score indicates the ratings you obtained for each of your goals. The Goal Score calculation methods include: Goal Score Calculation without Weights Goal Score Calculation with Individual Weights Goals Score Calculation with Overall Weights Note: The maximum rating scale set for goals is 5. Goal Score Calculation without Weights Goal Score Calculation without Weights calculates the goal score by averaging the given ratings for each goal. This method provides a straightforward performance assessment without assigning different weights to individual goals. Calculation: For example, Goal Score Calculation with Individual Weights In performance reviews, Profit.co allows goal scores to be calculated using individual goal weights. The system automatically adjusts and converts individual goal weights based on the total weight distribution set in the performance review, ensuring each goal contributes proportionally to the final score. Calculation: Note: The Goals weight assigned in Scoring Buckets is 33%. The Converted weights in % are calculated by the below formula. For Example, Goals Score Calculation with Overall Weights "Goals Score Calculation with Overall Weights" refers to the process of evaluating an employee's performance on specific goals by factoring in the importance or weight of each goal. It ensures that more critical goals have a greater impact on the overall score, reflecting the relative significance of each goal in the performance assessment. Calculation: For Example, Therefore, Goal Score = 4 X 33% = 1.32. OKR Score OKR Score reflects the performance ratings assigned to each of your Objectives and Key Results (OKRs). It measures how well you have achieved the OKRs set, providing a clear indicator of progress and success in meeting your objectives. The OKR Score calculation methods include: OKR Score Calculation without Weights OKR Score Calculation with Individual Weights OKR Score Calculation with Overall Weights Note: The maximum rating scale set for OKRs is 5. OKR Score Calculation without Weights: OKR Score Calculation without Weights calculates the average of the ratings given for each of your OKRs. This method treats all OKRs equally without assigning any specific weight to individual OKRs, providing a straightforward measure of performance across all objectives. Calculation: For Example, OKR Score Calculation with Individual Weights OKR Score Calculation with Individual Weights allows you to assign specific weights to each OKR based on its importance. The final OKR score is calculated by factoring in these individual weights, ensuring that more critical OKRs have a greater impact on the overall performance score. Calculation: Note: OKRs weights assigned in Scoring Buckets are 24%. The Converted weights in % are calculated by the below formula. For Example, OKRs Score Calculation with Overall Weights. OKR Score Calculation with Overall Weights allows you to calculate the OKR score by applying a weightage to each objective. The score is determined by multiplying the average ratings by the assigned weight, ensuring that higher-priority OKRs have a greater impact on the overall performance score. Calculation: For Example, Therefore, the OKR Score = 4.5 X 24% = 1.08 Task Score The Task Score is calculated by averaging the ratings given for each task. It provides an overall performance assessment based on the completion and quality of tasks, reflecting how well an individual or team performs in executing assigned work. The Task Score calculation methods include: Task Score Calculation without Weights Task Score Calculation with Overall Weights Note: The maximum rating scale set for Tasks is 5. Task Score Calculation without Weights Task Score Calculation without Weights determines the task score by averaging the given ratings for each task. This provides a straightforward evaluation of task performance, treating all tasks equally in the assessment. Calculation: For Example, Task Score Calculation with Overall Weights Task Score Calculation with Overall Weights calculates the task score by multiplying the average of the given ratings by the overall weight assigned to each task. This method ensures that tasks with higher importance or priority have a greater impact on the final score, providing a weighted assessment of task performance. Note: The Task weight assigned in Scoring Buckets is 9%. Calculation: For Example, Therefore, the Task Score = 5 X 9% = 0.45 Proficiency Matches (Competencies) Proficiency Matches refer to the alignment between an individual’s competencies and the required proficiency levels for specific tasks or roles. The proficiency match score is calculated by averaging the given ratings for the competencies, indicating how well an individual’s skills align with the expectations. The Proficiency Matches (Competency) calculation methods include: Competency Score Calculation without Weights. Competency Score Calculation with Individual Weights Competency Score Calculation with Overall Weights Note: The maximum rating scale set for competencies is 5. Competency Score Calculation without Weights. Competency Score Calculation without Weights calculates the overall competency score by averaging the ratings given for each competency. This method treats all competencies equally, providing a clear assessment of proficiency across the board without assigning specific importance to any one competency. Calculation: For Example, Competency Score Calculation with Individual Weights (100%) Competency Score Calculation with Individual Weights (100%) calculates the competency scores by applying specific weights to each competency, as defined in the scoring bucket. The final score is based on the weight distribution assigned to each competency, ensuring that more critical competencies have a greater influence on the overall performance assessment. Calculation: Note: The Competency weight assigned in Scoring Buckets is 34%. The Converted weights in % are calculated by the below formula. For Example, Competency Score Calculation with Overall Weights. Competency Score Calculation with Overall Weights calculates the competency score by multiplying the average of the given ratings by the overall weight assigned to each competency. This method ensures that more important competencies have a greater impact on the final score, providing a weighted measure of proficiency across various competencies. Calculation: For Example, Therefore, the Competency Score = 5 X 34% = 1.70 Related Answer Post To learn more about the HR Dashboard, click here.7 min read
- How to retrieve the OKRs from the backlog?In Profit.co we can retrieve the objectives and the key results which have been moved to the backlog. Why this feature? Retrieving OKRs from the backlog helps prioritize tasks that were previously deferred, ensuring they align with current objectives and drive progress. This feature allows teams to bring relevant OKRs into focus when needed, improving alignment and ensuring strategic goals are consistently addressed and executed. Step 1 Navigate to OKRs → Backlog from the left navigation panel. Click on the Add as Objective icon to retrieve the Objective from the backlog. Step 2 Choose the required place where you want to add them as Objective. A Confirmation pop-up will appear; click on Yes. Finally, the Objective will be added to the chosen place. Step 3 Follow the same steps to retrieve the Key Result by clicking on the Add as Key Result icon. Choose the required objective to add as a key result or select the required key result to add as a sub-key result. Related Answer Post To learn the process of moving objectives to the backlog, click here. To learn the process of moving key results to the backlog, click here.1 min read
- Will I receive notifications or reminders to update key results?Yes. When you create a key result you will be selecting the check-in frequency(s) to update the progress you make. Based on the frequency you have selected you will receive notifications from Profit.co Why this feature? Notifications help ensure that key results are regularly updated, keeping the team accountable and aligned with organizational goals for consistent progress. Timely reminders keep users focused on their OKRs, ensuring they track progress accurately and take necessary actions to meet their targets. Step 1 From the left navigation panel, select Settings → General → Notifications from the left navigation panel. Switch to the Action Center tab, and enable the toggle for Check-in Notifications. Note: Not just the key results notifications, you can also receive notifications on objectives, tasks, and performance reviews. You can see the toggles for the Event Name related to Task Management and Performance Management. Related Answer Post To learn more about the News Feed, click here.1 min read
- How does the Home page work in Profit.co?Profit.co allows you to manage various options on the Home page. Why this feature? The Home page serves as a centralized hub for managing actions, tracking progress, and staying updated on your key priorities. By offering a consolidated view of pending tasks, check-ins, OKR progress, and other vital activities, it ensures that users can effectively plan and execute their responsibilities with ease. Step 1: Navigate to the Home page from the left navigation panel. On the Home Page, you can access the below options: Actions: Pending: View due or overdue check-ins for Key Results, tasks, portfolios, and pending assessments. Upcoming: Get notified about upcoming actions (scheduled within the next 7 days), ensuring you're always prepared. Note: You can directly resolve all your actions from the homepage. Check-in Discipline: Track your overall check-in score and your department’s discipline score to enhance consistency. It displays the number of on-time, missed, and late check-ins for both individual and department levels. OKRs Snapshot: Gain insights into how employees and departments are progressing with their OKRs. This snapshot categorizes OKRs into Anomalies, lagging behind, and performing well, showing the exact count in each category. Note: You can take action on the OKRs by clicking on them. Key Result Progress: Track the progress of employees' Key Results. It displays the count of KRs that are Not Started, At Risk, On Track, and Completed, providing a clear status breakdown. Task Snapshot: It provides an overview of employees' tasks, showing the total count, open tasks, and completed tasks. It helps track workload, identify pending tasks, and ensure timely completion. Goals Progress: It helps track employees' total goal count, providing visibility into goal completion and progress to ensure alignment with objectives. Meetings: It helps to keep you informed about all scheduled meetings for the day, ensuring you stay prepared and never miss an important discussion. Step 2: Next, Move to the Feed section. You can express appreciation and reward points by creating an appreciation post. Mention employees using "@" and grant points by using the "+" option. You can use the filter option based on your preference. Related Answer Post: To learn more about how to Report Posts from the Homepage Feed in Profit.co, Click here.2 min read
- How to swiftly move Key results to any objective in Profit.co?Profit.co provides an option to move the key results to any destined objective. Why this feature? Easily reassign Key Results to relevant objectives, ensuring seamless alignment with evolving business priorities and strategic goals without disrupting progress. Save time and effort by quickly adapting to organizational changes, enabling teams to maintain focus and achieve objectives without duplicating work or losing valuable data. Step 1 Hover your cursor on the required key result name, and click on the ellipsis icon. Select the Move option. Select the OKR where it has to be moved. Note: If you select the Objective it will be moved as Key Result, if you select the Key Result it will be moved as a sub-key result. After selecting the OKR click on Move in the confirmation message. The Key Result will be moved to another OKR. Related Answer Post To learn more about how to rearrange the order of KRs, Objectives, and Tasks in their actual list page, click here.1 min read
- How to set additional custom attributes in the Strategy Module?Profit.co supports an option to set additional custom attributes in the Strategy module. Why this feature? Adding custom attributes in the Strategy Module allows organizations to tailor strategic planning based on their unique requirements, ensuring more relevant and insightful tracking of key business elements. This feature enhances flexibility by enabling users to define additional data points, improving alignment with organizational goals, and providing deeper visibility into strategic initiatives and performance metrics. Step 1 Navigate to Settings → Strategy Roadmaps from the left navigation panel and click on the Master layout button. Step 2 In the right panel, you will have many options to add as an attribute. Let’s add a new text area field in the layout. In the Inspector tab, you can modify the name and the visibility options. You can view the newly added attribute while creating a New Initiative. Related Answer Post To learn to enable reports under strategy settings click here. To learn the process of creating a new Milestone in Strategy, click here.1 min read
- What is the HR Cockpit widget customization in Profit.co?Profit.co offers a customizable HR Cockpit widget, allowing users to personalize their dashboard by selecting relevant widgets to display. Why this feature? Users can customize their HR Cockpit to show only the necessary widgets, creating a more tailored, focused, and efficient workspace. A personalized dashboard saves time by providing quick access to the most relevant data, reducing the need to search for information across multiple modules. Real-time access to tailored insights helps HR professionals make data-driven decisions to enhance workforce productivity and engagement. The customization makes the dashboard more user-friendly, as users have quick access to the information they value most. Note: There are 3 default categories available in PMS. They are Review, Development Plan, and Goals. In addition to this, there are 18 default charts available. Key capabilities: 1. Folder & Subfolder Structure for Grouping Users can create folders and subfolders in the HR Cockpit to organize and manage their dashboards more effectively. With the new customization, users can: Create a new folder: To create a new Folder, click on the + icon. Create a Subfolder: Once you create a new folder, an untitled Subfolder will be created. You can Edit or Delete the Subfolder by clicking on the More option. To create a new Subfolder, click on the + icon. Note: You can create a Subfolder within both newly created and existing folders. 2. Visibility You can set the Visibility for both new and existing folders. Visibility Setting Description Public Accessible to all users within the organization or team. Anyone can view and interact with the content. Private Restricted to the owner or creator. Only the person who created the folder can access and manage its contents. Access List Limited to specific users or groups assigned by the owner. Only users on the access list can view or interact with the folder. PMS Admin The PMS Admin has full access to all charts. HR BP The HR BP can view charts only for the users under their hierarchy. 3. Relevancy The insights for each phase will be displayed, and you can also select the desired phase using the filter. Similarly, the widgets will be labeled as "Recommended," "Best Practices," and "New" to help users easily identify their purpose and relevance: Best Practices: These widgets reflect must-have metrics, representing standard methods or approaches widely recognized for achieving success. Recommended: These widgets provide tailored suggestions based on user behavior, team goals, or frequently used metrics. New: This category highlights the latest widgets added to the platform. It ensures users are aware of and can explore newly introduced functionalities or visualizations. Note: Users can filter widgets by these categories, making it easier to customize their dashboard with relevant tools while streamlining the selection process. 4. Personalization You can choose the required folder and Subfolder and click on the Customize button. Select the widgets that are most relevant to your role and objectives. Once done, click Update. The selected widget will appear on your dashboard. 5. Interactive Layout Adjustments This feature allows you to dynamically rearrange and resize widgets, optimizing the dashboard layout for improved usability and clarity.3 min read
- What are the ways Profit encourages employee engagement through OKRs?Profit.co encourages employee engagement through the use of OKRs (Objectives and Key Results) by providing a structured framework for setting, tracking, and aligning individual goals with organizational priorities. This fosters a sense of ownership and accountability, helping employees stay motivated and focused on meaningful outcomes. By clearly defining key results and progress tracking, Profit.co enhances transparency, feedback, and overall engagement across the organization. Below comes the list of ways Profit.co encourages employee engagement through OKRs 1. Regular Check-Ins and Reminders for Enhanced Engagement Profit.co encourages users to provide regular and timely check-ins on their Key Results with scheduled reminders. These reminders are sent within the platform through visual cues, as well as email notifications. 2. Gamification for Enhanced Employee Engagement An entire module has been built with the intention of increasing user engagement for both managers and direct reports. The Engagement module gamifies the platform through an award system that tracks associated points on a leaderboard.1 min read
- How can users create their own custom widgets in the OKR Cockpit?Profit.co allows users to create custom widgets tailored to their specific needs, enabling them to display the most relevant information seamlessly. Why this feature? Users can design widgets that display the most relevant data, ensuring their dashboard is personalized and aligned with their unique objectives and goals. Users have full control over both the layout and content, including the selection of charts, making the OKR Cockpit more adaptable to their unique requirements. Customizing with relevant charts and metrics allows users to focus on key insights, improving decision-making and productivity by streamlining the dashboard to display only the necessary information. Key Capabilities: S.No Key Capability Description Data Source Selection Users can choose data sources such as Key Results or Check-ins to ensure the chart reflects the most relevant and actionable insights. Chart Type Customization Flexibility to select from a variety of chart types, including Column Chart, Stacked Column, Bar Chart, and Stacked Bar, to visualize data in the most effective and meaningful way. Configurable Chart Legends Customize the chart legend for better clarity and easy interpretation of data points and relationships within the chart. X and Y Axis Customization Users can define the data, labels, and metrics displayed on both the X and Y axes, tailoring the chart to align with their specific analysis, reporting requirements, and visualization goals. Values Customization Users can display the values of Key Results categorized into Standard Attributes and Custom Attributes, with the flexibility to choose the required color for better visual distinction. To better understand how these key capabilities can be applied, consider the following business scenario where creating a custom chart is essential for effective data visualization and decision-making. Business Scenario: Many organizations struggle with generic dashboards that don't align with the unique needs of different teams, leading to inefficiencies, difficulty in decision-making, and cluttered interfaces. Without customization, teams spend time filtering data and often miss key insights. Profit.co solves this by enabling users to create custom widgets tailored to their needs. With flexible data source selection, chart types, and axis customization, teams can design personalized dashboards that focus on relevant metrics. This boosts productivity, enhances decision-making, and aligns dashboards with specific goals, improving overall performance. To create a custom widget, follow the below steps: Navigate to OKRs → Cockpit from the left navigation panel. Click on the Customize button. On the Customize Subfolder page, click on Add Custom Widget. On the Add Custom Widget page, add the Name, and give a Description if required. You can customize the widget by selecting the source, chart type, X and Y axes, and configuring values and colors to suit your requirements. Below are the widget settings and configuration details for creating a custom chart tailored to this business scenario. Widget Settings: To illustrate the widget customization process, let's create a widget that displays the number of key results by department and tag. Widget Settings: Chart name: No. of Key Results by Department and Tag Source: Key result Chart type: Stacked Bar X-Axis: Aggregation type: Count Stacked data series: Tag Data series: OKR Levels Y-axis: Data Series: Owners This custom chart offers a comprehensive view of Key Results across departments, showing their association with various tags. In conclusion, by providing clear insights into Key Result distribution and tag categorization, this chart enables departments to identify patterns, allocate resources efficiently, and stay focused on achieving their objectives. Explanation of Key Capabilities We can now explore the key capabilities that enable organizations to customize their data visualization and enhance decision-making. 1. Data Source Selection In the Widget Customization, users can choose the required source and track them effectively. The available sources are: Key Results - Select this source to monitor Key Results, providing visibility into their attributes such as name, tags, status, target dates, owners, and other details. Check-ins - Select this source to monitor periodic updates, providing visibility into planned dates, values, statuses, and comments. 2. Chart Type Customization Users can choose from several chart types to display their data in the most meaningful way, depending on the type of comparison or trend they want to highlight: Column Chart Stacked Column Chart Bar Chart Stacked Bar Chart 3. Configurable Chart Legends Users can enable or disable the chart label toggle as needed to customize the display of legends on their charts. 4. X and Y Axis Customization Customizing the X and Y axes widgets allows for tailored data visualization, enhancing clarity and relevance. X-Axis Customization: Feature Description Label Editing Edit the label name of the X-axis to reflect the data being represented. Data Series Selection You can choose a source to determine which attributes need to be displayed: Key Results: Displays relevant attributes such as Name, Tags, Status, Target Dates, Owners, etc. Check-ins: Displays both Key Result and Check-in attributes, including Planned Date and Status. Note: If you choose Key Results as the source, only the Key Result attributes (both Standard and Custom) will be visible. If you select Check-ins as the source, both Key Result and Check-in attributes (Standard and Custom) will be available for selection. You can then choose the required attributes based on your needs. Custom Attributes Include any Custom attributes you have defined based on your specific needs. Grouping Category Organize data into categories for better visualization, including: - Discrete Values - Numeric Ranges - Time (Monthly) - Time (Weekly) Y-Axis Customization: Feature Description Label Editing Similar to the X-axis, you can edit the label name of the Y-axis to suit your visualization needs. Aggregation Type Selection You can choose the required aggregation type for data representation: Count Sum Average 5. Values Customization Values customization allows you to tailor the data displayed in you widget, enhancing the visual representation of key metrics. Feature Description Label Editing Edit the label value to accurately represent the data being displayed. Data Series Selection You can choose a source to determine which attributes need to be displayed: Key Results: Displays relevant attributes such as Name, Tags, Status, Target Dates, Owners, etc. Check-ins: Displays both Key Result and Check-in attributes, including Planned Date and Status. Note: If you choose Key Results as the source, only the Key Result attributes (both Standard and Custom) will be visible. If you select Check-ins as the source, both Key Result and Check-in attributes (Standard and Custom) will be available for selection. You can then choose the required attributes based on your needs. Color Customization Customize the color of the chart to improve visual distinction and alignment with your branding. Multiple Values You can add multiple values as needed, allowing for a comprehensive view of your data metrics. 6 min read
- What is Budget Management in the PPM module?Budget Management in Profi.co's PPM (Project Portfolio Management) module is a financial tracking feature that allows users to monitor project budgets and expenses. It enables you to define billing types (Fixed Price, Time & Material, or Mixed), set budget limits, track expenses, and view quarterly financial summaries to ensure projects stay within budget and maintain profitability. Table of Contents Why is Budget Management important in the PPM module? What are the three main sections of Budget Management in Profi.co? What billing types are available in the Budget Management feature? How do I set up Budget Management for my project in Profi.co? What can I export from the Budget Management feature? Best Practices for Budget Management in the PPM Module Related Questions Frequently Asked Questions Why is Budget Management important in the PPM module? Budget Management is crucial for maintaining financial control and project profitability. Here's why this feature matters: Financial Tracking: The Budget and Expenses sections help track spending and maintain profitability by defining billing types, setting limits, and monitoring expenses, ensuring projects stay within budget. Quick Financial Assessment: The Summary section provides a quarterly financial overview, enabling quick assessment of a project's financial health, helping identify discrepancies, and aligning with business goals. Resource Allocation: Effective budget management ensures financial resources are allocated wisely, helping avoid overspending while maintaining profitability. What are the three main sections of Budget Management in Profi.co? The Budget Management feature in Profi.co's PPM module consists of three key sections: Budget: Define the billing type for your project and set financial parameters. Expenses: Track and record all project-related expenses in detail. Summary: View a quarterly breakdown of your project's financial data for quick assessment. Each section works together to provide comprehensive financial oversight for your projects. What billing types are available in the Budget Management feature? Profi.co offers three billing types to accommodate different project requirements: 1. Fixed Price The total cost, timeline, and scope of work are agreed upon before the project starts. Key Features: The client pays a predetermined amount, regardless of the actual time or resources used Suitable for projects with well-defined requirements and minimal changes expected Provides budget certainty and predictability 2. Time & Material Billing is based on the actual hours worked and materials used during the project. Key Features: Offers flexibility for projects where requirements might evolve over time The client pays for the resources utilized during the project Ideal for projects with changing scopes or undefined requirements 3. Mixed Combines elements of fixed price and time & material billing to provide a hybrid approach. Key Features: Fixed-price components for predictable aspects of the project Time & material billing for sections requiring flexibility and adaptability Provides the best of both approaches for complex projects You can select the appropriate billing type based on your project's specific requirements. How do I set up Budget Management for my project in Profi.co? Follow these steps to create and manage a budget for your project: Step 1: Access the Financials Tab To create a budget for your project: Click on your Project In the project overview section, switch to the Financials tab You will see three main sections: Budget, Expenses, and Summary Step 2: Define Your Budget In the Budget section: Choose your billing type from the three available options: Fixed Price Time & Material Mixed Select the appropriate billing type based on your project's requirements Note: You can export data from the Budget tab using the Export/Download option to download project budgets and related financial details for offline review, reporting, or analysis. Step 3: Track Expenses To add and monitor project expenses: Navigate to the Expenses tab Click on the +Add Expense button In the Add Expense side panel, enter: Name, Category, Expense Date, Amount Spent Click the Add button to save Note: You can enable or disable automatic number generation for project expenses under Settings → Projects → Number Generation. Step 4: Review Financial Summary The Summary section provides: A quarterly breakdown of your project's financial data A high-level view of budget distribution across each quarter Quick snapshots to assess if you're on track to meet financial goals Easy identification of potential discrepancies All expenses added to a project are displayed in this tab This summary helps you make informed decisions to stay aligned with the allocated budget. What can I export from the Budget Management feature? You can export financial data from the Budget tab using the Export/Download option. This allows you to: Download project budgets and related financial details Review data offline Create reports for stakeholders Perform analysis outside of Profi.co Share accurate financial data in presentations This export feature streamlines financial reviews and supports better collaboration with team members and clients. Best Practices for Budget Management in the PPM Module To maximize the effectiveness of Budget Management in Profi.co: Choose the Right Billing Type: Select Fixed Price for well-defined projects, Time & Material for flexible projects, or Mixed for hybrid approaches. Regular Expense Tracking: Add expenses promptly to maintain accurate financial records. Monitor Quarterly Summaries: Review the Summary tab regularly to identify trends and potential budget issues early. Enable Automatic Numbering: Use automatic number generation for expenses to maintain organized records. Export Data Regularly: Download financial reports for stakeholder meetings and financial reviews. Align with Business Goals: Use the financial overview to ensure projects support overall business objectives. Related Questions How to create a Project in the PPM module. click here Frequently Asked Questions Q1. Can I change the billing type after creating a project budget? Yes, you can modify the billing type in the Budget section of the Financials tab based on changing project requirements. Q2. How often is the Summary section updated? The Summary section updates automatically as you add expenses and budget information, providing real-time quarterly financial breakdowns. Q3. Can multiple team members add expenses to a project? Yes, team members with appropriate permissions can add expenses to track project spending collaboratively.5 min read
- How do I align my OKRs?Profit.co allows the employees to align or unalign their OKRs with Corporate, Department, and Team OKRs. Why this feature? OKR Alignment feature helps to visualize each and every employee’s contribution towards the organization’s goals which in turn helps to manage the dependencies in an efficient way. Objectives and Key Results have the same alignments steps. Bottom-up aligned under an objective will be reflected as key result. Bottom-up aligned under a key result will be reflected as sub-key result. Aligning Objectives You can align or unalign your objective as a key result or as a sub-key result under another OKR in the bottom-up alignment. Aligning Key Results You can align or unalign your key results as a key result or as a sub-key result under another OKR in the bottom-up alignment. You can align or unalign your sub-key results as a key result or as a sub-key result under another OKR in the bottom-up alignment. Related Blog Post To learn more about OKR Alignments, click here.1 min read
- How do I view corporate OKRs?Profit.co allows you to view Corporate OKRs from the left navigation menu. Why this feature? Gain transparency into the organization's strategic goals and priorities, ensuring alignment across teams. Empower teams to track progress and contribute effectively to corporate objectives. Step 1 Navigate to OKRs → All OKRs from the left navigation panel. You will get landed in the Corporate OKRs. Related Answer Post To learn more about how to view your Team OKR, click here1 min read
- How to add assigned key results to other objectives?Profit.co provides an option to add the assigned key results in your department to add other relevant objectives. Why this feature? Allows teams to link related key results to multiple objectives, ensuring seamless collaboration and unified efforts toward achieving organizational goals. Reduces duplication of work by aligning existing key results with relevant objectives, maximizing impact, and saving time. Navigate to Settings → OKRs → Alignments from the left navigation panel and enable the Allow user to add assigned key results into their OKR toggle in the Top Down Alignment approach. Scenario: Consider the CEO has assigned a key result to the customer success team to decrease the churn rate. Meanwhile, the head of the customer success team is working on an initiative called "Delight Customers." While progressing with this initiative, they realize that the key result assigned by the CEO also aligns with their initiative's goals. To ensure better alignment and efficiency, the head of the customer success team decides to add the CEO's key result to their "Delight Customers" initiative, integrating the two efforts to work toward a common objective. Follow the below steps to add to OKR: Step 1 To add the assigned key result, click on the More option in the key result and select the "Add to OKR" option. Step 2 Select the Objective to which you want to add the assigned key result and click Update. The assigned key result will be added to the selected objective, as shown in the below image. Note: The progress made on this key result will result in progressing to the added objective as well as the parent objective. Related Answer Post To learn more about how to move the Key Results and Sub-Key Results within the same Objective, click here.2 min read
- How do I create a corporate OKR?Profit.co allows you to create Corporate OKRs. Why this feature? Corporate OKRs provide a clear focus on strategic goals, aligning teams and departments toward achieving measurable outcomes that drive organizational growth and success. They ensure accountability and transparency by defining specific objectives and tracking progress through measurable key results, enabling data-driven decision-making and continuous improvement. Step 1 Navigate to OKRs from the left navigation panel. You will land on your Corporate OKRs page. Click on the + Create Objective button and select the option in which you want to create. Step 2 For instance, we can create using the Using Form option. Enter the Objective Name and required details. Once done, click Create. Corporate OKR will be created. Step 3 To create a Key Result, click on the Add a new key result button. Enter the required details and click Create. Related Answer Post To know more about When to Use Individual, Team, Department, & Company OKR Levels, Click here1 min read
- How to create objectives with restricted visibility?Profit. co allows you to create an objective with restricted visibility at the Department, Team, & Individual levels. Why this feature? Restricting visibility ensures sensitive objectives remain confidential while allowing relevant stakeholders to focus on their specific goals and priorities without unnecessary distractions. This feature enables tailored access to objectives, fostering targeted collaboration among designated teams or individuals, which improves efficiency and aligns with organizational hierarchies or roles. Follow the below steps to create objectives with restricted visibility: On the Objective creation page, select the visibility as Department or Access list to apply restrictions from the dropdown. Choose the Access List, and then click Create. Note: Once created, This objective will be only visible to the particular department you have selected & created. You can assign this objective to the people who are only present in that particular department and you will not be able to move this objective to another department because of the visibility restrictions. Related Answer Post To know more about when to use individual, team, department, & company OKR Levels, click here.1 min read
- How do I edit my check-ins in the Balanced Scorecard?Profit.co provides an option to effortlessly edit check-ins within the Balanced Scorecard, enabling seamless updates and tracking for improved performance monitoring. Why this feature? The ability to edit check-ins ensures accurate data entry and flexibility, helping users reflect real-time updates, correct discrepancies, and maintain alignment with organizational goals. It empowers better decision-making by keeping performance insights relevant and up-to-date. Step 1: Navigate to Balanced Scorecard → My departments from the left navigation panel. Select the KPI you wish to edit for the check-in. Step 2: On the side panel, click the check-in button. On the check-in page, switch to the History tab. click the Edit icon to make the changes in the check-in, and click Update.1 min read
- What is the use of BSC Cockpit Dashboard in Profit.co?What is BSC Cockpit? In the context of organizational management and performance tracking, BSC Cockpit refers to a dashboard that assists in monitoring and managing Balanced Scorecards within an organization. It offers real-time data visualization through charts, graphs, and other visual elements, aiding in optimizing decision-making. This provides insights into the organization's performance and helps identify areas that need attention or improvement, ensuring alignment with strategic goals. Why this feature? The BSC Cockpit facilitates streamlined workflows and efficiency by centralizing data access and presenting user-friendly information. By centralizing and visualizing this data, organizations can enhance efficiency, streamline workflows, and better achieve their strategic goals. Step 1 Navigate to Balanced Scorecard → Cockpit from the left navigation panel. On the cockpit page, you can find the check-in discipline charts under the Execute phase. Note : The filter option allows selection between Corporate, and Department, displaying relevant data accordingly. Data is viewable only for the selected period. Check-in discipline The Balanced Scorecard (BSC), check-in discipline involves a systematic and regular review of performance metrics and strategic objectives. This practice ensures that teams and individuals remain aligned with organizational goals and effectively monitor progress. The Execution phase in BSC reflects the organization's dedication to disciplined tracking and comprehensive reporting. Overall Summary: This chart, 'Overall Summary,' illustrates the percentage and count of Missed, Late, and On-time check-ins up to the current week. Note: You can export the data separately for each aspect of the check-in discipline. Week-over-Week Check-in discipline: This chart, "Week-over-Week Check-in Discipline," illustrates the percentage, score, and count of Missed, Late, and On-time check-ins for each week for the selected period. Check-in discipline by next level department: The Check-in discipline by next-level department feature offers a visual breakdown of Missed, Late, and On-Time check-ins across all departments, starting with parent departments. You can easily track sub-departments by selecting the parent department in the filter. Check-in discipline by all departments The "Check-in discipline by department" feature provides a visual representation of the proportions of Missed, Late, and On-Time check-ins across all departments. Note: You have the option to see this graph in numeric values and percentage and score views. Check-in discipline score of all Employees The "Check-in discipline score of all Employees" feature categorizes employees into five distinct ranges based on their Planned, On Time, Missed, and Late check-ins: "0% to 20%", "20% to 40%", "40% to 60%", "60% to 80%", and "80% to 100%". It provides a tally of check-ins for each range.3 min read
- What are the benefits of the Quick View panel in OKRs?Profit.co provides a quick view panel, which is much more intuitive and efficient. Why this feature? Reduce time spent navigating multiple pages by providing instant access to comprehensive details for Objectives and Key Results directly through an intuitive side panel. Empower users with all critical information—progress, ownership, alignment, and more in one view, enabling quicker decision-making and improved efficiency. Deliver a seamless and user-friendly experience by consolidating data into a single, easily accessible interface, reducing clicks, and eliminating unnecessary navigation steps. Quick View Panel for Objectives: The Quick View Panel for Objectives is designed to provide users with all critical information at a glance, enhancing efficiency and ease of use. With just one click, users can access a consolidated view of all the essential details related to an objective, eliminating the need to navigate across multiple pages. When users click on an objective, the quick view panel displays the following items: 1. KPIs and Initiatives Alignment Presents the alignment between the objective and associated KPIs and initiatives in a 4-quadrant format. This view enables users to easily assess the strategic connections and impacts of each initiative on the objective. To learn more about the KPIs and Initiatives alignment, click here 2. Progress Displays the current progress in a graphical format, providing users with a visual representation of how much of the objective has been accomplished. This helps track progress at a glance. 3. Owner, Target Date, Visibility, and Tags Displays detailed information about the objective owner, target completion date, visibility settings, and any associated tags. This makes it easier for users to identify ownership, track deadlines, and organize objectives effectively. 4. Alignments Shows how the objective aligns with broader organizational goals, providing context and clarity. This helps users understand how individual objectives contribute to the overall strategy. 5. Key Results, Notes, and Documents Consolidates related Key Results, attached notes, and documents into one view. This makes it convenient for users to quickly access all supporting materials related to the objective. Quick View Panel for Key Results: The Quick View Panel for Key Results provides users with a comprehensive, at-a-glance overview of all critical information. This feature is designed to save time and improve efficiency, allowing users to quickly assess the progress, alignment, and related details of a Key Result without navigating to multiple pages. When users click on a Key Result, the Quick View Panel in the Overview tab displays the following items: 1. Progress Displays both the Planned and Actual values of the Key Result, providing a clear view of how much progress has been made toward achieving the target. 2. Latest Check-in Shows the latest check-in made by the user, along with the most recent comment they provided. This allows users to quickly review updates and feedback. 3. Owner, Type/KPI, Target Date, Frequency, and Tags Provides detailed information about the Key Result owner, the type of Key Result (e.g., KPI), target completion date, check-in frequency, and any associated tags for better organization and tracking. 4. Alignments Displays the alignment of the Key Result with organizational goals, helping users understand how the Key Result contributes to broader strategic objectives. 5. Sub Key Results, Notes, and Documents Shows related Sub Key Results, attached notes, and documents, consolidating all supporting information in one place for easier review and reference. On the Tasks tab, the task associated with this key result will be visible. You can also create a new task.3 min read
- What is KPIs and Initiatives Alignment in Profit.co?The KPIs and Initiatives Alignment insight in Profit.co provides a powerful vision for evaluating how well initiatives drive the success of KPIs. This feature empowers teams to assess alignment between KPIs and initiatives, ensuring that each effort is strategically impactful. It helps organizations focus resources on initiatives that actively contribute to KPI progress, avoiding misalignment and maximizing outcomes. This approach promotes a culture of accountability, efficiency, and proactive goal management, reinforcing a commitment to achieving measurable, strategic success Key Benefits Improves Strategic Alignment: Helps ensure that initiatives directly support KPI targets, minimizing misalignment and maximizing strategic impact. Enhances Resource Allocation: Identifies areas of waste or misdirected efforts, allowing teams to reallocate resources to initiatives that drive measurable results. Increases Visibility: Provides a clear, visual overview of how each OKR is progressing, enabling faster decision-making and response to areas needing improvement. Supports Continuous Optimization: By categorizing OKR, it allows ongoing assessment and adjustment of initiatives to keep goals on track. Beneficiaries The KPIs and Initiatives Alignment insight is beneficial for a wide range of users who play a role in driving organizational goals and ensuring strategic alignment. Here’s how it benefits specific roles: Beneficiary How They Benefit Executives and Leadership Teams Gain clarity on strategic alignment and initiative effectiveness. Make data-driven decisions to achieve organizational objectives Department Heads and Managers Evaluate team initiatives' impact on KPIs. Identify misaligned efforts and optimize resource allocation. Individual Contributors Understand how their efforts align with organizational goals. Gain visibility into their contributions to key results. The Four Quadrants The KPIs and Initiatives Alignment Quadrant visualizes OKRs based on how well their initiatives contribute to KPI success. It identifies where strategies are succeeding, where adjustments may be needed, and where further analysis is required to optimize outcomes. To better understand the alignment in each quadrant, it's important to distinguish between the KPI KRs and the Initiatives KRs: The KPI KRs include Increase, Decrease, and Control KPI types. The Initiative KRs include Percentage Tracked, Milestone Tracked, and Task Tracked KR types. Below is an overview of the four quadrants, each representing a different scenario of alignment between initiatives and KPIs. Quadrant Description Why It Matters On the Right Track This quadrant represents OKRs where both KPIs and initiatives are performing well, indicating strong alignment and successful execution. On the Right Track highlights areas where efforts are successfully translating into desired outcomes, serving as a model for future initiatives. Outcome Lag Here, initiatives are progressing well, but KPIs are not showing expected improvement, suggesting potential misalignment between the initiative and KPI. This quadrant signals the need for a reassessment of the alignment between initiatives and KPIs to avoid wasting resources on efforts that do not effectively contribute to achieving the desired outcomes. Objectives in this quadrant may reflect a well-conceived plan requiring adjustments. If efforts began in the previous quarter, consistent work and fine-tuning can shift the OKR toward Unexpected Wins, or even On the Right Track, in subsequent cycles, highlighting the importance of iterative improvements to achieve meaningful results. Unexpected Wins This quadrant shows KPIs progressing positively despite challenges in initiatives. Success may be driven by external factors or compensating initiatives. It’s important to recognize when KPIs are improving due to factors outside of the initiative you're focusing on. This helps avoid relying on luck or unrepeatable circumstances. By identifying the real drivers behind KPI success, teams can adjust future plans to incorporate effective strategies, transforming 'lucky' outcomes into structured, repeatable processes that enhance performance predictably. Early Stage Both KPIs and initiatives are underperforming, indicating the need for immediate intervention and corrective action. This quadrant points to areas that need urgent attention to get back on track. It highlights the need for rethinking strategies or execution to realign OKRs and improve performance. Early-stage OKRs often represent areas where teams are still refining their approach or encountering obstacles, requiring quick adjustments to set a strong foundation for success.. Timeframe of Strategy: Beginning, Middle, and End of Period Timeframe Usage of KPIs and Initiatives Alignment Beginning of Period At the start of the period, use the KPIs and Initiatives alignment feature to ensure all initiatives are designed to directly contribute to achieving the defined KPIs. This proactive alignment sets a clear path for strategic success and resource optimization Middle of Period During the midpoint, monitor the real-time execution alignment between KPIs and initiatives. Adjust initiatives as needed to address any gaps, keeping progress on track toward achieving the desired outcomes. End of Period At the close of the period, assess how effectively the initiatives drove KPI outcomes. Use these insights to identify areas of strength and opportunities for improvement, refining strategies for the next cycle. By aligning initiatives with KPIs throughout the timeframe, organizations can maintain strategic focus, drive impactful outcomes, and foster a culture of continuous improvement. Calculation: The following explains how different scenarios impact the calculation of KPI and Initiative progress. Each example demonstrates how OKRs are evaluated based on their KPI and Initiative performance: Scenario 1: OKR with No KPIs Consider an objective with only Initiative KRs. Example: KR Progress Calculation: Average of Initiative KRs. KR Type Progress Initiative KR 80% Initiative KR 24% Initiative KR 12% KPI KR Progress: 0% Initiative KR Progress = Average of Initiative KRs = 39% Quadrant Placement: KPI KRs Progress Initiative KRs Progress Quadrant Explanation 0% 39% Early Stage The objective has no KPI KRs, and the initiative progress is low (38.7%). This indicates underperformance across the board, signaling a need for immediate intervention and reevaluation of the strategy. Scenario 2: OKR with No Initiatives Consider an objective with only KPI KRs. Example: KR Progress Calculation: Average of KPI KRs. KR Type Progress KPI KR 70% KPI KR 50% KPI KR 60% KPI KR Progress = Average of KPI KRs = (70%+50%+60%) / 3 = 60% Initiative KR Progress = 0% Quadrant Placement: KPI KRs Progress Initiative KRs Progress Quadrant Explanation 60% 0% Unexpected Wins In this scenario, KPIs are progressing well (60%), but there are no initiatives to drive this improvement. The KPI progress could be due to external factors or other unaccounted elements, suggesting success was driven by luck or circumstances outside the planned efforts. Scenario 3: Non-Weighted Standalone OKR Consider an objective with 1 KPI KR and 3 Initiative KRs. Example: KR Progress Calculation: The KPI and Initiative KRs progress are calculated separately by averaging the progress values within each KR type. KR Type Progress KPI KR 1 30% Initiative KR 2 75% Initiative KR 3 80% Initiative KR 4 85% KPI KR Progress: Average of KPI KR progress values = 30 / 1 = 30% Initiative KR Progress: Average of Initiative KR progress values = (75+80+85) / 3 = 80% Quadrant Placement: KPI KRs Progress Initiative KRs Progress Quadrant Explanation 30% 80% Outcome Lag In this scenario, the initiatives are progressing well (80%), but the KPI progress is very low (30%). This indicates a misalignment between initiatives and KPIs, suggesting that the initiatives are not contributing to improving the KPI outcomes, leading to wasted effort. Scenario 4: Weighted OKR Consider an objective with 2 KPI KRs and 3 Initiative KRs, each with a specific weight. Example: KR Progress Calculation: Multiply each KPI and Initiative KR’s Progress by its Weightage to find the Weighted Contribution. KR Type Weightage Progress Weighted Contribution KPI KR 1 30% 90% 30% x 90% =27.0% KPI KR 2 25% 85% 25% x 85% = 21.25% Initiative KR 3 15% 85% 15% x 85% = 12.75% Initiative KR 4 15% 80% 15% x 80% = 12% Initiative KR 5 15% 90% 15% x 90% = 13.5% KPI KR Progress Calculation: Sum of all Weighted Contributions of KPI KRs / Sum of Weightages of KPI KRs = (27.0 + 21.25) / 55 = 87% Initiative KR Progress Calculation: Sum of all Weighted Contributions of Initiative KRs / Sum of Weightages of Initiative KRs = (12.75 + 12 + 13.5) / 45 = 85% Quadrant Placement: KPI KRs Progress Initiative KRs Progress Quadrant Explanation 87% 85% On the Right Track Both KPI and initiative progress is high (87.27% and 86.25%), indicating a well-executed strategy with strong alignment, placing it in On the Right Track Note: You can now customize the KPIs & Initiatives alignment widget in the cockpit to suit your preferences.7 min read
- How to make manager's comments mandatory in the Performance Review?In Profit.co you can make the manager comments mandatory while performing the manager assessment in the performance review. Why this feature? Mandating manager comments guarantees detailed, actionable feedback, helping employees understand their strengths and improvement areas. Requiring comments holds managers accountable for their evaluations, reducing bias and encouraging thoughtful performance reviews. Providing mandatory comments fosters open communication, ensuring employees clearly understand the reasoning behind their performance scores. Step 1 Navigate to Settings → Performance → Reviews from the left navigation panel and switch to the Review Templates tab. On the Review Template page, click on the Edit icon of the Review template you want to make the changes to. Step 2 Select the Review Process tab and click on the Edit icon to edit the Manager Assessment menu. Step 3 On the Manger Assessment Options panel, under the Performance Review Assessment Includes section, the comments toggle will be enabled for the enabled review components. For instance, let’s consider the review components OKRs, Goals, and Competencies are enabled. Click on the Mandate Comments you can select the ratings and set mandatory comments to the same. Once selected, click on Apply. Step 4 Once done, click on Update. The user performing the manager assessment will get a red outline in the comment box to provide the mandatory comment. The user will not be able to submit the review without providing the mandatory comment. Related Answer Post To learn the process of how to initiate a new performance review click here.2 min read
- What is the OKR Cockpit widget customization in Profit.co?Profit.co offers a customizable OKR Cockpit widget, allowing users to personalize their dashboard by selecting relevant widgets to display. Why this feature? Users can customize their OKR Cockpit to show only the widgets they need, creating a more tailored, focused, and efficient workspace. By displaying only relevant widgets, users can concentrate on their key objectives, making it easier to stay aligned with their priorities. The customization makes the dashboard more user-friendly, as users have quick access to the information they value most. Key capabilities: S.No Key Capability Description 1. Folder & Subfolder Structure for Grouping Supports hierarchical grouping by allowing users to create folders and subfolders, helping organize insights and simplify navigation. 2. Visibility Provides access control to restrict visibility of folders, and files, ensuring sensitive information is viewed only by authorized users. 3. Relevancy Allows to select widgets based on the categorization of Recommended, Best Practices, and New, ensuring quick access to relevant insights based on goals, frequently used metrics, or updates. 4. Personalization Allows users to personalize their workspace by selecting and displaying widgets that align with their specific needs for a tailored experience. 5. Interactive Layout Adjustments Enables users to rearrange and resize widgets dynamically, optimizing the dashboard layout for better usability and clarity. 1. Folder & Subfolder Structure for Grouping In the OKR Cockpit, users can create folders and files to organize and manage their dashboards more effectively. With the new customization, users can: Create a new folder: To create a new Folder, click on the + icon. Create a new Subfolder: Once you create a new Subfolder, an untitled file will be created. You can Edit or Delete the file by clicking on the More option. To create a new Subfolder, click on the + icon. Note: You can create subfolders within both newly created and existing folders. If you try to create a subfolder with a name that already exists, an alert message will be displayed. 2. Visibility You can set the Visibility for both new and existing folders. Visibility Setting Description Public Accessible to all users within the organization or team. Anyone can view and interact with the content. Private Restricted to the owner or creator. Only the person who created the folder can access and manage its contents. Access List Limited to specific users or groups assigned by the owner. Only users on the access list can view or interact with the folder. 3. Relevancy The insights for each phase will be displayed, and you can also select the desired phase using the filter. Similarly, the widgets will be labeled as "Recommended," "Best Practices," and "New" to help users easily identify their purpose and relevance: Best Practices: These widgets reflect must-have metrics, representing standard methods or approaches widely recognized for achieving success. They guide users on the most effective ways to track and manage their objectives. Recommended: These widgets provide tailored suggestions based on user behavior, team goals, or frequently used metrics. They act as complementary tools to enhance tracking and decision-making by aligning with user priorities and offering additional insights. New: This category highlights the latest widgets added to the platform. It ensures users are aware of and can explore newly introduced functionalities or visualizations. Note: Users can filter widgets by these categories, making it easier to customize their dashboard with relevant tools while streamlining the selection process. 4. Personalization You can choose the required folder and file and click on the Customize button. Select the widgets that are most relevant to your role and objectives. Once done, click Update. The selected widget will appear on your dashboard. 5. Interactive Layout Adjustments This feature allows you to dynamically rearrange and resize widgets, optimizing the dashboard layout for improved usability and clarity. Note: You can also export the data in the widgets in CSV format, and the widgets in JPG or PNG format. Related Answer Post To learn more about OKR Cockpit, click here.4 min read
- How to change the check-in frequency in a created KR?Profit.co allows you to change the check-in frequency of the existing key result. Why this feature? Flexibility in check-in frequency allows users to tailor Key Results (KRs) to their workflow, ensuring timely updates that align with project needs and improve tracking accuracy. Changing check-in frequency provides better control over performance monitoring, helping users maintain momentum on key initiatives and adapt quickly to evolving goals. Step 1 Navigate to the OKRs from the left navigation panel and choose the required key result for which you want to change the check-in frequency. Click on the Edit icon of the Key Result. Step 2 Once you click on the edit icon, a side panel will open, you can find the Check-in Frequency column, click on the dropdown, and select the required frequency date. Once done, click on Update. Note: You can also select the created custom check-in frequency for the key result. If the custom check-in frequency days are not coming within the key result target period you will get the alert message that the check-in frequency does not match the Target Date. Related Answer Post To learn about the process of creating custom frequencies, click here.1 min read
- How to Export Goals in .CSV and .XLS format?Profit.co allows users to export data from goals in XLS or CSV excel formats from the Goals module. Why this feature? The export feature enables users to easily download their goal progress in XLS or CSV formats, providing flexibility to analyze and share data outside the Profit.co platform. HR Admins and managers can efficiently export goal data for multiple users, simplifying the reporting process and enabling better tracking of organizational performance. By exporting data from different goal categories (My Goals, Org Goals, etc.), users have the ability to tailor the exported content, making it easier to focus on specific performance areas. Step 1 Navigate to Performance → Goals from the left navigation panel. Click on the More Options icon in the right corner. Choose Export and then Download. Note: You have access to your previous export history, as well as the ability to monitor your export progress. The goals data will be downloaded in .CSV or .XLS format as shown below. Related Answer Post To learn more about how to export reviews in PDF format, click here.1 min read
- How does a Manager can select multiple Goals to Approve/Reject?Profit.co provides an option to select multiple Goals to Approve/Reject them instantly. Why this feature? Managers can efficiently approve or reject multiple goals at once, saving time and ensuring a smoother workflow without having to handle each goal individually. This feature enhances goal management by allowing managers to review and act on several goals simultaneously, ensuring consistent alignment with organizational priorities and faster progress tracking. Step 1 Navigate to Settings → Performance → Goals from the left navigation panel. Switch to the Approval Flow tab and enable the Approvals for Create/Edit Goals toggle. You can also configure the custom list of employees, who can accept your goals. Step 2 To approve the goals, the manager has to navigate to Performance → Goals from the left navigation panel. Switch to the Pending Approval tab. Select the goals you want to approve and click on the Approve button. By selecting the checkbox the Goals will be selected for bulk action.1 min read
- How to display the individual goals weight in the Performance Review?Profit.co provides an option to display the Individual Goals weights in the Goals section while performing the assessment in the Performance Review. Why this feature? By using this feature we can identify the individual weights for the goals in Performance Review which help in providing ratings in assessments according to the Goals Progress. The user wouldn't be able to edit the weights from the Performance Review. Step 1 Navigate to Settings → Performance → Goals from the left navigation menu. Enable the toggle for the option “Allow users to define weights for goals”. Step 2 After enabling the toggle "Allow users to define weights for goals" you can set weights for Goals. Note: Initiate a new Performance Review. While performing the assessment for Performance Review you can see the weights for Individual Goals. Related Answer Post To learn the process of creating new Goals, click here.1 min read
- How do I get Email Notifications for the events in goals?In Profit.co you can now Customize email notifications for goals by enabling the events related to goals and their approvals. Why this feature? Notifications help drive accountability by keeping all stakeholders informed, while also promoting seamless collaboration, as everyone is aligned on the latest developments and adjustments in goals. When users request approval for goal actions, an email is sent to the manager, ensuring only authorized individuals can grant permissions to create, edit, or delete goals, maintaining control and oversight. Note: Make sure to enable the toggle Enable Approval for Create/Delete Goals, under Approval Flows via Settings → Performance → Goals. Also, only Super Users have access to Settings. Step 1 Navigate to Settings → General→ Action center from the left navigation panel. On the Action Center page, under Performance, scroll down to the Goals section, enable the Goals email notification toggle, and select the event for which you want to customize and update the email notification process. The List of events will be as follows. For instance, to enable Email Notifications for Goal Delete Approval, click on the Edit icon to customize the notification. Step 2 On the Edit Menu Group page, enable the Enable Email Notification toggle, customize the message and subject, and click Update. Note: If a user wants to delete his/her goal, the approval for it will be sent to the Custom list of Employees assigned to approve. The notification will be sent to their Action Center and the user will also receive an email notification in their registered email ID that is linked with the Profit.co account. Related Answer Post To learn more about how to enable and disable action center and email notifications, click here2 min read
- How to add Goals from the Goals Library in Profit.co?Profit.co provides an option to add Goals from the Goals Library. Why this feature? The Goals library serves as a repository for any goals you might want to use in the future. Users can save the Goals that they find valuable and directly move them from the Goals library while creating individual and organizational goals. Step 1 Navigate to Settings → Performance → Goals from the left navigation panel. On the Goals page, select the Goals Library tab, and select a Category for your goals. If you want to include additional categories, click on the Add Category button. To Add New Goals, click on the Create button. Step 2 On the Create Goal panel, provide the required information. Once done, click on Create. Note: You can now export your Goals Library as a CSV file. Step 3 Navigate to Performance → Goals from the left navigation panel. On the My Goals page, click on the + icon to Add New Goal and select From Library from the drop-down menu. Step 4 From the Create Goal From Library panel, select the Goal you want and click on Add. Step 5 You can share and Associate Key Results for your goal. Once done, click on Create. The newly created Goals will be added to your My Goals page. Related Answer Post To learn more about how to add Notes to your goals, click here.2 min read
- How do I follow the OKRs of my subordinates?Profit.co allows you to set apart and follow the OKRs of your subordinates. Why this feature? This feature allows you to monitor the OKRs of your subordinates which enables them to perform efficiently and aids in achieving their goals. The OKRs of employees who need special attention can be monitored separately in one place via the Following OKRs. Step 1 Navigate to All My OKRs from the left navigation panel and select the OKRs that you want to monitor. Step 2 On the Objective Overview page, Click on the Follow button. Step 3 Now navigate to OKRs → Following OKRs from the left navigation panel. All of the OKRs that you chose using the follow button can be found in the Following OKRs window. When you follow the OKRs of your subordinates, their check-in updates will now appear in the homepage feed. Note: You can also export your data by clicking on the Export icon in the right corner. Related answer post To learn more about how to stop watching your subordinate's OKRs, click here.1 min read
- How do I create a parent department for an existing department?Profit.co provides an option to set up a Parent department for an existing department. Why this feature? Organizational hierarchies typically have several levels and members with higher levels of authority. Establishing a departmental hierarchy will make it clear where authority and leadership are needed. It also ensures that everyone in a hierarchy will work to meet the organization's goals. Step 1 Navigate to Settings→ User Management from the left navigation panel and switch to the Departments tab. Click on the Edit option for the department. Select the Parent Department attribute, choose the department you want to make a parent department, and click Update. The edited department will come under the parent department as a sub-department as shown in the below image. How to create a new sub-department? We can also create a new sub-department inside the Parent Department. Hover the cursor over the Parent Department and click on the + icon. Create the new sub-department and click Create. The newly created sub-department will appear below the Parent Department as shown in the below image. Note: The head of the parent department will also be able to view and modify the OKRs in the sub-department. Related Answer Post To learn about the process of adding a new team, click here.2 min read
- How do I enable the Balanced Scorecard module in Profit.co?Profit.co allows you to enable the balanced scorecard module through Settings. Why this feature? The Balanced Scorecard helps ensure that all levels of the organization understand the strategic objectives and align their daily work to support these goals. The BSC offers a balanced view of performance across key areas by providing a comprehensive framework that translates an organization's vision and strategy into a coherent set of performance measures. Note: Only Superusers can enable or disable the Balanced Scorecard via Settings. Step 1 Navigate to Settings → General → Apps from the left navigation panel. On the Apps page, enable the Balanced Scorecard toggle. Step 2 You can now access the Balanced Scorecard module by clicking on the Balanced Scorecard icon from the left navigation panel.1 min read
- How to create a new portfolio in profit.co?Profit.co provides the ability to create Portfolios to efficiently organize and manage multiple projects in one place. Table of Contents What is a Portfolio in Profit.co's PPM module? Why is the Portfolio creation feature important? How do I create a new Portfolio in Profit.co? What is a Portfolio Roadmap and why do I need it? What's the difference between a Portfolio Roadmap and a Portfolio? Best Practices for Creating Portfolios Related Questions Frequently Asked Questions ⚡ Quick AnswerTo create a new portfolio: Navigate to PPM → Portfolios from the left sidebar → click + New Portfolio → enter the portfolio name and details → click “Create.” Once saved, the portfolio appears in your portfolio list and is immediately available for project assignment.To configure visibility: Go to Settings → Portfolio → enable or disable the Portfolio and super user access visibility toggles, or set up a custom access list to restrict visibility to specific employees. What is a Portfolio in Profit.co's PPM module? A Portfolio in Profit.co is a collection of related projects grouped for strategic management and oversight. Portfolios enable organizations to: Key characteristics: Organize multiple related projects in one location Track collective progress toward business objectives Manage shared resources across projects Portfolios sit at a higher level than individual projects, providing a strategic view of how multiple initiatives work together to achieve business goals. Why is the Portfolio creation feature important? The Portfolio creation feature is essential for effective project portfolio management. Here's why this feature matters: Organized Project Management: It helps organize projects into Portfolios for quick access, task prioritization, and improved team collaboration. Strategic Alignment: It combines multiple projects to track progress, manage resources, and ensure they align with business goals. Centralized Visibility: Provides a single view of related projects for better decision-making and resource allocation. How do I create a new Portfolio in Profit.co? Follow these steps to create a new Portfolio: Step 1 Navigate to Portfolios and Projects → Portfolio Roadmaps from the left navigation panel On the Portfolio Roadmaps page, click the + Create Roadmap button On the Create Roadmap side panel: Fill in the Roadmap Name Set the visibility (who can view this roadmap) Click the Create button Step 2 After creating the roadmap, you'll be directed to the Roadmap page: Click the Create Portfolio button to create a new portfolio Alternative: Click the "Add Portfolios" button to include portfolios from the existing roadmap On the Create Portfolio page, fill in the required details: Portfolio name: Descriptive name for your portfolio Template: Choose from available templates if required Date: Set timeline or date parameters Owner: Assign the portfolio owner Status: Set the current status (e.g., Planning, Active, On Hold) Visibility: Define who can access this portfolio Click the Create button The newly created Portfolio will appear on the roadmap overview page. Portfolio project counts and views are now controlled using the Project Level filter, allowing you to switch between portfolio-only projects or include sub-portfolio projects for accurate visibility. Note:Portfolio progress is now calculated based on the average progress of all projects under it. If a portfolio contains sub-portfolios, the progress of their projects is also included in the calculation. Settings Configuration Profit.co includes a dedicated Portfolio settings section where administrators can control visibility and access behavior across the organization. These settings apply globally to all portfolios and govern which users can view portfolio data in the PPM module. Portfolio and Super User Access Visibility Navigate to Settings → Portfolio from the left navigation panel. Locate the Portfolio and Super User Access Visibility settings section. By default, all three visibility toggles are enabled. Administrators can enable or disable individual visibility options based on access requirements. What is a Portfolio Roadmap and why do I need it? A portfolio roadmap is a container that holds one or more portfolios, providing a strategic timeline view of your portfolio initiatives. Purpose of Portfolio Roadmaps: Visualize multiple portfolios on a timeline Show how different portfolios relate to each other Provide executive-level strategic planning views Track portfolio milestones and dependencies Enable scenario planning and strategic alignment You must create a Roadmap before creating Portfolios because the Roadmap provides the organizational structure and timeline context for your portfolios. What's the difference between a Portfolio Roadmap and a Portfolio? Understanding the hierarchy helps with organization: Portfolio Roadmap: Container: Holds multiple portfolios Timeline View: Shows portfolios on a strategic timeline Strategic Level: Executive-level planning and visualization Scope: Organization-wide or major initiative grouping Portfolio: Collection: Groups related projects together Project Management: Manages resources and tracks progress across projects Operational Level: Portfolio manager-level oversight Scope: Specific theme, department, or strategic objective Hierarchy: Organization → Portfolio Roadmap → Portfolio → Projects → Tasks Best Practices for Creating Portfolios To maximize the effectiveness of your Portfolios: Clear Naming Conventions: Use descriptive, consistent names that indicate portfolio purpose Strategic Alignment: Ensure portfolios align with organizational goals and strategies Right-Sized Grouping: Include 5-15 related projects per portfolio (avoid too many or too few) Appropriate Ownership: Assign owners with authority and accountability for portfolio success Logical Organization: Group projects by theme, department, product line, or strategic objective Regular Reviews: Schedule periodic portfolio reviews to assess progress and alignment Documentation: Maintain clear descriptions of portfolio purpose and scope Stakeholder Communication: Set visibility appropriately and communicate with relevant stakeholders Template Usage: Leverage templates for consistency when appropriate Resource Consideration: Ensure portfolio projects can be resourced appropriately Related Questions How to create a Project in the PPM module, Click here Frequently Asked Questions Q1.Can I create a Portfolio without creating a Roadmap first? Based on the current workflow, you need to create a Portfolio Roadmap before creating Portfolios, as the Roadmap provides the organizational structure for your portfolios. Q2.How many Portfolios can I create? There's typically no hard limit on the number of Portfolios you can create. Q3.Can I change Portfolio ownership after creation? Yes, Portfolio ownership can typically be changed after creation through the portfolio settings or edit function Execute your strategy with confidence Connect OKRs, tasks, and teams in one place with Profit.co Start Free Trial | Book a Demo6 min read
- How do I enable the Portfolios and Projects module in Profit.co?Profit.co allows Super Users to enable the Portfolios and Projects (PPM) module through Settings, providing a unified workspace for managing all projects and portfolios efficiently. Table of Contents Why This Feature? What is the purpose of the Portfolios and Projects module? Who can enable or disable this module? How to Enable the Portfolios and Projects Module Best practices for uploading profile pictures in Profit.co Related Questions Frequently Asked Questions Why This Feature? The Portfolios and Projects module in Profit.co offers a comprehensive framework to strategically manage an organization’s diverse projects. By enabling this module, users can: Create, organize, and track projects under multiple portfolios. Gain full visibility into the organization’s project pipeline. Ensure consistent evaluation and informed decision-making across all initiatives. Directly link projects to the company’s overall strategy, ensuring that every project contributes to achieving organizational goals. Note: Only Super Users can enable or disable the Portfolios and Projects module from Settings. What is the purpose of the Portfolios and Projects module? It’s a centralized workspace for managing all organizational projects, helping users define, monitor, and report progress across portfolios. Who can enable or disable this module? Only Super Users have access to enable or disable the module under Settings → General → Apps. How to Enable the Portfolios and Projects Module Follow the steps below to enable the PPM module in Profit.co. Step 1: Navigate to the Apps Section From the left navigation panel, go to Settings → General → Apps. On the Apps page, locate the Portfolios and Projects toggle. Enable the toggle to activate the module. Note: Once enabled, all project-related configuration options become accessible to authorized users. Step 2: Access the Portfolios and Projects Module After enabling the module: The Portfolios and Projects menu will appear in the left navigation panel. You can now create portfolios, manage projects, and configure templates under this section. Best practices Only allow Super Users or Project Admins to modify module-level settings. Regularly review module access permissions to maintain data security. Enable the module organization-wide to streamline project tracking and reporting. Related Questions How to create a project in the PPM module? How to create a project request in the PPM module? Frequently Asked Questions Q1. Can end users enable the Portfolios and Projects module? No. Only Super Users can enable or disable modules from the Settings panel. Q2. Will enabling this module affect other system configurations? No. Enabling the module simply makes the Portfolios and Projects section visible and active. Other modules remain unaffected. Q3. Can I disable the module later? Yes. You can disable it anytime by returning to Settings → General → Apps and switching off the Portfolios and Projects toggle.3 min read
- How does the KR Clone feature work in Profit.co?Profit.co offers the option to clone Key Results (KRs), enabling you to efficiently reuse existing KRs, saving time and ensuring consistency in goal-setting. You can choose to clone only the KR or copy it along with its associated tasks, depending on your specific requirements. Why this feature? The cloning feature allows you to quickly duplicate existing KRs without starting from scratch. You can choose to clone just the Key Result or include associated tasks, providing flexibility to streamline goal replication. This allows you to reuse relevant goals and tasks, saving time and ensuring focus on key objectives without unnecessary duplication. By reusing well-defined KRs, you can ensure consistency in goal-setting across departments or teams, reducing the chances of errors and enhancing alignment with organizational objectives. Note: The cloned KR will not carry over the progress of the original KR. You can clone KRs that are aligned using Bottom-Up Alignment; however, the cloned KR will not retain the original alignment. If a KR is assigned as a sub-KR through Top-Down Alignment, both you and the assigned owner have the ability to clone the KR. When assigning a KR across departments, it will appear on both OKR pages, but only the assigner can clone it, as the assigned user is restricted from cloning it due to cross-departmental access limitations. If the assigned user has access to that particular department (as a member or champion), they will have the ability to clone it. When cloning a Key Result with its associated tasks, only the Key Result itself is duplicated; the associated tasks are not duplicated but shared between the original and the cloned Key Result. If a task is deleted from either the original Key Result or the cloned Key Result, it will be removed from both since they share the same task. Step 1 Navigate to the All OKRs page, and Select the Key Result you wish to Clone. Click on the More icon and select Clone. Step 2 After selecting the Clone option, if you wish to duplicate KR alone, Select Only KR from the side panel. A pop-up tab will appear to notify the OKR Cloned Successfully. Step 3 If you wish to duplicate KR with Task, Select KRs with Task from the side panel. KRs will be cloned along with their tasks and will be displayed on the OKRs List page. When you attempt to delete a Key Result (KR), a pop-up will appear. To delete the KR along with its tasks, click the "Delete with Tasks" button. If you want to delete only the KR, simply click the "Delete" button.3 min read
- How does Profit.co’s custom hierarchy integration with Jira work?Profit.co supports a custom hierarchy type, offering enhanced flexibility and alignment with your business and product strategy. By leveraging the hierarchical structure of linked issues in Jira, you can seamlessly track the execution of Product delivery through a series of OKRs in Profit while gaining comprehensive visibility into the impact of delivery and the value drop (business outcomes). The integration ensures end-to-end visibility, alignment between business and product strategies, and seamless traceability of product execution against business objectives at the sprint level. This feature fosters a deeper understanding and control over your strategic implementations. Task, story, and bug progress in Jira are effortlessly tracked through the OKRs in Profit. Jira Custom Hierarchy Standard Issue Types: These are predefined categories in Jira that track different kinds of work within a project, such as tasks, bugs, stories, and epics. These are universally applicable across various projects and workflows, helping teams classify and manage work consistently. Custom Issue Types: These are tailored to an organization's unique needs. They allow teams to define and manage work that doesn't fit into the standard categories provided by Jira. Creating custom issue types requires administrator permissions and involves setting a specific name, description, and other configurations unique to the tracked work type. Jira Custom Hierarchy OKR Integration Consider defining the below custom issue hierarchy in Jira. This article details how to enable tracking of this setup in Profit using OKRs through the integration. Let’s create an issue named "Initiative" in Jira. Within this issue, there are two child issues: "Feature 1" and "Feature 2". “Feature 1" contains a single child issue, denoted as "Epic 1". Epic 1 comprises one Task, two Stories (Story 1 & Story 2), and one Bug. "Feature 2" includes one child issue, denoted as "Epic 2”. Epic 2 consists of one Task. Note: This feature supports only the default Jira (KPIs): Task %, Task hour %, and Story points %. When an “Initiative” is linked to the Task % KPI with Profit.co, the process begins by creating the Initiative as a key result. Feature 1 and Feature 2 will be created as subkey results under this key result. Epic 1 will be a subkey result within Feature 1, and Epic 2 will be a subkey result within Feature 2. The creation of these epics will align with the Task % KPI selected in Jira. Progress Epic 1 includes: One task marked as "Done" (completed), Two stories (Story 1 & Story 2) marked as "Done" (completed), One bug is currently “In Progress” The progress for Epic 1 is calculated based on the number of completed tasks out of the total tasks: Total tasks in Epic 1 = 4 Number of completed tasks = 3 Progress = (Number of completed tasks/Total tasks) * 100 = (3/4) * 100 = 75% Hence, the total progress of the Epic 1 will be 75%. Epic 2 includes: One task marked as "Done" (completed) The progress for Epic 2 is calculated based on the number of completed tasks out of the total tasks: Total tasks in Epic 2 = 1 Number of completed tasks = 1 Progress = (Number of completed tasks/Total tasks) * 100 = (1/1) * 100 = 100% Hence, the total progress of the Epic 2 will be 100%. Note: When you unlink any associated issue from Jira at any level, it will be deleted from Profit.co. Value Customizable to Fit Organizational Needs: The new custom hierarchy allows organizations to tailor the integration according to their specific Jira issue structure and KPIs. Replicates Product Strategy: Profit.co mirrors the product strategy directly into the key results hierarchy, making it easy to see how each issue in Jira contributes to broader business goals. Teams can work within their familiar Jira structure while ensuring strategic alignment with company-wide objectives. End-to-End Alignment: Profit.co provides a seamless alignment between business strategy and product strategy by automating key results and progress tracking directly from Jira's custom issue hierarchy. Ensures comprehensive visibility, from high-level strategic objectives to detailed progress within each Epic, Task, Story, and Bug. Transparency and Visibility: Offers end-to-end visibility of business and product strategies in a single platform, promoting transparency across the organization. Managers can monitor progress in real-time, enabling swift adjustments to strategy and resource allocation. Effortless Tracking and Reporting: Automates tracking Key Results, Subkey Results, and their progress using Jira KPIs, making reporting effortless and accurate. Managers and teams can visualize progress at every level, ensuring everyone is aligned and moving towards common goals. Important Note: The Jira ticket to Profit.co OKR integration is a one-to-one connection which means each Jira ticket can be associated with only one key result at a time. When enabling custom hierarchy associations at the top-hierarchy level any pre-existing associations at lower levels will be overridden by the latest integration. For Example: If a Jira task is initially linked to Key Result A and later linked to Key Result B, the new link to Key Result B will override the previous link to Key Result A. To learn more about Jira and Profit.co Integration, click here5 min read
- How does the Automate Ratings work for Goals in Profit.co?Profit.co provides an option to automatically update ratings for goals based on their progress. Why this Feature? The automate ratings feature in Profit.co adds significant value by simplifying and enhancing the performance review process. It automatically updates ratings based on the actual progress of goals, according to predefined cut-off percentages. This feature ensures that ratings are accurate, objective, and free from manual errors, leading to more transparent and data-driven assessments of employee performance. Step 1 Navigate to Settings → Performance → Reviews from the left navigation panel and switch to the Review Template tab. choose your preferred template, and click the Edit icon. On the Edit Review Template page, go to the Review Process tab and modify the assessment options to enable automated ratings. Note: Only Super Users can enable automate ratings. You can set automate ratings for the assessments Self, Manager, Peer, and Matrix Manager. Step 2 Let’s click the Self Assessment Edit icon. On the Self Assessment Options side panel, Enable the toggle for Goals and click on the option “Automate Ratings”. On the Automate Ratings popup, enable automate ratings, add new ratings, and edit the cut off percentage for the existing ratings. After making the changes, click on Update. Ratings will be calculated based on the goal cut-off percentage during the assessment. Related Answer Post: To learn about the process of initiating a new performance review, click here.2 min read
- What is KPI Summary?In Profit.co, KPI Summary is a centralized dashboard that provides a visual overview of your Key Performance Indicators (KPIs) and Key Results, enabling you to track performance metrics against organizational goals efficiently. Table of Contents What is KPI Summary in Profit.co? Why should I use KPI Summary? How do I access the KPI Summary in Profit.co? What can I view in the KPI Summary? How do I switch between KPIs and Key Results in KPI Summary? What filtering options are available in KPI Summary? How do I create a new KPI Board? Best practices for using KPI Summary in Profit.co Related Questions Frequently Asked Questions What is KPI Summary in Profit.co? The KPI Summary is a visual performance tracking tool in Profit.co that displays Key Performance Indicators (KPIs) and Key Results in a consolidated view. It allows you to monitor actual metrics against organizational goals and targets across different organizational levels. Why should I use KPI Summary? KPI Summary provides several benefits for performance tracking and monitoring: Benefit Description Visual Performance Tracking Offers a straightforward way to compare actual metrics with organizational goals Simplified Data Presentation Makes complex performance data easy to understand at a glances Trend Identification Helps identify patterns and trends in performance over time Data Distribution Visualization Displays data with clarity and precision across organizational levels Centralized Monitoring Consolidates KPIs and Key Results in one accessible location How do I access the KPI Summary in Profit.co? Follow these steps to navigate to the KPI Summary: Step 1 Click on OKRs from the left navigation panel. Click on KPI Summary from the OKRs menu. You will now see the KPI Summary dashboard displaying your performance metrics. What can I view in the KPI Summary? The KPI Summary displays performance metrics at any selected organizational level: Organizational Level Description Corporate View company-wide KPIs and Key Results Department Monitor department-specific performance metrics Employee Track individual employee KPIs and Key Results You can select your preferred level using the filter options in the KPI Summary dashboard. How do I switch between KPIs and Key Results in KPI Summary? The KPI Summary provides two tabs to organize your performance metrics: KPIs Displays all Key Performance Indicators at the selected organizational level. Shows KPI performance data, trends, and progress toward targets. Key Results Displays Key Results linked to objectives at the selected level. Shows Key Result progress, status, and performance metrics. To switch between tabs, simply click on the KPIs tab or Key Results tab at the top of the KPI Summary dashboard. What filtering options are available in KPI Summary? KPI Summary provides flexible filtering to customize your view: Filter by organizational level (Corporate, Department, Employee) Select specific time periods for performance tracking Choose which KPI Boards to display How do I create a new KPI Board? KPI Boards allow you to group related KPIs for focused tracking. Follow these steps to create a new board: Step 1 In the KPI Summary, locate the Board dropdown menu. Click on + Create Board. Enter a Name for the KPI Board. Select the associated KPIs you want to include in this board. Click Create to save your new KPI Board. Your new KPI Board will now appear in the Board dropdown menu and display the selected KPIs. All users except read-only users can now create KPI Boards directly from the KPI Summary section; super user access is no longer required. The created board will automatically reflect in Settings. The user who creates the board becomes its owner. Only the creator can edit or delete that board. Note: This information can be viewed in both Chart and Table formats. You can also use Presentation mode and export the data as CSV or PDF files. Best practices for using KPI Summary in Profit.co Create multiple KPI Boards to organize metrics by theme, department, or strategic priority, making navigation easier. Use descriptive names for KPI Boards that clearly indicate their purpose or the metrics they contain. Regularly review both KPIs and Key Results tabs to maintain a comprehensive view of performance. Apply filters strategically to focus on specific organizational levels or time periods during review meetings. Enable only the KPI Boards most relevant to your current priorities to avoid information overload. Update KPI Boards periodically to reflect changing strategic priorities and performance metrics. Related Questions To learn more about how to create or edit a new KPI in Profit.co, Click here Frequently Asked Questions Q1. What is the difference between the KPIs tab and Key Results tab in KPI Summary? The KPIs tab displays standalone Key Performance Indicators, while the Key Results tab shows Key Results that are linked to specific objectives in your OKR structure. Q2. How many KPIs can I add to a single KPI Board? There is no strict limit on the number of KPIs you can add to a board, but it's recommended to keep boards focused with a manageable number of related metrics for optimal clarity. Q3. What happens to my KPI Boards if I disable them? Disabled KPI Boards are hidden from view but not deleted. You can re-enable them at any time, and all associated KPIs and configurations will remain intact.5 min read
- How to create a Strategy Roadmap in the Banking Industry?In the below guide, we’ll explore how strategic roadmaps can be applied to the Banking Industry to enhance financial services by improving customer experience, optimizing operations, and embracing digital transformation. This example will guide you through the process of breaking down strategic goals into actionable initiatives, ensuring alignment with business objectives, and tracking progress for successful execution. Company Objective: ABC Bank aims to enhance its financial services by improving customer experience, optimizing operational efficiency, and expanding digital offerings within the next 12 months. This guide outlines the strategic roadmap for achieving these goals. Define the Strategy roadmap: ABC Bank is preparing to enhance its financial services, and here is our roadmap for achieving this goal. To create strategy roadmaps Navigate to Strategy Roadmaps from the left navigation panel and Click on the + Create Roadmap button. In the Create Roadmap side panel, name your Roadmap and choose its visibility. Then, click the Create button to proceed. Define the Strategy Themes: ABC Inc. starts by identifying the major themes that will guide its expansion efforts. These themes will break down the overarching goal into manageable segments. Once the roadmap is created, click the + Create Theme button to initiate a new theme. In the Create Theme side panel, enter the Theme name and click the Create button. Break Down Themes into Sub-Themes: Under each strategy theme, specific sub-themes are identified that correspond to the key steps required for successful execution. To create a subtheme, hover over the theme you’ve created and click the + Create Subtheme option. Enter the subtheme name and once done click Enter. To edit a subtheme, click on its name, make your changes, and then click Update. Develop Initiatives: Each sub-theme is broken down into actionable initiatives, with owners assigned to each task. To create an Initiative, hover over the subtheme you’ve created and click the + Create Initiative option. On the Create Initiate side panel, enter the Initiative Name, fill in the required details, and click the Create button. The newly created Initiative will appear on the Roadmap Overview page. Assign OKRs to Initiatives: OKRs (Objectives and Key Results) are linked to each initiative to ensure progress is measurable and tied to business outcomes. To link OKRs with initiative, select your preferred initiative and then click on the Associate Objectives button on the initiative overview page. On the Associate Objectives page, select the objective and click the Add button. The associated OKRs will appear on the initiative overview page. Outcome: After implementing this roadmap, ABC Bank successfully enhances customer experience, achieves significant operational efficiencies, and expands its digital offerings.3 min read
- What is a Strategy Roadmap?Strategy Roadmaps in General Strategy roadmaps are essential planning tools that help organizations align their long-term business goals with actionable initiatives. By visually representing objectives, timelines, and key deliverables, these roadmaps enable teams to prioritize tasks, allocate resources efficiently, and track progress. Whether managing product development, internal projects, or organizational growth strategies, strategy roadmaps provide clarity on how various initiatives contribute to overall business objectives. In Profit.co, the Strategy Roadmaps feature provides a comprehensive way to plan and visualize themes, sub-themes, and initiatives, ensuring that your projects are aligned with your business strategy. The tool helps organizations track progress, make data-driven decisions, and prioritize actions that lead to greater success. Why Use Strategy Roadmaps in Profit.co? Holistic View of Strategy: Strategy roadmaps in Profit.co offer a high-level perspective of how different themes, sub-themes, and initiatives align with company objectives. This helps ensure that every project contributes meaningfully to the overall strategy. Effective Decision-Making: By visualizing initiatives and their progress, organizations can make informed decisions about which projects to prioritize and how to allocate resources. Trackable Progress: The feature allows businesses to continuously monitor their strategy initiatives, ensuring that they stay on track with business goals. Here you can view the Strategy roadmaps in detail For example: Company Objective: XYZ Inc., a consumer electronics company, plans to expand into a new international market (e.g., Southeast Asia) by launching a flagship product within 12 months. This example outlines the strategy roadmap to achieve this expansion goal successfully. Define the Strategy Roadmaps: XYZ Inc. is preparing to Expand into a New International Market, and here is our expansion roadmap. To create strategy roadmaps Navigate to Strategy Roadmaps from the left navigation panel and Click on the + Create Roadmap button. In the Create Roadmap side panel, name your Roadmap and choose its visibility. Then, click the Create button to proceed. Define the Strategy Themes: XYZ Inc. starts by identifying the major themes that will guide its expansion efforts. These themes will break down the overarching goal into manageable segments. Once the roadmap is created, click the Create Theme button to initiate a new theme. In the Create Theme side panel, enter the Theme name and click the Create button. Break Down Themes into Sub-Themes: Under each strategy theme, specific sub-themes are identified that correspond to the key steps required for successful execution. To create a subtheme, hover over the theme you’ve created and click the + Create Subtheme option. Enter the subtheme name and once done click Enter. To edit a subtheme, click on its name, make your changes, and then click Update. Develop Initiatives: Each sub-theme is broken down into actionable initiatives, with owners assigned to each task. To create an Initiative, hover over the subtheme you’ve created and click the + Create Initiative option. On the Create Initiate side panel, enter the Initiative Name, fill in the required details, and click the Create button. The newly created Initiative will appear on the Roadmap Overview page. Assign OKRs to Initiatives: OKRs (Objectives and Key Results) are linked to each initiative to ensure progress is measurable and tied to business outcomes. To link OKRs with initiative, select your preferred initiative and then click on the Associate Objectives button on the initiative overview page. On the Associate Objectives page, select the objective and click the Add button. The associated OKRs will appear on the initiative overview page. The End Outcome: After implementing this roadmap, XYZ Inc. successfully completes the product launch, secures regulatory approval, and rolls out a marketing campaign in Q3, leading to a 30% increase in brand awareness and capturing a 5% market share in the target region within 12 months. By using this structured approach, the company maximizes efficiency, ensures that all departments are aligned with the overall strategy, and adapts to challenges as they arise. Related Answer Post How do you create a Strategy Roadmap in the Banking Industry, click here. To learn more about enabling the Strategy Roadmap, click here.4 min read
- What are the various roles available for users in Profit.co?Profit.co provides a structured role framework that controls what each user can see, create, and manage across the platform. Roles are assigned by a Super User and can be configured at both a global level and per-module to match each person's responsibilities precisely. Table of Contents What Are User Roles in Profit.co? Why User Role Management Matters Global Roles Overview App-Specific Roles Overview How to Assign a Role to a User Best Practices for User Role Management Related Questions Frequently Asked Questions ⚡ Quick Answer Profit.co roles fall into two categories: Global Roles (platform-wide) and App-Specific Roles (module-level). There are 6 global roles: Super User, Profit Manager, Profit User, User Management Admin, Department Access Only, and Profit Read Only. App-specific roles control access within individual modules — OKRs, Strategy Roadmap, Balanced Scorecard, Tasks, PPM, PMS, Rewards, Survey, Meetings, and Notes. Only a Super User can assign roles. Each user can hold one global role and multiple app-specific roles simultaneously. App-specific privilege levels are: Manage (full module oversight), Access (own department only), and View (read-only). What Are User Roles in Profit.co? User roles in Profit.co define the scope of access and action available to each individual within the platform. Roles fall into two categories: Global Roles, which apply across the entire system, and App-Specific Roles, which are scoped to individual modules such as OKRs, Balanced Scorecard, or PPM. Only a Super User can add new employees and assign roles to users. Each user can hold multiple roles simultaneously, including a global role combined with one or more app-specific roles to precisely match their responsibilities. Note: By default, the account creator is automatically assigned Super User access upon signing up in Profit.co. Why User Role Management Matters Assigning the right role to each user eliminates access sprawl — ensuring individuals interact only with the modules and data relevant to their work. This reduces the risk of accidental edits, maintains data integrity, and keeps each team member focused on their specific goals. Clearly defined roles also create accountability. When permissions are tied to responsibilities, managers can monitor progress with confidence that data reflects actual team activity — not inadvertent changes from users with unconstrained access. Global Roles Overview Global roles govern a user's baseline access across the entire Profit.co platform. The table below summarizes each role, its access level, and intended use. Global Role Access Level Description Super User Full system access Users with complete access to all modules and settings, need to be part of specific programs to access certain functions. Profit Manager View, create, edit + custom permissions Managers assigned to this role are provided with view, create, and edit access, along with customized permissions for reports and selected settings options. Profit User View, create, edit (no settings) Users are granted view, create, and edit access, but they are restricted from modifying any settings. User Management Admin User Management settings only Users with this role can manage all user accounts, roles, and organizational structures. Access is limited to User Management settings only. Department Access Only Department-scoped view Users with this role can only view and interact with OKRs related to their specific department. Profit Read Only View only Users in this role are granted view-only access to the application. ☐ Configuring Export Privileges for the Profit Manager Role Navigate to Roles → Profit Manager role and edit the role. Configure export privileges such as: Export CSV Export PDF Export PPT Enable or disable permissions based on your organization's requirements. App-Specific Roles Overview App-specific roles provide granular, module-level control beyond the global role baseline. Each module supports up to three privilege levels: Manage (full oversight), Access (department or assigned scope), and View (read-only). Privilege Matrix Execute your strategy with confidence Connect OKRs, tasks, and teams in one place with Profit.co Start Free Trial | Book a Demo App Specific Roles Manage Access View OKR Admin ☑ ☑ ☑ OKR Captain ☑ ☑ ☑ OKR User - ☑ ☑ Strategy Roadmap Admin ☑ ☑ ☑ Strategy Roadmap Read Only - - ☑ Strategy Roadmap User - ☑ ☑ Balanced Scorecard Admin ☑ ☑ ☑ Balanced Scorecard Read Only - - ☑ Balanced Scorecard User - ☑ ☑ Task User ☑ ☑ ☑ PPM Admin ☑ ☑ ☑ PPM User - ☑ ☑ PPM Read Only - - ☑ PMS Admin ☑ ☑ ☑ PMS User - ☑ ☑ Rewards Admin ☑ ☑ ☑ Rewards User - ☑ ☑ Survey Admin ☑ ☑ ☑ Survey User - ☑ ☑ Meetings User - ☑ ☑ Notes User - ☑ ☑ Role Descriptions by Module The table below outlines each app-specific role's capabilities and the recommended personas for each assignment. OKRs App-specific Role Description & Recommended For OKR Admin Users assigned this role can create, view, and manage OKRs and have the ability to create KPIs, enabling comprehensive oversight and control of organizational performance metrics.Recommended for: Chief Executive Officers (CEOs), Chief Operating Officers (COOs). OKR Captain Users with this role can create, view, and manage Corporate OKRs, while also having full access to the cockpit for monitoring overall progress and alignment across the organization.Recommended for: Strategy Leaders, Department Heads, and Program Managers. OKR User Users assigned this role can create, view, and manage their own OKRs independently, with full control over their objectives and key results.Recommended for: Managers and Team Leaders responsible for setting team goals. Strategy Roadmap Strategy Roadmap Admin Users with this role can create, view, and manage all strategy roadmaps with full control over strategic plans, allowing for efficient tracking and management.Recommended for: Executive Leadership (CEO, CFO, CTO). Strategy Roadmap Read Only This role enables users to view strategy roadmaps and expand or collapse them for easier navigation and better visibility.Recommended for: Board Members. Strategy Roadmap User Users in this role can modify their designated strategy roadmaps and manage them to ensure alignment with strategic objectives.Recommended for: Department Heads. Balanced Scorecard Balanced Scorecard Admin Users with this role can create, view, and manage all scorecards across every department, providing comprehensive oversight and control.Recommended for: Executive Leadership. Balanced Scorecard Read Only This role enables users to view the Balanced Scorecard with the ability to expand and collapse sections for easier navigation.Recommended for: Board Members. Balanced Scorecard User Users holding this role can create, view, and manage their department's scorecards exclusively; other departments are view-only.Recommended for: Department Heads. Task Task User Users in this role have exclusive access to the Task module, ensuring focused task management and productivity.Recommended for: Individual Contributors, Team Members, Project Coordinators, Task Owners, Contractors. Portfolios & Projects PPM Admin Users in this role can create, view, and manage portfolios, roadmaps, projects, and tasks, with access to the cockpit for comprehensive oversight.Recommended for: PMO Director, Chief Operating Officer. PPM User Users in this role can access only their assigned portfolios, roadmaps, projects, and tasks, ensuring focused project management.Recommended for: Project Managers, Program Managers. PPM Read Only Users have view-only access to portfolios, cockpit dashboards, and projects they are members of or have been granted access to.Recommended for: Executive Stakeholders, Auditors, External Reviewers. Performance Management PMS Admin Users in this role can initiate reviews, set goals, and propose development plans for employees, supporting a culture of continuous improvement.Recommended for: HR and HRBP. PMS User Users in this role can submit reviews, advance goals, and progress development plans, contributing to personal and organizational growth.Recommended for: Employees, Team Leads, Supervisors. Recognition Rewards Admin This role enables users to give and receive rewards while managing the full rewards program, incentivizing high performance across the organization.Recommended for: HR, Compensation and Benefits Manager, Executive Leadership. Rewards User This role enables users to give and receive rewards, promoting a culture of recognition and motivating individuals to contribute to team success.Recommended for: Employees, Team Leads, Managers, Department Heads. Survey Survey Admin Users in this role can submit surveys and initiate new ones, enabling efficient data collection and targeted feedback.Recommended for: HR Manager, Training and Development Manager, Employee Engagement Manager. Survey User Users in this role can submit surveys, contributing valuable feedback and insights for data-driven improvements.Recommended for: Employees, Team Members, Customers, Vendors, Partners. Meetings Meetings User Users in this role can create, view, and manage their meetings, ensuring efficient scheduling and personal accountability.Recommended for: Employees, Team Leaders, Project Managers, Department Heads, Executives. Notes Notes User Users in this role can create, view, and manage their notes, ensuring personalized organization and productivity.Recommended for: Employees, Team Leaders, Project Managers, Department Heads, Executives. How to Assign a Role to a User Note: Only a Super User can assign roles to other users in Profit.co. Step 1 Go to Settings from the left navigation panel. Select User Management to open the Active Users page. Locate the employee you want to assign a role to. Click the Edit icon next to their name to open their user profile. Step 2 In the user profile, navigate to the Access Information tab. Click the + Add Role button. Choose the required role from the list and click Add. Note: You can also create Add-on Roles to provide access or privileges limited to a specific feature only. Best Practices for User Role Management Assign the most restrictive global role that still allows the user to complete their work — escalate only when needed. Use app-specific roles to extend module access without elevating a user's global permissions across the entire platform. Reserve Super User access for a small group of administrators; avoid assigning it broadly as a convenience measure. Related Questions Click here to learn more about How to Create a New User in Profit.co Frequently Asked Questions Q1. Can a user hold both a global role and multiple app-specific roles at the same time? Yes. A user can carry one global role alongside multiple app-specific roles. For example, a department head may hold the Profit Manager global role with OKR Captain and Balanced Scorecard User for their specific modules — each role stacks without conflict. Q2. What are Add-on Roles and when should they be used? Add-on Roles provide access to a specific feature without modifying a user's global or app-specific role configuration. They are suited for temporary or cross-functional access needs — when a user needs limited privileges in a module outside their primary scope. Q3. Can a Profit Read Only user create or edit OKRs or Tasks? No. The Profit Read Only global role is strictly observational. Users assigned this role can view and analyze OKRs, Tasks, and KPIs across the organization but cannot create, edit, or delete any records. Execute your strategy with confidence Connect OKRs, tasks, and teams in one place with Profit.co Start Free Trial | Book a Demo9 min read
- How to conduct OKR Reviews using the Progress, Plan, and Problems (PPP) approach?Profit.co provides an option to review the overall check-ins that you have made in the OKRs using the PPP approach. Why this feature? Check-ins are integral to the OKR methodology. You have to check in at regular intervals to keep the momentum going and march to the drumbeat to achieve the desired outcomes. As part of your check-in, Profit.co allows you to review your OKRs using the OKR Reviews feature. The PPP (Plan, Progress, Problem) methodology in OKR reviews fosters clear communication of goals, transparent tracking of progress, and timely identification of obstacles. Step 1 Navigate to OKRs → All OKRs from the left navigation panel and select the desired Department for which you want to add Reviews. Click on the More Options icon and select the Reviews option. Click on the Create Review button to create a new review. Note: You can also write a review with the AI (OKR Review Summarizer). The OKR Review Summarizer automatically generates progress updates for Monthly Business Reviews (MBRs) based on the check-ins made to the OKRs. This feature ensures that all relevant information is compiled and presented efficiently, providing a clear overview of progress. Fill in the Plan, Progress, and Problems section to complete your OKR review. Add the Reviewers to review this OKR review. Finally, click Submit. Note: OKR reviews can be conducted specifically for particular objectives as well. Furthermore, you have the flexibility to view the reviews in Full-Screen mode and view the comprehensive progress of your department. Step 2 The reviewer can access the OKR Review through the Notifications. The reviewers can add comments after reviewing it. Related Answer Post To learn more about PPP methodology, click here.2 min read
- How to add attachments in Goals?Profit.co provides an option to add documents and links as attachments in Goals. Why this feature? While editing/updating existing goals you can attach documents that provide evidence or records related to the tasks you work on. Users can attach a collection of files, documents, and links. Step 1 Navigate to Performance → Goals from the left navigation panel and switch to the My Goals tab. Step 2 On My Goals page, select the Goal you want to attach documents. On the goals overview page, switch to the Documents tab. Click on the Add icon, and select From Computer or Add Link from the dropdown, to attach documents. A pop-up window will appear, select the document you want to attach and click on Open. You will get an Attachment (s) added! pop-up once the attachment uploads. The selected file will be added to your list of Documents. Related Answer Post To learn more about how to attach documents as part of my OKR check-ins, click here.1 min read
- How to enable weekly action notifications at end user level?Profit.co provides an option to enable weekly action notifications at end user level. Why this feature? This feature helps users to stay informed about their progress on a weekly basis, summarizing completed tasks, pending check-ins, and upcoming activities. It is a regular touchpoint to ensure users are aligned with their goals and deadlines. Additionally, users can opt out of these notifications if they prefer. Step 1 Navigate to Preference from the left navigation panel and switch to the General tab. On the General page, under the Action Center option, Enable the Subscribe to weekly action alerts toggle. After enabling the toggle the user will receive an email with the Sub: Your Weekly Work Plan By Clicking on the View More button, the user will be redirected to the Action Center page of the application to take the required actions. Note: If you don't want to be reminded about your progress in the Profit.co account you can disable the toggle for the option “Subscribe to weekly action alerts”. To unsubscribe from the weekly action alerts, follow these steps: Step 1 Click the 'Unsubscribe' link in your weekly action email. After that, you will be directed to an option to unsubscribe. Simply click the 'Unsubscribe' button. A confirmation message will appear, indicating that you have successfully unsubscribed.2 min read
- How to create goals in Profit.co?Profit.co provides an option to create Goals under the Performance management module. Why this feature? Setting professional development goals is an important part of growing as an individual or professional, regardless of what your career or job is. Setting goals boosts employee performance, alignment, and engagement. Step 1 Navigate to Settings → General → Apps from the left navigation panel. Enable the Goals option. Note: Profit.co allows you to set a Goal Creation Limit for individuals on a quarterly or annual basis. This feature helps prevent over-commitment by defining the maximum number of goals an individual can create, ensuring more effective goal management. This setting can be configured in the system settings. After enabling Goals navigate to Performance → Goals from the left navigation panel. Click on the + Create New Goal button to create a new goal. Step 2 On the Create Goal side panel, Enter the Goal name, set the required field, and finally click Create. Note: If you have multiple goals you can set weightage before creating it. You can also clone your goals, by clicking on the More option and select Clone from the dropdown. Note:Now you can assign a goal to multiple employees using the Bulk Assign option. Note: You can now view your goals in the Bowler Chart view. Related Answer Post To know about Goal Authoring Status, click here.2 min read
- How do I fill up a self-assessment review form?Self-assessment is an opportunity for all employees to showcase their achievements, strengths, weaknesses, and strategies for the next quarter. Once the HR Administrator has initiated an employee performance review, every user can do their self-assessment under My Reviews in Profit.co Why this feature? The self-assessment is the first step of the review process. This important step will give users insights into their own strengths and weaknesses. This will help employees to get prepared before the management and peers begin their assessment of them. Step 1 Navigate to Performance → Reviews from the left navigation panel. On the Reviews page, you will find the reviews you want to perform assessments on. Select the required review for which you want to perform the self-assessment. Note: You can also perform the self-assessment through the Actions. Step 2 Click on the review and you can perform the self-assessment. Add Peers to evaluate your performance Step 3 You can create and check in OKRs & Goals directly from the review page during Self Assessment. Step 4 Provide Ratings and click on the Comments option to add your comments. Step 5 You can perform check-ins for your Key Results if needed before providing ratings for your OKRs. After performing the assessment, click on Submit. Finally, in the confirmation popup message, click Submit. Note: Users can now add external reviewers during their self-assessment without requiring manager or HR approval. Related Answer Post To know more about How to fill out a Peer assessment, click here.2 min read
- How to set up a new department and department head?Profit.co allows you to create departments that are present in your organization.. Why this feature? By using this feature you can create departments and can also edit the predefined departments as per your need. Establishing a department is the most important part of distributing goals at all OKR levels. In order to work towards the goal as an organization. Note: Only super users have access to create/ edit departments. Also, you need to have employees created ahead of time before you assign the department head and the department members. Step 1 Navigate to Settings→ User Management from the left navigation panel. Switch to the Departments tab and Click on the + Create Department button to create a new department. Step 2 In the Create Department page, enter all the required details like Department name, Department Head, OKR champions, HR Business Partner, etc., You can also add Performance competencies for the department and the people who are in the department and who have those Performance competencies. You can also customize the Department logo & upload images for a logo. Once done, click Create. How to add KPIs at the department level? To add the KPIs, click on the +Add button. Choose the required KPIs and click Add. Note: The added KPIs for a particular department will be visible while adding KPIs to your key results. Step 3 You can also create sub-departments for your departments. The menu appears when you mouse hover over a department. Click on Add a Sub-department. You will be directed to the Create Department page, and enter all the required details. Once done, click Create to create a new sub-department. Note: Your manager has the authority to review and perform check-in for the Key Result that has been assigned to you by another department. Related Answer Post To learn more on how to add a new employee in Profit.co, click here2 min read
- What is the difference between the check-in comments and notes in Goals?Check-in Comments and Notes play unique roles in managing and documenting goal progress within the platform, each serving distinct purposes and functionalities. Goals Check-in with Check-in Comments Check-in Comments are integral to the Goals Check-in process. Users utilize these comments to capture the status of their goal progress, providing detailed updates on accomplishments and developments toward achieving their goals. This feature allows users to update their status, include relevant comments, and express their confidence level in accomplishing their goals. The check-in process can be enhanced with AI, assisting users in drafting their comments. These updates are visible to stakeholders with access to the specific goal, ensuring clear communication and tracking of progress. Notes in Goals The Notes feature provides a versatile space for users to add additional information related to their goals. Users can document instructions, comments, target dates, review dates, and more, offering a comprehensive view of all aspects related to the goals. This feature is particularly useful for scheduling and planning, helping employees to better execute their goals by having all the necessary information at their fingertips. Notes can also include flexible content such as text, images, and links, similar to Check-in Comments, allowing for rich, detailed documentation. In summary, while Check-in Comments are focused on capturing the status of goal progress and providing specific updates, Notes serve as a general area for additional information and updates that support goal execution but are not directly tied to immediate progress. Both features allow for flexible content, including text, images, and links, but they cater to different aspects of goal management within the platform. Related Answer Post To learn more about how to add Notes to Goals, click here To learn more about how to check the history of progress in Goals, click here2 min read
- How to set Custom attributes for Departments?Profit.co provides an option to set custom attributes while creating/editing Departments. Why this feature? By setting the custom attributes you can manage fields in the master layout and decide which attributes you want to have if you create a new or edit an existing Department. Note: Only Super Users have access to add custom fields. Step 1 Navigate to Settings → User Management from the left navigation panel. On the User Management Page, switch to the Departments tab. Under Departments click on the Master Layout icon to manage fields. Step 2 You can insert the Sections & Attributes from the list of layouts. You can insert the Attribute by dragging it inside the section and then click Save. Then, click on the Input box and then type the Name in the Inspector section. Finally, click on the Save button. Note: Now, when you create a new department or edit the existing department, the section you have created using the Master Layout will be reflected. Note: Adding the Search attribute to the master layout enables a convenient selection of employees, offering the flexibility to choose between single or multi-select options. Related Answer Post To learn more about setting custom attributes for goals. click here2 min read
- How do we add Competencies?Competencies are measurable skills or abilities that an individual needs to perform their job roles successfully in an organization. These competencies are measured through rated scores. For example: Team Player A person who plays or works well as a member of a team. Technical Skills Technical skills are the abilities and knowledge needed to perform specific tasks. Leadership Ability Skills and abilities individuals demonstrate to help and steer their employees toward the achievement of shared goals in an organization. Why this feature? In Profit.co, the competencies are measurable skills or abilities that help in monitoring the performance of employees. Based on their competencies, the employees are given scores that reflect their overall performance in the organization. To create competencies: Step 1 Navigate to Settings → Performance → Reviews from the left navigation panel and click on the competencies tab and click on Add a new Competency button. Step 2 In the Create Competency side panel, enter the Competency Name, Group Name, and Description. You can also enable the toggles for Who can Rate the competency ratings of employees in Performance Reviews. Step 3 You can enable or disable the Competency Rating toggle to choose whether to include a rating option for this particular competency. Once a competency is disabled, the slider bar will no longer be visible, allowing you to leave comments only for that particular competency. Note: You can now easily rearrange the order of competencies by dragging and dropping them in the settings, and the updated sequence will automatically reflect in reviews. Related Answer Post To learn more about How to define weights at the competency group level, click here.2 min read
- How to assign tasks to others through Mobile Applications?Profit.co empowers users to create and assign tasks to team members directly through the mobile application. Table of Contents What is the Assign Tasks to Others Feature? Why Use the Assign Tasks to Others Feature? How to Assign Tasks to Others Using Mobile Application Best Practices for Assigning Tasks to Others Related Answer Posts Frequently Asked Questions What is the Assign Tasks to Others Feature? The Assign Tasks to Others feature allows users to create new tasks and delegate them to specific employees or team members using the mobile application. This functionality includes setting task details such as descriptions, due dates, priorities, and ownership assignment. Users can also track assigned tasks through the "My Tasks for Others" view, providing visibility into delegated work and enabling effective follow-up on task completion. Why Use the Assign Tasks to Others Feature? Mobile Accessibility: Mobile phones have become indispensable business tools, enabling work management anytime, anywhere Efficient Delegation: Allows managers to assign work immediately after meetings, calls, or when ideas emerge, without waiting for desktop access Progress Tracking: Provides visibility into tasks assigned to others, helping managers monitor workload distribution and completion rates Enhanced Accountability: Creates clear ownership and expectations by formally assigning tasks with deadlines and priorities How to Assign Tasks to Others Using Mobile Application Open the Profit.co mobile application and navigate to Menu from the left navigation panel. Select Tasks and then choose My Tasks. On the My Tasks page, tap on the + icon to create a new task. Fill in the task details: Task Name: Enter a clear, descriptive title for the task Description: (Optional) Add details about what needs to be accomplished Due Date: Set the deadline for task completion Priority: (Optional) Mark the task as High, Medium, or Low priority In the task creation form, locate and tap on the Owner field. Select the employee you want to assign this task to from the list of available users. Review all task details and tap Create to complete the assignment process. The assigned employee will receive a notification about the new task. Note: To view tasks you've assigned to others: From the Tasks page, tap the dropdown menu at the top Select "My Tasks for Others" Choose the employee to whom you have assigned tasks View all tasks assigned to that selected user Best Practices for Assigning Tasks to Others Be Specific and Clear: Write task names and descriptions that leave no ambiguity about what needs to be done Set Realistic Deadlines: Consider the assignee's current workload and other commitments when setting due dates Assign to the Right Person: Match tasks with team members who have the appropriate skills, knowledge, and capacity Provide Sufficient Context: Explain why the task matters, how it fits into larger goals, and what success looks like Set Appropriate Priorities: Use priority levels consistently to help assignees organize their work effectively Related Answer Posts How to create new Workspace and Boards for Tasks through a mobile application, Click Here Frequently Asked Questions Q1. Can I assign a task to multiple people at once? Typically, tasks have a single owner for clear accountability. However, you can add collaborators or create separate tasks for each team member if work needs to be distributed.. Q2. Will the assigned person receive a notification when I create the task?div> Yes, the assignee receives a notification on their mobile device and/or email (depending on notification settings) when a task is assigned to them. Q3. What happens if I accidentally assign a task to the wrong person? You can edit the task and change the owner to reassign it to the correct person. Both the original and new assignees will receive notifications.4 min read
- How to perform self-assessment through Profit.co mobile application?Profit.co enables employees to complete their self-assessments directly through the mobile application, providing flexibility and convenience in the performance review process. Table of Contents What is the Self-Assessment Feature? Why Use the Self-Assessment Feature? How to Perform Self-Assessment Using a Mobile Application Best Practices for Mobile Self-Assessment Related Answer Posts Frequently Asked Questions What is the Self-Assessment Feature? The Self-Assessment feature allows employees to evaluate their own performance, accomplishments, and development areas using their mobile devices. This functionality provides a structured framework for employees to document their achievements, assess their competencies against set criteria, rate their performance on assigned OKRs and goals, and provide narrative feedback about their contributions and growth. The mobile self-assessment includes all the capabilities of the desktop version, ensuring employees can complete thorough evaluations without being constrained by location or device availability. Why Use the Self-Assessment Feature? Employee Empowerment: Self-assessment allows employees to showcase their achievements, highlight their strengths, and acknowledge areas for improvement Mobility and Flexibility: Employees can conduct assessments while traveling, working remotely, or during non-traditional work hours, removing the requirement for physical office presence Thoughtful Reflection: Mobile access allows employees to complete assessments in comfortable settings where they can think deeply about their performance Time Efficiency: Enables employees to work on assessments in segments during downtime, commutes, or whenever convenient Enhanced Preparation: Provides a platform for employees to prepare strategies and goals for upcoming quarters or review periods How to Perform Self-Assessment Using a Mobile Application Method 1: Using Home Page Notification Open the Profit.co mobile application on your device. Navigate to the Home page from the bottom menu bar. Look for the notification regarding pending self-assessment on your Home page. This will appear in the Actions section under "Pending." Tap on the View button next to the self-assessment notification. You will be automatically directed to the assessment page for the specific review cycle. Complete the self-assessment by: Rating your performance on assigned competencies or criteria Providing written feedback on your achievements and contributions Evaluating your progress on OKRs and Key Results Documenting challenges faced and lessons learned Setting goals and development areas for the next period Review all your responses to ensure completeness and accuracy. Tap Submit to finalize and send your self-assessment. Method 2: Using Performance Menu Open the Profit.co mobile application on your device. Navigate to the Performance → Review from the left navigation menu. Select the required review and perform the Self-Assessment. Best Practices for Mobile Self-Assessment Start Early: Begin your assessment well before the deadline to allow time for thoughtful reflection and multiple review sessions Be Honest and Balanced: Provide accurate self-ratings that acknowledge both strengths and areas for improvement Provide Specific Examples: Support your ratings and claims with concrete examples, metrics, and outcomes Align with Goals: Reference your OKRs and Key Results to demonstrate goal-oriented performance Focus on Impact: Emphasize the results and value of your work, not just activities completed Related Answer Posts How to Create Objectives and Key Results Using the Mobile Application, Click Here Frequently Asked Questions Q1. How long do I have to complete my self-assessment? The deadline is set by your organization and typically displayed in the review notification. It's best to complete it well before the due date to ensure thoughtful responses. Q2. What happens after I submit my self-assessment? Your self-assessment becomes visible to your manager and others involved in the review process (based on your organization's workflow). It serves as input for performance discussions. Q3. Can I edit my self-assessment after submitting it? Typically, once submitted, self-assessments cannot be edited. Some organizations may allow reopening by managers. Complete your review carefully before submitting.4 min read
- How to create Objectives and Key Results using the mobile application?Profit.co empowers users to create and manage Objectives and Key Results (OKRs) directly from their mobile devices, ensuring goal-setting flexibility anytime, anywhere. Table of Contents What is this Feature? Why this Feature? How to Create OKRs Using Mobile Application How to Create KRs Using Mobile Application Best Practices Related Answer Posts Frequently Asked Questions What is this Feature? The mobile OKR creation feature allows users to add new Objectives and Key Results through the Profit.co mobile application. This functionality provides complete OKR setup capabilities, including objective naming, key result configuration, target setting, and KPI assignment all from your smartphone or tablet. Users can create both individual and organizational OKRs on-the-go with the same comprehensive options available on the desktop platform. Why this Feature? Mobility & Accessibility: Mobile phones have become essential tools in our daily lives, enabling work from anywhere at any time Modern Work Culture: Supports remote and hybrid work environments where users need flexibility to manage goals outside traditional office settings Timely Goal Setting: Enables immediate OKR creation when inspiration strikes or during meetings, eliminating delays caused by waiting to access desktop systems How to Create OKRs Using Mobile Application? Open the Profit.co mobile application and navigate to Menu from the left navigation panel. Select OKR and then choose All OKRs. Tap the + icon at the bottom or top of the screen. Enter your Objective name in the text field. Click Create to save your objective. How to Create KRs Using Mobile Application? Tap on the objective name you just created (or an existing objective). Scroll down to the Key Result section. Click on + Key Result. Choose the Key Result Type from the available options. Enter the key result name, Set the target date, Define the KPI (Key Performance Indicator), including the starting value and target value. Click Create to save your key result. Best Practices Write Clear, Measurable Objectives: Ensure your objectives are specific and outcome-focused, even when typing on a mobile device Choose Appropriate Key Result Types: Select the correct KR type (Numeric, Percentage, Currency, Boolean) that best measures your success Set Realistic Targets: Define achievable yet challenging KPIs with appropriate starting and target values Use Action-Oriented Language: Start objectives with verbs like "Increase," "Improve," "Launch," or "Achieve" Align with Strategy: Ensure mobile-created OKRs align with your team's or organization's strategic priorities Related Answer Posts Understanding Different Key Result Types in Profit.co, Click Here How to Track OKR Progress in Profit.co Mobile App, Click Here Frequently Asked Questions Q1. Can I create OKRs for my entire team using the mobile app? Yes, if you have the appropriate permissions, you can create team and organizational OKRs through the mobile application, just as you would on desktop. Q2. Is there a limit to how many OKRs I can create on mobile? There's no specific limit to mobile OKR creation. However, best practices recommend 3-5 Objectives with 3-5 Key Results each per cycle for optimal focus. Q3. Can I edit an OKR after creating it on mobile? Yes, you can edit objectives and key results after creation. Simply tap on the OKR you want to3 min read
- What does the Check-in discipline Execute phase explain within the Cockpit Dashboard?What is OKR Cockpit? In the context of organizational management and goal-setting, OKR Cockpit refers to a dashboard that assists in tracking and managing OKRs within an organization. It offers real-time data visualization through charts, graphs, and other visual elements, aiding in optimizing decision-making, providing insights into the organization's performance, and helping identify areas that need attention or improvement. Why this feature? The OKR Cockpit elucidates the organization's PEEL (Plan, Execute, Engage, Learn) approach. Cockpit facilitates streamlined workflows and efficiency by centralizing data access and presenting user-friendly information. The Cockpit Dashboard's Execute phase evaluates organizational Check-in Discipline, Alignments, and Progress, providing insights crucial for effective decision-making and goal attainment. Note : The filter option allows selection between Corporate, Department, or Team, displaying relevant data accordingly. Data is viewable only for the selected period. The Execute phase involves implementing actions outlined in the OKR plan to achieve defined Objectives and Key Results, translating plans into action. Navigate to OKRs → Cockpit from the left navigation panel and switch to the Execute phase of the cockpit dashboard. You will find the Check-in discipline. Check-in discipline Check-in discipline entails a systematic, routine practice of reviewing and updating OKRs. This practice ensures teams and individuals stay aligned with organizational goals and monitor progress effectively. This Execute phase reflects the company's commitment to disciplined tracking and reporting. Note: You can export the data separately for each aspect of the check-in discipline. Check-in discipline for previous weeks This feature “Check-in discipline for previous weeks” illustrates the Score, Count, and Percent of Missed, Late, on-time, and Pending check-ins for previous weeks. Note: The check-in discipline chart has a new filter option where you can choose the date range you want. It shows data for the current quarter, and you can filter it by selecting the exact dates you need. Check-in discipline for the current week This feature “Check-in discipline for the current week” illustrates the total percentages of Missed, Late, On-time, and Pending check-ins done by the Individuals, Departments, and Teams for the current week. Check-in discipline by next level department The Check-in discipline by next-level department feature offers a visual breakdown of Missed, Late, and On-Time check-ins across all departments, starting with parent departments. You can easily track sub-departments by selecting the parent department in the filter. Check-in discipline by all departments The "Check-in discipline by department" feature provides a visual representation of the proportions of Missed, Late, and On-Time check-ins across all departments. Note: You have the option to see this graph in numeric values and percentage and score views. Check-in discipline score of all Employees The "Check-in discipline score of all Employees" feature categorizes employees into five distinct ranges based on their Planned, On Time, Missed, and Late check-ins: "0% to 20%", "20% to 40%", "40% to 60%", "60% to 80%", and "80% to 100%". It provides a tally of check-ins for each range. Department Check-in Discipline The "Department Check-in Discipline" feature offers a consolidated view of check-in discipline across departments, including contributions from sub-departments. It visually represents the proportions of Missed, Late, and On-Time check-ins, ensuring better tracking and accountability. OKR Status Trend: Displays how OKRs are distributed across different statuses, On Track, At Risk, In Trouble, Completed, Not Started, and Archived, and how these shift over time. Displays how OKRs are distributed across different statuses, On Track, At Risk, In Trouble, Completed, Not Started, and Archived, and how these shift over time. On-Time Check-in Users Rate Trend: Highlights the trend of users completing their check-ins on time, helping track check-in discipline and accountability. Related Answer Post To learn more about the Engage phase in the Cockpit Dashboard, click here.3 min read
- What are the various app-specific roles available for users in Profit.co?Profit.co now provides app-specific roles tailored to different designations within an organization. Each employee can be assigned a role that aligns with their position, ensuring personalized access and functionality for their specific needs. Why this feature? Profit.co provides various roles that the Admin User (Super User) can assign to the newly created users. Assigning focused roles minimizes distractions, streamlines workflows, and allows users to focus on relevant tasks and goals. Clearly defined roles foster collaboration, maintain accountability and enhance team cohesion. Note: The app-specific roles are limited to particular modules, allowing employees to have access only to the functionalities relevant to their designated modules. Privileges Description Manage Users in this role can create, view, and oversee the entire module progress. Access Users in this role can create, view, and manage only their own departments. View Users in this role have view-only privileges to the module. App Specific Roles Manage Access View OKR Admin ✅ ✅ ✅ OKR User - ✅ ✅ Strategy Roadmap Admin ✅ ✅ ✅ Strategy Roadmap User - ✅ ✅ Strategy Roadmap Read Only - - ✅ Balanced Scorecard Admin ✅ ✅ ✅ Balanced Scorecard User - ✅ ✅ Balanced Scorecard Read Only - - ✅ Task User ✅ ✅ ✅ PPM Admin ✅ ✅ ✅ PPM User - ✅ ✅ PMS Admin ✅ ✅ ✅ PMS User - ✅ ✅ Rewards Admin ✅ ✅ ✅ Rewards User - ✅ ✅ Survey Admin ✅ ✅ ✅ Survey User - ✅ ✅ Meetings User - ✅ ✅ Notes User - ✅ ✅ Please follow these steps to assign roles for the module specific to the application: Navigate to Settings → User Management from the left navigation panel. In the Active Users page, select the employee you wish to assign a specific role to and Click on the Edit icon to proceed with adding the role. Click the + Add role button under the access information to assign roles specific to applications. OKR OKR Admin: Users assigned this role can create, view, and manage OKRs and have the ability to create KPIs, enabling comprehensive oversight and control of organizational performance metrics. Recommended for: Chief Executive Officers (CEOs), Chief Operating Officers (COOs) OKR User: Users assigned this role can create, view, and manage their own OKRs independently. They have full control over their objectives and key results, empowering them to track and achieve their goals. Recommended for: Managers and Team Leaders responsible for setting team goals Strategy Roadmap Strategy Roadmap Admin: Users with this role can create, view, and manage their strategy roadmaps. They have full control over their strategic plans, allowing for efficient tracking and management. Recommended for: Executive Leadership (e.g., CEO, CFO, CTO) Strategy Roadmap User: Users in this role can modify their designated strategy roadmaps. They have the ability to edit and manage these roadmaps, ensuring alignment with their strategic objectives. Recommended for: Department Heads Strategy Roadmap Read Only: This role enables users to view strategy roadmaps. Additionally, they have the option to expand and collapse the roadmaps for easier navigation and better visibility. Recommended for: Board Members Balanced Scorecard Balanced Scorecard Admin: Users with this role can create, view, and manage all scorecards. They can also create scorecards for every department, providing comprehensive oversight and control. Recommended for: Executive Leadership Balanced Scorecard User: Users holding this role can create, view, and manage their department's scorecards exclusively. They have permission to create scorecards for their department only, while other departments, can only view the scorecards Recommended for: Department Heads Balanced Scorecard Read Only: This role enables users to view the Balanced Scorecard. Additionally, they have the option to expand and collapse the Balanced Scorecard for easier navigation and better visibility. Recommended for: Board Members Portfolios and Projects PPM Admin: Users in this role can create, view, and manage portfolios, roadmaps, projects, and tasks. They also have access to the cockpit, enabling comprehensive oversight and strategic management for streamlined project execution and effective goal achievement. Recommended for: Project Management Office (PMO) Director or Head, Chief Operating Officer PPM User: Users in this role can access only their assigned portfolios, roadmaps, projects, and tasks. This ensures focused project management, streamlines responsibilities, and enhances productivity by narrowing the scope to relevant assignments. Recommended for: Project ManagersProgram Managers Performation Management System PMS Admin: Users in this role can initiate reviews, set goals, and propose development plans for employees. This empowers them to foster a culture of continuous improvement, align team goals with strategic plans, and enhance individual growth and performance. Recommended for: This role is recommended for HR And HRBP PMS User: Users in this role can submit reviews, advance goals, and progress development plans. This facilitates continuous feedback, ensures strategic alignment, and empowers individuals to contribute proactively to personal and organizational growth through meaningful goal achievement. Recommended for: Employees (individual contributors), Team Leads or Supervisors Task Management Task User: Users in this role have exclusive access to the task module, ensuring focused task management and streamlined productivity. Recommended for: Individual Contributors/Employees, Team Members, Project Coordinators, Task Owners or Assignees, Contractors or Freelancers (if working on specific tasks) Rewards Rewards Admin: This role enables users to give and receive rewards while managing the rewards program, fostering a culture of recognition and incentivizing high performance throughout the organization. Recommended for: Human Resources (HR), Manager or Director, Compensation and Benefits Manager, Rewards and Recognition Program Lead, HR Business Partners, Executive Leadership (CEO, COO, etc.) Rewards User: This role enables users to give and receive rewards, promoting a culture of recognition and motivating individuals to contribute actively to team success and organizational growth. Recommended for: Employees (individual contributors), Team Leads or Supervisors, Managers, Department Heads Survey Survey Admin: Users in this role can submit surveys and initiate new ones, enabling efficient data collection and fostering valuable insights through targeted feedback. Recommended for: Human Resources (HR) Manager or Director, Training and Development Manager, Employee Engagement Manager, Customer Experience Manager Survey User: Users in this role can submit surveys, enabling them to contribute valuable feedback and insights for data-driven improvements. Recommended for: Employees (individual contributors), Team Members, Customers or Clients, Vendors or Partners Meetings Meetings User: Users in this role can create, view, and manage their meetings, ensuring efficient scheduling and personal accountability. Recommended for: Employees (individual contributors), Team Leaders or Managers, Project Managers, Department Heads, Executives (including CEO, CXOs) Notes Notes User: Users in this role can create, view, and manage their notes, ensuring personalized organization and streamlined productivity. Recommended for: Employees (individual contributors), Team Leaders or Managers, Project Managers, Department Heads, Executives (including CEO, and CXOs) Related Answer Post To learn how can I add a new employee to Profit.co?, click here.6 min read
- How to change the status of an Objective?Profit.co provides an option to change the Status for Objectives. What is the use of this feature? This feature allows a user to change the status of an objective, overriding the auto-progress of the key results. By updating the status of objectives, you can track progress toward achieving your goals. This can help you take corrective actions and keep moving forward. Step 1 On the OKRs List View, click on the Objective or hover your cursor on the Objective, click on the More icon, and select the View Details menu. Navigate to the Status Updates menu and click on the Check-in option. Note: You can also enable the Sync Status toggle to roll up the status. If you disable it, only progress will get rolled up and the status will not be reflected when you change them. Step 2 Now change the status of the objective and click Add. Related Answer Post To learn about the key result status propagation, click here.1 min read
- What does the Alignments Execute phase explain within the Cockpit Dashboard?What is OKR Cockpit? In the context of organizational management and goal-setting, OKR Cockpit refers to a dashboard that assists in tracking and managing OKRs within an organization. It offers real-time data visualization through charts, graphs, and other visual elements, aiding in optimizing decision-making, providing insights into the organization's performance, and helping identify areas that need attention or improvement. Why this feature? The OKR Cockpit elucidates the organization's PEEL (Plan, Execute, Engage, Learn) approach. Cockpit facilitates streamlined workflows and efficiency by centralizing data access and presenting user-friendly information. The Cockpit Dashboard's Execute phase evaluates organizational Check-in Discipline, Alignments, and Progress, providing insights crucial for effective decision-making and goal attainment. Note : The filter option allows selection between Corporate, Department, or Team, displaying relevant data accordingly. Data is viewable only for the selected period. The Execute phase involves implementing actions outlined in the OKR plan to achieve defined Objectives and Key Results, translating plans into action. Navigate to OKRs → Cockpit from the left navigation panel and switch to the Execute phase of the cockpit dashboard. You will find the Alignments. Alignments Alignments refer to ensuring that individual, team, and department objectives are aligned with organizational goals and priorities. This involves cascading objectives and tracking progress to ensure alignment and focus. Organization Alignment to Corporate Objectives Organization Alignment to Corporate Objectives displays a visual representation and a table showing the number of assigned and aligned key results/sub-key results, their Progress and Status, and the Planned and actual progress and Confidence % of the Objective. Related Answer Post To learn more about the Cockpit Dashboard, click here.2 min read
- What is the use of Cockpit Dashboard in Profit.co?Profit.co provides a dashboard called the Cockpit. Why this feature? The OKR Cockpit consolidates all OKR data in one place, streamlining progress tracking and making it easier to monitor organizational goals across departments. With clear, accessible data visualization, the OKR Cockpit empowers leaders to make more informed, strategic decisions, optimizing resource allocation and overall organizational performance. By providing up-to-date visual data, the OKR Cockpit allows decision-makers to respond quickly to performance trends, ensuring timely adjustments and maintaining strategic alignment. What is OKR Cockpit? Profit.co's OKR software is crafted to enable businesses to establish ambitious goals with measurable outcomes, and it operates using the PEEL approach. The OKR Cockpit elucidates the organization's PEEL (Plan, Execute, Engage, Learn) approach. Note : The filter option allows selection between Corporate, Department, or Team, displaying relevant data accordingly. Data is viewable only for the selected period. Access to view all charts is restricted to Super Users and Privileged Users. How to provide an Add-on Role for the users to view the OKR Cockpit? Add-on Roles enable organizations to finely tailor user access, ensuring that individuals only have access to the specific modules they need. Profit.co provides an option to create add-on roles for users to provide access or privilege to view the OKR Cockpit. Navigate to Settings → User Management from the left navigation panel and switch to the Roles tab. Click on the + Create undefined button to create a new Add-on Role on the Add-on Roles tab. Set a new name for the role. In the Privileges section select the required option. Finally, Create it. How to enable OKR Cockpit in Profit.co? To view OKR Cockpit in Profit.co, the initial step is enabling Cockpit through the settings. Navigate to Settings → General → Apps from the left navigation panel. On the Apps page, click the OKR Management Customize button and enable the Cockpit toggle, and click Done. After enabling, to view Cockpit, navigate to the OKRs → Cockpit from the left navigation panel. Note: The Exempted OKRs for cockpit toggle exclude users from cockpit counts. Useful for ensuring accurate representation in organizations where some users lack OKRs. Related Answer Post To learn more about the various reports provided by Profit.co, click here.2 min read
- How to set OKRs visibility in performance reviews?Profit.co provides an option to set visibility for OKRs while adding it in Performance Review. Why this feature? By using this feature you can now control the visibility of OKR progress at the assessment level. Visibility of OKRs in performance reviews promotes transparency in assessing individual and team performance, facilitating constructive feedback and alignment with organizational goals. Step 1 Navigate to Settings → Performance → Reviews from the left navigation panel and switch to the Review Templates tab. Click on the Edit icon to edit the Review Template where you want to set the OKR visibility. Step 2 Under the Review Process tab, click on the Assessment edit icon to set the visibility. For instance, set OKR visibility for the self-assessment. Once done, click on Update. Step 3 Initiate a new review with the modified Review Template. The self-assessment user will get the OKRs to perform the assessment. Note: You can monitor your check-in progress as you conduct the performance review by clicking on the check-in graph icon. Related Answer Post To learn the process of setting mandatory comments for the assessments, click here.1 min read
- How to Configure Review Templates in Profit.co?Profit.co provides an option to configure Review Templates in Performance Review. Why this feature? This feature enables users to customize and create review templates for performance reviews based on their organizational needs. The review templates help users configure and save templates that can be saved and used in the future. Users can create multiple templates for Q1, Q2. Q3, and Q4 for various review process setups. Users can also rearrange the review components to suit their organizational needs. Step 1 Navigate to Settings → Performance → Reviews from the left navigation panel and select the Review Templates tab. On the Review Template page, click on the + Createbutton to create new templates. Step 2 On the Create Review Template page, you can configure the basic details of your template. OKRs, Past Reviews, and Meetings can also be included as part of the review process by enabling the toggle. You can add the Q&A, Competencies, Goals, OKRs, Tasks, and Overall Rating to the review template by enabling the toggle. While configuring goals, you can now choose how they appear during performance reviews, either as a combined list or grouped by goal types. Step 3 Users can click the Show Advanced Option to further customize the review template. In the Advanced Options, users can enable/disable the Ratings and Comments option for review. In the Review Layout section, the components of the review can be rearranged to suit organizational needs. Once done, click on the Next button. Step 4 In the Review Process section, Users can configure the participants of the performance reviews. To further customize the assessments, click on the Edit icon. Once done, click on the Next button. Note: Enabling the “Use previous review as the starting point for new review” toggle now retains comments and ratings across all components, including Q&A, OKRs, Goals, and Competencies. Note: You can use the new “Make Comments Compulsory” toggle in PMS Review Settings to mandate comments across all assessment types, ensuring reviewers provide feedback even when ratings are given. Step 5 In the Competencies section, enabling the Override competencies at review level toggle allows you to tailor competencies for specific review templates according to your preferences. After choosing the required competencies, click on Next. Step 6 In the Scoring Buckets section, users can Distribute Weights, Allow override weights at review level, and Prevent employees from submitting their self-assessment if the weights do not add upto 100% based on the organizational needs. Users can select Scoring based on Review Level, Grade Level, and Department Level. Once done, click on Save. Note:In review templates, the Scoring Buckets step will be hidden if all weighted components OKRs, Goals, Competencies, and Tasks are disabled. The newly created template will be added to the Review Templates page. The template can be selected whenever a new review is initiated. Related Answer Post To learn more about how to set formulas in a custom 9-Box Matrix, click here. 3 min read
- How to create sub KR in Profit.co ?Profit.co provides an option to create sub-key results within the key results for more detailed progress tracking. Table of Contents Why are subkey results important? What are Sub Key Results? How do I create Sub Key Results? Best Practices for Creating Sub Key Results Related Questions Frequently Asked Questions Why are subkey results important? Sub Key Results provide granular tracking and team-level accountability for achieving larger objectives. Here's why this feature matters: Detailed Progress Tracking: The progress of the parent key result can be tracked using the sub key results, providing visibility into how work is broken down. Efficient Tracking: Users can add a sub key result as a new step to track the parent key result more efficiently, breaking complex goals into manageable pieces. Team Distribution: Distribute work across multiple team members while maintaining unified tracking Roll-Up Progress: Automatically aggregate progress from sub-KRs to parent KRs Clear Accountability: Assign specific portions of work to individual contributors What are Sub Key Results? Sub Key Results (Sub-KRs) are child Key Results that roll up to a parent Key Result, creating a hierarchical structure for tracking progress. Key Characteristics: Relationship: Parent Key Result: The main Key Result that represents the overall goal Sub Key Results: Individual components that contribute to the parent Roll-Up: Sub-KR progress aggregates to calculate parent KR progress Structure: Sub-KRs appear directly below their parent Key Result Multiple Sub-KRs can exist under a single parent Each Sub-KR has its own owner, target, and progress tracking Sub-KRs can have different measurement types than their parent How do I create Sub Key Results? There are two primary methods to create Sub-KRs: Method 1: Add Sub-KR Using the + Icon Step 1: Locate the Parent Key Result Navigate to your OKR module Find the Key Result where you want to add sub-KRs. Click on the + Icon and then click Add KPI. Fill in the Sub-KR details: Sub-KR name/description Owner/assignee Target value Measurement type Click Create Step 2: View the Subkey Result The subkey result will be created just below the parent key result, clearly showing the hierarchical relationship. Method 2: Distribute Key Result to Multiple Assignees Using the Distribute Option: You can also create sub-key results by distributing a key result and assigning it to multiple assignees using the Distribute option. How Distribution Works: Select a Key Result you want to distribute Choose the Distribute option Select multiple assignees from your team The Key Results will be distributed as sub-key results Each assignee gets their own Sub-KR under the parent Note:When you perform check-ins at both the Parent Key Result level and the Sub-KR level, the comments are now displayed separately. Parent KR comments appear under Direct Check-In Comments, while Sub-KR comments continue to show under Latest Check-In Comments. Best Practices for Creating Sub Key Results To maximize the effectiveness of Sub-KRs: Divide parent KR into meaningful, distinct components Ensure Sub-KRs collectively achieve the parent target Assign each Sub-KR to a specific individual Ensure owners have authority and resources Set specific, quantifiable targets for each Sub-KR Ensure Sub-KR targets add up to parent target (for sum roll-up) Use consistent measurement units where possible Make targets achievable but challenging Related Questions To learn more about the process of key result status propagation, click here. Frequently Asked Questions Frequently Asked Questions Q1. Can I create Sub-KRs for Objectives, or only for Key Results? Sub-KRs are specifically for Key Results. Objectives have Key Results, which can then have Sub-KRs. There's no concept of "Sub-Objectives. Q2. What's the difference between distributing a KR and manually creating multiple Sub-KRs? Distribution is faster for creating similar Sub-KRs assigned to different people. Manual creation gives you more control over individual Sub-KR details, targets, and structure. Choose based on your needs Q3.What happens if I delete a Sub-KR? Deleting a Sub-KR removes it from the parent's roll-up calculation. blan4 min read
- How do I customize the Welcome Email?Profit.co allows Super Users to customize the Welcome Email to the newly added Active Users. Why this feature? This feature allows Super Users to customize the Welcome Email to the newly added Active Users. A customized email provides an opportunity to communicate important information about the user's role, responsibilities, and expectations. It can also include details about the company's mission, values, and goals, which can help align the new employee's values with the company's objectives. Step 1 Navigate to Settings → Security from the left navigation panel and switch to the Manage System Emails tab. On the Manage System Emails page, Click on the Welcome Email Customize button. Step 2 When you click on the Customize Template button, a side panel will appear and allow you to Edit the standard template. You can also change the Subject and Message of the email template. Step 3 You can insert the attributes to the Message by clicking on Insert Attributes. The dropdown will show the following menus: Employee Details Business Details When you click Employee details, you will have drop-down menus like User ID, First Name, Last Name, Department, Job Title, and Role. Similarly, when you click Business Details, you will have Business Logo and Business Name. Once the email template is updated, click on Save. Related Answer Post To learn how to disable the welcome email for the users, click here.2 min read
- How can meeting topics be customized in Profit.co?Profit.co provides an option for the users to customize their meeting topics. Why this feature? Allowing users to customize meeting topics ensures that discussions are tailored to their specific needs and objectives, increasing the relevance and effectiveness of each session. Tailoring meeting topics enables organizations to align discussions with strategic goals, ensuring that each session contributes directly to overarching objectives and outcomes. Step 1 Navigate to Meetings from the left navigation panel. You will find the scheduled meetings on your calendar. Click on the required meeting for which you want to customize the meeting topics. The Meeting Topics will be displayed on the right side. Step 2 To customize meeting topics, you have the following options: Utilize the "/" command to access specific features. With the "/" command, you can incorporate Normal Text, Topics, Bulleted lists, Checklists, and Headings of your choice. Format text according to your preferences. Add Dividers to structure the content. Create Tasks as needed and you can associate them with the required workspace and boards. Mention individuals within the meetings using the "@" symbol. You can easily format text, create tasks, add dividers, and mention a person. How to add comments while customizing the meeting topics? You can add comments by selecting the text and clicking on Add a comment. By clicking on the Comment section, you can access and respond to comments. Additionally, you have the option to view the list of currently active users who will have the ability to edit the document simultaneously. Note: You can also remove predefined topics and generate new ones based on your preferences. Related Answer Post To learn how to reschedule a meeting, click here.2 min read
- How to set Custom Attributes for Tasks?In Profit.co, you can set custom attributes for tasks using the Master Layout, allowing you to add additional fields to your task board that capture the specific information your team needs beyond the default task fields. Table of Contents What are Custom Attributes for Tasks in Profit.co? How to access the Master Layout for Tasks in Profit.co? How to create a Section in the Master Layout in Profit.co? How to add Custom Attributes to a Section in Profit.co? How to fill in Custom Attribute values on a Task in Profit.co? Best practices for using Custom Attributes for Tasks in Profit.co Related Questions Frequently Asked Questions What are Custom Attributes for Tasks in Profit.co? Custom Attributes in Profit.co are additional fields that you can configure and add to your task board using the Master Layout. They allow organizations to extend the default task form with fields that are specific to their workflows, processes, or reporting needs, such as a cost estimate, risk level, department code, or any other data point that standard task fields do not capture. How to access the Master Layout for Tasks in Profit.co? The Master Layout is the central configuration panel where all custom attributes for tasks are created and managed. Step 1 Go to Settings → Tasks from the left navigation panel. Switch to the Master Layout tab within the Tasks settings. The Master Layout displays the current task form structure with sections and attributes. A default section is already present when you first access the Master Layout. How to create a Section in the Master Layout in Profit.co? Sections are grouping containers within the Master Layout that organize related custom attributes together on the task form. Step 1 In the Master Layout, click on the existing default section to select it. In the Inspector tab on the right side panel, update the section name to reflect the group of attributes it will contain, for example, "Project Details" or "Financial Information." Click Save to confirm the section name. How to add Custom Attributes to a Section in Profit.co? Once a section is created, you can add custom attribute fields to it from the Palette panel. Step 1 In the Master Layout view, locate the Palette section, which contains all available attribute types. Click on the desired Attribute type from the Palette. Drag and drop it into the relevant section on the Master Layout. With the attribute selected, go to the Inspector tab. Enter the name for the attribute field as it should appear on the task form, for example, "Estimated Cost" or "Risk Level." Click Save to confirm the attribute configuration. How to fill in Custom Attribute values on a Task in Profit.co? Once custom attributes are configured in the Master Layout, users can fill in the values for those fields directly on any task. Step 1 Navigate to the Workspace or Board and click on any task to open its detail view. Click the Edit option on the task to enter edit mode. Step 2 Scroll to the custom attributes section within the task detail view. Enter the relevant values for each custom attribute field that has been configured. Best practices for using Custom Attributes for Tasks in Profit.co Plan your custom attributes carefully before creating them; only add fields that your team will consistently use and that add genuine value to task tracking. Group related attributes into clearly named sections to keep the task form organized and easy to navigate. Use descriptive and self-explanatory attribute names so team members understand exactly what information to enter without additional guidance. Use Number and Currency fields with minimum and maximum value limits to prevent incorrect data entry and maintain data integrity. Related Questions Click here to learn how to set custom attributes for Goals in Profit.co. Frequently Asked Questions Q1. How do I access the Master Layout to create custom attributes for tasks in Profit.co? Navigate to Settings → Tasks from the left navigation panel and switch to the Master Layout tab. From here you can create sections and add custom attribute fields to the task form. Q2. What is a Section in the Master Layout in Profit.co? A Section is a grouping container within the Master Layout that organizes related custom attributes together on the task form. You can name each section to reflect the type of information it captures. Q3. How do I add a custom attribute field to the task form in Profit.co? In the Master Layout, locate the desired attribute type in the Palette section, drag and drop it into the relevant section, name it in the Inspector tab, and click Save.4 min read
- How to enable and see the OKRs that are assigned to me?Profit.co. allows the users to access and view OKRs that are assigned to them individually. Why this feature? This feature enables the users to view and manage OKRs that are assigned to them. Individual access to assigned OKRs enables employees to prioritize their work, fostering greater alignment with organizational goals. It empowers users to take ownership of their performance, fostering a sense of responsibility and driving improved outcomes. Step 1 To view your OKRs, navigate to OKRs → My Departments'/Employees' OKRs from the left navigation panel. Switch to the Assigned to Me tab and users can view the OKRs that are assigned to them. Related Answer Post To learn more about how to view departmental OKRs, click here.1 min read
- How do I add Key Results to Corporate OKRs?Profit.co provides an option to add Key Results to Corporate OKRs. Why this Feature? Corporate OKRs ensure that individual efforts are aligned with overarching organizational goals, fostering a unified direction throughout the company. By linking Key Results to Corporate Objectives, employees are held accountable for their contributions to broader company objectives, promoting a sense of ownership and responsibility. Step 1 Navigate to OKRs → All OKRs from the left navigation panel. Select the name of the Corporate OKRs that you want to create Key Result. And, click on the + Add a new key result icon to create a key result. Step 2 Under the Objective click on the + Add a new key result icon to create a key result and select the Quick Create option. On the Create Key Result side panel, enter the key result name, and set the Key Result type, Owner, Period, Tags, and Check-in Frequency. Finally, click on the Create button to create the Key Result. Note: If needed you can automate your key result progress using the Integrations. Related Blog Post To learn more about the process of creating Key Results using the Step-by-Step guide click here.1 min read
- How to filter and export files from departments/sub departments in the Company Dashboard?You can now filter and export files from the company dashboard to view the progress. Why this feature? A company dashboard is a data visualization tool that helps organizations monitor performance, track goals, and make informed decisions In the Company Dashboard, you will be able to visualize the OKR progress in chart and graph formats. Step 1 To view the OKR Progress in the company dashboard, navigate to the OKRs → Cockpit from the left navigation panel. Switch to the Execute phase and click on the Progress tab. Step 2 Click on the Filter by icon where you can view the OKRs progress for Corporate, Department, and Teams. After filtering it you’ll be able to see the OKRs progress for the respective department only. Note: You can export the data from all the company dashboard charts. Related Answer Post To learn more about downloading the reports from the Task Dashboard, click here.1 min read
- How do you define a key result of Percentage tracked in Profit?Profit.co offers 6 key result types that enhance objective progress. These metrics aid in achieving goals by measuring and tracking various aspects of performance. Why this feature? Profit.co grants users the choice to opt from the six key result types, facilitating advancement towards their objectives. Selecting the Percentage Tracked key result in Profit.co offers advantages by quantifying progress as a percentage of completion. This enhances goal clarity, and measurement accuracy, and enables informed decision-making Step 1 Navigate to OKRs from the left navigation panel and choose the required Objective to create Key Result. Click on the +Add new key result option and choose the Using Form option. Step 2 On the Create Key Result page, choose the Percentage option to create the percentage-tracked key result. Enter the required details and click Create. Related Answer Post To learn more about creating key results Using Form, click here.1 min read
- How do I customize and link initiatives with focus area and measurements?General a Strategic Initiative is to set the right goal to accomplish an organizational objective, strategic initiatives include milestones, milestones with a budget, and planned start/ end date. Why this Feature? Linking initiatives with focus areas and measurements ensures alignment between strategic goals and actionable steps. This integration enables organizations to track progress accurately, prioritize efforts, and adapt strategies as needed. It enhances transparency, facilitates data-driven decision-making, and ultimately leads to more effective and efficient goal achievement. Note: Only Super Users have access to Settings. Step 1 Go to Settings → Strategy → Initiatives. Click on the Master layout button. You can customize the attributes if you want. Step 2 In the master layout, default attributes will include Milestone and Milestone attributes. You can add or remove attributes at this stage. Additionally, you can create and manage Statuses and Waves for Initiatives through settings. Step 3 Save the changes and navigate to Strategy→ Initiatives Step 4 Create your list of initiatives, with standard attributes Assigned owner Waves Waves: defines the period and indicates what type of initiative is this going to be. Eg: Short term be for 1 yr, Long term for 2 yrs Department Strategic focus area Measurements Planned start/ end date Milestones Milestone: Milestone with the budget amount and Other fields. Step 5 Now this initiative is linked with the objective and the key results. Note: We have a dedicated section specifically for announcements, Where all posted announcements are tracked and organized.2 min read
- How to create OKRs on the My OKRs page?Profit.co allows you to create OKRs on the My OKRs page. Why this feature? Profit.co allows you to create OKRs on the My OKRs page which allows for easy navigation. This feature simplifies ongoing monitoring for individuals by consolidating their assigned OKRs in one place, fostering personal accountability, and ensuring alignment with organizational goals. Step 1 Navigate to OKR → My Departments'/Employees' OKRs from the left navigation panel. You will land on the Assigned to Me page. On the assigned to me page, Click on the + Create Objective icon. A popup window will appear where they can see the option to select the OKR level in which they want to create OKR. Individual OKRs Corporate OKRs (if they have create/edit access) Department OKRs (show each department separately in which they have to create/edit access). Step 2 Once you select the OKR level from the popup, a side panel will open where they can see options to create the OKR. Enter the required details and click on the Create button. Step 3 You can view the created OKR on the assigned to me page. Related Answer Post To know more about How to enable and see the OKRs that are assigned to me, click here.2 min read
- How to Reward Points for Employees' Goals in Profit.co?Profit.co provides an option to reward points for employees' goals Why this feature? Rewarding points to goals provides a transparent and quantifiable measure of achievement. This enables both employees and managers to objectively track progress and acknowledge successful goal completion, fostering a culture of recognition and appreciation. Step 1 Navigate to Performance → Goals from the left navigation panel and switch to the My Employees’ Goals tab. Select the employee from the directory panel and click on the Check-in button for the Goal that you wish to reward. Step 2 In the Check-in panel, select the "Add Points" button to grant points as a reward to the employee, including a comment if desired. Once done, click on Post. The rewarded points will be included in the employees' recognitions. Related Answer Post To learn more about how to add Notes to your goals, click here.1 min read
- How to view OKRs based on KPI in Profit.co?Profit.co provides an option KPI Summary where you can view the key results and their progress that have been associated with a particular KPI. Why this feature? The KPI Summary allows users to monitor key results and their progress in one place, improving visibility and alignment with organizational goals. By tracking key results associated with KPIs, this feature helps make informed, data-driven decisions, ensuring progress is aligned with performance expectations. Step 1 Navigate to OKRs → KPI Summary from the left navigation panel to view Key Results associated with a particular KPI. Click on the particular KPI, you can view the Progress of the Key result. Related Answer Post To learn more about the KPI Summary, click here To learn more about the process of creating a new KPI, click here.1 min read
- How to manage scores for goals, competencies and OKRs?Profit.co helps you to manage the scores for goals, competencies, and OKRs via the Scoring Bucket option. Why this feature? This feature helps you to manage the scores between Competencies, Goals, and OKRs when you include it in your performance review process. Based on your requirement you can split the weight among these three in the scoring bucket via Settings. Note: Only Super Users can have access to Scoring Bucket. Step 1 Navigate to Settings → Performance → Reviews from the left navigation panel and switch to the Review Templates tab. Click on the Edit icon of the Review templates you wish to make the changes. Step 2 Under the Scorig Buckets menu enable the toggles for three of them. The below-mentioned example shows 0.33 weight for Goals and OKRs and 0.34 weight for Competencies. Step 3 Once you click on the Edit icon of Goals, OKRs, or Competencies to add weights and percentages in the Update Scoring page. Once done, click Update. The weight will be updated accordingly. After making all the changes click on the Update button on the Edit Review Template page. Note: Ensure that the sum of the weights is equal to 1 or 100%. Related Answer Post To know more about How to set weights for Goals, click here2 min read
- How can I create my team in Profit.co?Profit.co allows users to create teams in an organization. Why this Feature? Teamwork in an organization improves morale and increases productivity. Profit.co allows you to create various cross-functional teams to facilitate collaboration and achieve goals. Note: Only Super Users have access to create teams. Step 1 Navigate to Settings → User Management from the left navigation menu and switch to the Teams tab. Step 2 On the Team’s page, scroll down and click on the + Create Team button to create your new team. Enable the Private teams if you want to restrict the visibility of your team. Note: Private teams option will be available for the Enterprise Plan. Step 3 In the Create Team side panel, Enter your Team Name, Email and add your team members and team leads. Enable the Private team option and click on Create. Step 4 Navigate to All OKRs page to create OKRs for your team. Select the team and click on the + Create Objective button to create the objective and key results. Related Answer Post To learn more about how to set up a new department, click here.1 min read
- What is the purpose of reinstalling the Profit.co plugin in Jira Software?Security upgrade for Jira and Profit.co. Jira and Profit.co have recently enhanced their security protocols, implementing robust upgrades to safeguard sensitive data. These advancements ensure a more secure environment for users, addressing evolving cybersecurity challenges and reinforcing the platforms' commitment to maintaining the integrity and confidentiality of user information. When logging into the Jira account, a small popup will appear, which suggests asking the admin to reinstall the Profit.co plugin. Uninstalling and reinstalling your account will have no impact on your OKR (Objectives and Key Results) progress. The connection associated with the Key Result will remain unaltered, and there is no need for any manual adjustments or corrections during this process. Your goals and their corresponding progress will remain consistent throughout this entire procedure. This ensures a seamless experience for users.1 min read
- How to create an Individual OKR?Profit.co provides an option to create an Individual OKR. Why this feature? Profit.co provides you with the option to control who can view your individual OKRs within your organization, allowing you to restrict visibility unless you decide otherwise. Empower employees to focus on their personal growth and contributions. Aligns individual goals with broader team and organizational objectives. Enhances accountability and productivity by tracking clear, measurable outcomes. Step 1 Create an Objective Using Form. Generate a key result in which you can define the key result type, time periods, tags, cascade approach, key result owner, and frequency of check-ins. Step 2 If you have set the visibility of the OKR as My Team, while setting the owner for the key result you can select only your reporting employees. Related Blog Post To learn more about OKR visibility, click here.1 min read
- How do I get Email Notifications for the Key results and Sub-key Results assignments?In Profit.co we can customize email notifications for key results and sub-key results assignments by enabling the OKR Assignment option in the Action Center. Why this feature? By allowing users to personalize email notifications for sub-key results assignments, it promotes accountability, helping teams stay on track and meet their OKR targets with greater efficiency and transparency. Customized email notifications enhance engagement by ensuring team members are promptly informed about key result assignments, keeping them focused on achieving objectives. The assignee will get instant notification and view the assigned key results and sub-key results. How to enable the Notification? Step 1 Navigate to Settings → General→ Action Center from the left navigation panel. Note: Only Super Users can enable the Email notification. Under the events named OKR Assigned To You, you will be able to see the notification options enabled with the Color codes. Step 2 Click on the Edit icon and enable the toggle for Email Notification. Design the notification message using the Attributes and finally, click Update. Related Answer Post To learn the process of setting email notifications for the events in Goals, click here.1 min read
- How can I create an OKR template?Profit.co provides you an easy way to create an OKR template. Why this feature? OKR Templates allow users to select an OKR that closely matches their objectives quickly. They can use the key results in- the objective as it is or edit it to suit their goals. Note: You need to be a Super User to create a template. Step 1 Navigate to Settings → OKRs → Authoring → Templates. Click on the + Create Template icon to create a new template. Enter the Template name, category, and Objective name. and Click on the Add Key Result. Step 2 Select the Key Results best suited for your Objective and set the Target value accordingly. Click on Add. Your created key result will appear and finally, click on Create. Step 3 Select the created template while creating Objectives using the Step-by-Step Guide method from the Create from Template. Related Answer Post To learn more about moving key results from one of your OKRs, click here.1 min read
- How do I rename the fields in Profit.co?Profit.co supports international languages and nurtures the usability of its customers. Users can choose their native language to rename fields and understand OKRs conveniently. Why this feature? This feature enables users to rename and modify field names in their chosen language. This makes Profit.co versatile and universal in its application and helps in managing OKRs performance and goals effectively without any language restrictions. Users can select any language from the pre-seeded multilingual options and access the application through the language of their choice. Step 1 Navigate to the Settings → General → Localization from the left navigation panel. On the Localization page, Enable the toggle for the Language of your preference. Select the Customize button to modify the field names. Note: By default, US English will be enabled. Step 2 On the Customize page, users can see all the Menus on the left side of the page. The components and its default names will be displayed next to the Menu section. Users can rename the default names of any components from the Prompt section. A pop-up panel will appear to notify you that the field rename was Updated Successfully. Related Answer Post To learn more about how to change/customize the organization/corporate name, click here.2 min read
- Support for other languages or Internationalization in Profit.coProfit.co supports more international languages and nurtures the usability of the software. Why this feature? You can use our top-notch multilingual option to access Profit.co with your choice of language. This Localization strategy helps to augment your OKR performance and goals without any language restrictions so that you can attain your target efficiently. It also allows you to customize and rename the functionality at your convenience. Step 1 Navigate to Settings → General → Localization from the left navigation panel. On the Localization page, you will see the list of available international languages with toggles. By enabling the language toggle, you can apply the selected language to your user account. Note: By default, US English will be enabled. Step 2 To customize the selected language according to your preference, click on the Customize button next to the preferred language choice. Step 3 On the Localization/Dutch page you can see the options to customize the field names. You can see all the menus on the left side of the page. The components and their default names will be displayed next to the menu section. If you want to rename the default names of any components, you can change them in the given text boxes next to the default name sections. Once you rename any menu/component it will automatically get updated. Step 4 Though the preferred Localization is enabled from Settings, you need to select the enabled language by navigating to Preference → General from the left navigation panel. Related Answer Post To know more about renaming the fields in Profit.co, click here2 min read
- How to create Directives through Profit.co mobile application?Profit.co allows you to create your directives through a Mobile application Why this feature? Mobile phone applications play an incalculable role in our daily lives and activities. Mobile phones are no longer the common communication tool they once were, it has grown to be the center of attention and help both individuals and enterprises. Strategic directives provide clear goals, foster alignment, enhance decision-making, drive organizational focus, encourage proactive innovation, and can stimulate improved performance and competitive advantage in an organization. Step 1 Navigate to More from the bottom menu. Select the Strategy module. You will be directed to the Directives page, click on the + icon to create new Directives. Write the Directives Name and the required details. Once done, click on the Create button.1 min read
- How to define priorities in Profit.co through Mobile Application?Profit.co allows you to define Priorities through Mobile Application. Why this feature? Mobile phones are no longer the common communication tool they once were, it has grown to be the center of attention and help both individuals and enterprises. Profit.co mobile application allows users to define Priorities which are the values to focus on and pay attention to in order to achieve their goals. Step 1 To create Priorities, Navigate to the More option from the down menu. Select the Strategy module. Click on the Fries menu icon in the top left corner. Click on Priorities. You can create a new Priority by clicking on the + icon. Fill in the necessary details and click Create. The Priorities will be created.1 min read
- How to view goals associated with a Key Result in Profit.co?Profit.co allows you to view the Goals associated with any Key Result from the OKR View page. Why this feature? This feature allows users to view all the goals along with their corresponding key results. It enables users to access and monitor the status of the goals and their key result progress assigned to them. As a first step, enable users to access goals linked to the associated key result by following these steps: Step 1 Navigate to Settings → OKRs → Views from the left navigation panel. Switch to the Key Results tab, scroll down to Associated Goals and enable the Display associated goals on the Key Result view page toggle. Step 2 Now, navigate back to the OKRs page and select the Key Result that you wish to view. On the Key Result overview page, click on the Goals tab. Users can view the Goals associated with their Key Results and monitor the progress for the same. Related Answer Post To know more about what are KR Associated Goals in Profit.co, click here.1 min read
- How does top down alignment work in Profit.co?In Profit.co you have two types of top-down assignment options, Assign as Objective Assign as Key Result/Sub Key Results Why this feature? This feature provides an option for c-level executives to assign high-priority goals as objectives to departments or individuals. If the key result or objective is not a high priority to the assigned user/department, you can use the second approach and make them progress the key result or create any subkey result for it. Step 1 Navigate to OKRs → All OKRs from the left navigation panel and create a Key Result using the Form option for the required Objective. Under the Cascade approach, Choose either Assign as Objective or Assign as Key Results/Sub-key Results. For instance, if the C-level executive wants to improve reputation through social media, he can Assign this Key Result as an Objective to the Marketing department. The assign key result as an objective approach is used when they want to give high priority and come up with their own initiatives as key result to achieve the objective. To assign this Key result as an Objective to the Marketing department, Click on + sign Assignees and select the department. Then, click Create. Similarly, For instance, The Assign Key Result/ Sub-Key Results approach is used when the department/individual is already working on multiple initiatives and needs to additionally work on this key result and progress. If they want to create sub key result and cascade down further they can do that using this approach. To assign this Key result as a Key Result/Sub-Key Result to an Individual, Click on Assignees and select the Individual. Then, click Create. Note: If the assignee deletes the assigned Objective or Key result it won’t be deleted on the Owner’s side. Related Answer Post To learn the difference between alignment and assignment, click here.2 min read
- How to check the history of progress in Goals?Profit.co provides an option to users to check the history of progress in Goals via “Audit Trail”. Why this feature? Checking the history of progress in goals provides motivation, insight into what works, and helps track achievements, fostering accountability and continuous improvement. Audit Trail helps you to track the progress details of your employees on a single page. You can view the previous and current values, status, and comments given. Step 1 Navigate to Performance → Goals from the left navigation panel. Select the My Goals tab. You can find your goals. Step 2 Click on the Ellipsis icon of the required Goal and select the Audit Trail option. You will be able to see the Check-in Value, Action, and Status details. Related Answer Post To learn more about My Org’s goals, click here.1 min read
- How to enable Individual Development Plan (IDP) in Profit.co?Individual Development Plans help organizations to identify and address distinct potential in employees individually and fill the position of key roles within the organization based on their capability in coping with their professional goals. Why this feature? This plan helps organizations assist with the career and employee’s own goals. This helps managers to collaborate with the most effective employees on action plans and activities that are beneficial for both employees as well as the business. You can now enable an Individual Development Plan for Profit. Co. Step 1 Navigate to Settings → Performance → Development Plans from the left menu. Under the Individual Development Plan Section, Enable the toggle for Individual Development Plan. Step 2 You can also add custom attributes which will be reflected on the IDP creation page. Related Answer Post To learn the process of creating a new IDP, click here.1 min read
- How to initiate a Individual Development Plan (IDP) in Profit.co?Profit.co provides an option to initiate an Individual Development Plan in Profit.co. Why this feature? The Individual Development Plan (IDP) recognizes and supports the organization's most potential workers in achieving greater success. It advances a worker's career by assisting them in learning the most recent industry innovations and aids in setting goals with a much wider perspective. IDPs assist managers in coordinating with the most productive workers and scheduling their activities and action plans in a way that is more beneficial to both the company and the employees. Step 1 HR admins and initiators can create an Individual Development Plan (IDP) through the Initiate option, which is displayed on the Individual Development Plan page. Step 2 When the HR admin clicks on the Initiate button, a side panel will open where you can enter the required details. Once done click the Send to Coach/Mentors button. After sending it for approval, IDP will be generated, and it will be in the “Proposed” status. Finally, the coach modifies details and adds coach/mentors if needed and Initiate IDP for the user. Note: You can delete Individual Development Plans (IDP) directly from the HR Administration Page. When a plan is deleted, notifications are sent to the right people. Only HR Admins and HRBPs can delete plans. Related Answer Post To learn the process of initiating a Performance Improvement Plan [PIP], click here.2 min read
- How to enable Performance Improvement Plan (PIP) in Profit.co?Performance Improvement Plan help organizations to identify and address current potential employees and fill the position of key roles within the organization. Why this feature? PIP assists employees to improve their job performance and achieve their career goals. Also, it helps managers to collaborate with the most effective employees on action plans and activities that are beneficial for both employees as well as the business. You can now enable a performance improvement plan in Profit.co. Step 1 Navigate to Settings → General→ Apps from the left navigation panel. Enable the Development Plans toggle. Click the Customize option. On the Customize : Development Plans side panel, enable the Development Plans toggle and enable the Performance Improvement Plans toggle. Once done, click the Done button. Step 2 Navigate to Settings → Performance → Development Plans from the left navigation panel and switch to the Performance Improvement Plan tab. Enable the toggle for Performance Improvement Plan. Step 3 You can also add custom attributes on the Master Layout which will be reflected on the PIP creation page.1 min read
- How does the user show progress in the Performance Improvement Plan (PIP) in Profit.co ?A user can now show progress in the performance improvement plan (PIP) in Profit.co Why this feature? It allows employees to demonstrate their commitment to growth and improvement, while managers can monitor progress in real time, providing support or feedback as needed. This structured approach helps foster a culture of continuous development and increases the likelihood of achieving performance goals. Step 1 Navigate to Performance → Development Plans from the left navigation panel. On the Development Plan page, click on the drop-down menu and choose the Performance Development Plan. Step 2 By clicking on the Initiated Plan, the user can show progress in the activities proposed by his manager and mentor before the stipulated time. Once the user starts to show progress on the activities the status of the plan will be changed to “In Progress”. Note: Based on the user’s completion of progress on or before the stipulated time, action will be taken by the manager. Once the user completes them on time then the coach or the HR admin can close the PIP and can take action based on the performance evaluation. Related Answer Post To know more about how the user shows progress in IDP, click here.1 min read
- How to create a new task in Profit?Profit.co provides an option to create tasks that help plan and break down daily work to achieve goals. Table of Contents What are tasks in Profit.co? Why is task management important? How do I create a new task? How do I manage task status and completion? How do I manage archived/completed tasks? Best Practices for Task Management Related Questions Frequently Asked Questions What are tasks in Profit.co? Tasks are the specific activities and work items that need to be completed to achieve key results and organizational goals. Why is task management important? Task management helps individuals and teams stay organized and productive. Here's why this feature matters: Organization: Task management helps individuals and teams stay organized by providing a clear overview of tasks, deadlines, and priorities. Resource Efficiency: It enables efficient allocation of resources and time, ensuring that each task is completed in a timely manner. Goal Achievement: The Task helps to plan and break down your daily work and it helps to achieve goals. How do I create a new task? Follow these steps to create a task: Step 1: Navigate to Task Creation Navigate to Tasks → My Tasks from the left navigation panel Click on the + Create Task icon to create a new task Step 2: Configure Task Details In the task creation form: Enter task name/description: What needs to be done Set a due date: When the task should be completed Associate key results: Link task to specific Key Results it supports Associate tags: Add labels or categories for organization Click on Save to create the task The task is now created and appears in your task list. How do I manage task status and completion? Three Ways to Complete a Task: Method 1: Tick Icon Click on the tick icon next to the task The task was immediately marked as complete Quickest completion method Method 2: Status Dropdown Click on the task name to open details Click on the task status dropdown Choose Complete from the options Task status updates to completed Method 3: Drag and Drop Simply drag and drop the task to the Completed status column Visual, intuitive completion Works in board/kanban view How do I manage archived/completed tasks? Hiding Archived Tasks: Note: If you don't want to see the Archived tasks: Click on the More icon (⋮) in the task view Disable the "Show Archived Tasks" option Archived tasks will be hidden from view Best Practices for Task Management To maximize the effectiveness of task management: Use Action-Oriented Task Names: Start with verbs like "Complete," "Review," "Create," and "Send," which make tasks clear and actionable at a glance. Set Realistic Due Dates: Assigning achievable deadlines based on task complexity and workload prevents overcommitment and maintains credibility. Keep Task List Current: Mark tasks complete promptly and archive finished tasks regularly maintains clean, focused workspace and accurate progress tracking. Related Questions To learn more about how to view the tasks of your team members, click here. To learn more about how to add attachments in Task Management, click here. Frequently Asked Questions Q1. What's the difference between a task and a Key Result? Tasks are specific activities you need to do (execution), while Key Results are measurable outcomes you want to achieve (results). Multiple tasks typically support one Key Result. Q2. Can I create tasks without associating them to Key Results? Yes, tasks can be standalone action items. However, associating with Key Results provides strategic context and helps prioritize work. Q3. Do task notifications work on mobile? Task notifications typically work across web and mobile. Check your notification settings and mobile app configuration to ensure alerts are enabled.4 min read
- What is the focus area in strategy options? How to define users and create focus areas in Profit.co?The focus area will contribute to the growth of the company and give a clear vision of the goals so that progress can be assessed. Why this feature? Strategic Focus Areas help the management to process specific missions of the organization. It helps in achieving the business target and gives a clear direction of the goals so that progress can be measured easily. You can customize and can link focus areas with Directives and Priorities. Note: Only Super Users can define users to create Focus Areas. Step 1 Navigate to Settings → Strategy → Focus Areas from the left navigation panel. On the Focus areas page, enable the Focus Areas toggle. Once enabled you will see the Who can define section, click on the search icon and select the names of the ones whom you want to authorize to define the focus area. Note: You can also manage and customize your focus area layout using the Master Layout option. Step 2 Now you can create a Focus area by navigating to the Strategy → Focus Area from the left navigation panel. Click on the + icon to create a Focus Area. In the Create Focus Area page, fill in the necessary details and click on Create. Related Answer Post To learn more about the process of creating a Milestone in strategy, click here. 2 min read
- How does Profit.co allow users to stretch goals beyond 100%?Profit.co allows users’ to stretch goals or progress key results beyond 100% Why this Feature? "Stretch goals are often assumed to be impossible until a goal becomes possible,” - Andy Grove. Stretch goals force people to achieve something they never thought possible. A stretch goal is still a goal, and the best way to meet that goal is by defining the milestones to get there. Step 1 Navigate to Settings → OKRs → Authoring from the left navigation panel. In the Key Results page, enable the toggles under Check-in > 100% for the supported key result types. Step 2 Now check in to any of your key results beyond 100% to see how stretch goals work. Step 3 Profit.co also allows you to customize the Cap Progress Percentage to a certain % when you enable the key result to progress >100% on the same page. Related Answer Post To learn more about how to customize the Cap Progress Percentage for Key Result Type, click here.1 min read
- How the velocity in check-ins are calculated?In Profit.co, users have the ability to track the velocity of their progress toward achieving their (OKRs). Why this feature? Progress velocity helps individuals and teams track their advancement towards goals over time, providing a clear and quantitative measure of their performance. By regularly monitoring progress velocity, users gain real-time insights into whether they are on track or falling behind, allowing for timely adjustments and corrective actions. The velocity in check-ins is calculated as follows: Consider a Key Result “Increase # of Backlinks from 50 to 100 ”. The Actual Value is 62 and the Planned Value is 69. Hence the Progress Velocity will be calculated as, Progress Velocity = ((Actual Value - Start Value) / (Planned Value - Start Value)) * 100 Progress Velocity = ((62-50) / (69-50)) * 100 Progress Velocity = 64.24%1 min read
- How do I create measurements through Profit.co mobile application?Profit.co allows you to customize and create Measurements based on your requirements. Why this feature? Mobile phone applications play an incalculable role in our daily lives and activities. Mobile phones are no longer the common communication tool they once were, it has grown to be the center of attention and help both individuals and enterprises. Strategy measurement is used to measure the effectiveness of the objectives delivered on the expected results. Moreover, it organizes your business goals and also defines how they will be measured. To customize and create measurements follow the following steps. Step 1 To create and customize Measurements, Navigate to More option and click on Strategy Module. Click on the Fries menu icon in the top left corner. You can create a new Measurement by clicking on the + icon. Fill in the necessary details and click Create.1 min read
- How to set a sprint planner in Task Management?In Profit.co, you can create and configure a sprint planner within task management to organize tasks into focused, time-bound work cycles, helping teams improve efficiency, accountability, and iterative progress tracking. Table of Contents What is a sprint in Profit.co task management? How to enable and create a sprint in Profit.co? How to enable Sprints for a Workspace in Profit.co? How to assign a Sprint to a task in Profit.co? How to filter tasks by sprint in Profit.co? Best practices for using the Sprint Planner in Profit.co Related Questions Frequently Asked Questions What is a sprint in Profit.co task management? A Sprint in Profit.co is a predefined, short-term time period within Task Management during which a team focuses on completing a specific set of tasks. Each Sprint has a defined start date, end date, name, code, owner, and description, giving teams a structured time frame to plan, execute, and review their work in focused cycles. How to enable and create a sprint in Profit.co? Before assigning sprints to tasks, the sprint feature must be enabled and the sprint must be created from the settings panel. Step 1 Go to Settings → Tasks → Sprints from the left navigation panel. Enable the toggle for Sprints to activate the feature across your task management module. Click the + Create Sprint button. Enter the following details for the Sprint: Field Description Name The name of the Sprint (e.g., Sprint 1, Q2 Sprint) Code A short identifier code for the Sprint Start Date The date the Sprint begins End Date The date the Sprint ends Description A brief summary of the Sprint's goals or focus area Owner The team member responsible for managing the Sprint Click Create to save the Sprint. The Sprint will now be available for selection when creating or editing tasks. Note: You can also edit or delete any created Sprint from the Sprint Settings page at any time. How to enable Sprints for a Workspace in Profit.co? In addition to enabling Sprints globally in Settings, you must also activate the Sprint toggle at the Workspace level for tasks within that Workspace to support Sprint assignment. Step 1 Navigate to Tasks → Workspaces from the left navigation panel. Click "+ Create Workspace" or open an existing workspace to edit it. Within the Workspace creation or edit view, locate the Sprint toggle and enable it. Once enabled, all tasks within that workspace and its associated boards will support sprint assignment through a dropdown selection. How to assign a Sprint to a task in Profit.co? Once Sprints are enabled at both the Settings and Workspace level, you can assign a Sprint to any task within that Workspace or Board. Step 1 Navigate to the Workspace or Board where the task is located. Click on the task you want to assign a sprint to. Within the task detail view, locate the Sprint field. Click the dropdown and select the predefined sprint you want to assign to the task. Note: You can assign multiple Sprints to a single task if the task spans across more than one sprint cycle. How to filter tasks by sprint in Profit.co? Once tasks are assigned to sprints, you can sort and view tasks by sprint period directly from the workspace or board view. Step 1 Open the relevant Workspace or Board from the left navigation panel. In the Workspace or Board menu, click the Sprint dropdown filter. Select the specific Sprint you want to view tasks for. The task list will update to display only tasks belonging to the selected Sprint period. Best practices for using the Sprint Planner in Profit.co Define Sprint durations that match your team's natural delivery cadence. Two-week sprints are common for agile teams, while monthly sprints may suit operational teams better. Always assign a Sprint Owner to ensure someone is accountable for monitoring Sprint progress and removing blockers. Use the Sprint filter at the start of each cycle to review carry-over tasks from the previous sprint and prioritize them accordingly. Related Questions Click here to learn how to create a task from the List View in Profit.co. Frequently Asked Questions Q1. How do I enable the Sprint Planner in Profit.co? Navigate to Settings → Tasks → Sprints, enable the Sprints toggle, and click + Create Sprint to set up your first sprint with a name, code, start date, end date, description, and owner. Q2. How do I assign a Sprint to a task in Profit.co? Open the task within a Sprint-enabled Workspace or Board, locate the Sprint field in the task detail view, select the predefined Sprint from the dropdown, and save the task. Q3. Can I assign multiple Sprints to a single task in Profit.co? Yes. Profit.co allows you to assign multiple Sprints to a single task when the work spans more than one sprint cycle.5 min read
- How to move OKRs through Profit.co mobile application?Profit.co provides users with the flexibility to move Objectives and Key Results (OKRs) between employees, departments, and teams directly through the mobile application. This feature enables seamless reorganization of goals as priorities shift, team structures change, or responsibilities are redistributed, ensuring your OKR framework remains aligned with current business needs. Table of Contents What is the Move OKRs Feature? Why Use the Move OKRs Feature? How to Move OKRs Using Mobile Application Common Scenarios for Moving OKRs Best Practices for Moving OKRs Related Answer Posts Frequently Asked Questions What is the Move OKRs Feature? The Move OKRs feature allows users to transfer ownership of Objectives and Key Results from one employee, department, or team to another using the mobile application. This functionality includes a built-in approval workflow where the recipient can accept or reject the transferred OKR, ensuring proper accountability and acknowledgment. Why Use the Move OKRs Feature? Mobile Flexibility: Mobile phones have become essential tools in modern business, enabling critical operations anytime, anywhere Cross-Functional Collaboration: Facilitates easy transfer of goals across teams when projects require interdepartmental cooperation Goal Alignment: Ensures OKRs remain properly aligned with the right owners as organizational structures and priorities evolve Enhanced Transparency: Creates a clear audit trail of OKR ownership changes with built-in acceptance/rejection workflow How to Move OKRs Using Mobile Application Open the Profit.co mobile application and navigate to Menu from the left navigation panel. Select OKR and then choose All OKRs. Click on the OKRs you want to move. Tap on the Ellipsis icon (three dots) in the top right corner of the screen. Select the Move option from the dropdown menu. Choose the destination for your OKR by selecting: Employee: To move the OKR to a specific individual Department: To move the OKR to a different department Team: To move the OKR to another team A Confirmation pop-up will appear asking you to confirm the move action. Click Move to complete the process. Common Scenarios for Moving OKRs Organizational Restructuring: When departments merge or split, OKRs can be quickly reassigned to maintain continuity During leadership changes, strategic objectives can be transferred to new owners Team reorganizations require goal redistribution to reflect new reporting structures Role Changes and Transitions: Employee promotions or lateral moves necessitate transferring their previous OKRs During onboarding, relevant OKRs can be moved to new team members Project-Based Collaboration: Cross-functional projects may require moving OKRs to the team best positioned to execute As project phases change, ownership can shift to different departments Resource constraints may require redistributing goals to available team members Best Practices for Moving OKRs Communicate Before Moving: Discuss the move with the recipient before initiating to ensure alignment and acceptance Provide Context: Add comments or notes explaining why the OKR is being moved and what support is available Check Capacity: Ensure the recipient has the bandwidth and resources to take on additional goals Maintain Alignment: Verify that the moved OKR aligns with the recipient's role, department objectives, and strategic priorities Transfer Knowledge: Share relevant background information, progress history, and any obstacles encountered Related Answer Posts To learn how to create Objectives and Key Results using the mobile application, Click here Frequently Asked Questions Q1. Who can move OKRs in the mobile application? Users with appropriate permissions can move OKRs. Typically, this includes the OKR owner, managers, and administrators. Permission settings vary by organization. Q2. What happens to the progress and check-in history when an OKR is moved? All progress data, check-in history, comments, and attachments transfer with the OKR to maintain complete continuity and context for the new owner. Q3. Can I move an entire Objective with all its Key Results at once? Yes, moving an Objective automatically moves all associated Key Results to the new owner, maintaining the complete goal structure.4 min read
- How to set Goal Cadence in Profit.co?Profit.co enables administrators to define a structured Goal Cadence for employees - controlling when goals can be created, automatically inheriting manager goals to direct reports, and providing precise visibility into planning windows. Table of Contents What is Goal Cadence? Why Goal Cadence Matters How It Works - Step-by-Step Guide Goal Auto-Inheritance Best Practices for Goal Cadence Related Questions Frequently Asked Questions What is Goal Cadence? Goal Cadence is an admin-controlled configuration in Profit.co that restricts employees to creating goals only within a defined planning window. The window is anchored to a quarter or year, with a configurable start and end offset in days. The Goal Cadence section includes an Inherit Manager's Goals toggle that automatically assigns a manager's goals to subordinates after the cadence closes, and a Planning Horizon option in the Goal Authoring Window that displays exact start and end dates alongside each configured duration. Why Goal Cadence Matters Without a defined cadence, goal creation can occur at any time - resulting in misaligned timelines, inconsistent review cycles, and empty goal sheets when employees miss the planning window. Goal Cadence enforces a consistent rhythm across the organization. Capability Business Outcome Restricts goal creation window Ensures all employees create goals during the same planning period, maintaining cycle consistency. Auto-inherits manager goals Eliminates empty goal sheets by automatically assigning the manager's goals and existing progress to subordinates after the cadence closes. Eliminates manual goal duplication Admins no longer need to manually replicate goals down the hierarchy when subordinates miss the planning window. Precise window date display Automatically calculates and shows exact start and end dates for the authoring window, removing manual date calculations and reducing configuration errors. How It Works - Step-by-Step Guide Step 1 Go to Settings → Performance → Goals from the left navigation panel. In the General tab, click Show Advanced Options. Step 2 In the Goal Cadence section, enable the Restrict Goal to a specific timeframe toggle. Set the Window Starts value (e.g., 10 days before the beginning of a quarter). Set the Window Ends value (e.g., 30 days after the beginning of a quarter). It includes a Planning Horizon option that allows administrators to scope goal configuration to either a Quarter or a year. When the authoring duration is set (e.g., 30 days before the quarter starts and 10 days before it ends), the system automatically calculates and displays the exact start and end dates alongside the configured day values. Step 3 In the Windows Extensions section, use the Search bar to select employees who can extend the goal creation window beyond the default period. Set the Default Extension period in days for those employees. Step 4 In the Goal Cadence section, enable the Inherit Manager's Goals toggle. Once enabled, the system will automatically assign the manager's goals - including existing progress - to all direct subordinates who have not yet created any goals after the cadence closes. Goal Auto-Inheritance The Inherit Manager's Goals toggle activates automatic goal cascading for subordinates who have no goals after the cadence is closed. This feature operates under three simultaneous conditions: the goal planning window must have been enabled, the manager must have defined goals, and the cadence must be closed. When all three conditions are met and the toggle is enabled, Profit.co copies the manager's goals to all direct subordinates, including the manager's current progress. Subordinates can immediately begin working on and updating these inherited goals without any manual configuration from an admin. Required Condition Description Goal planning window enabled The authoring window must have been active. The manager has defined goals The manager must have at least one goal created within the cadence. Cadence is closed The goal creation window must be past its end date. Subordinate has no goals Auto-inheritance applies only to direct reports with an empty goal sheet. Best Practices for Goal Cadence Set the Window Starts value at least 10–14 days before the quarter begins to give employees adequate time to draft and submit goals before the planning window closes. Restrict Window Extensions to team leads or department heads only - granting extension access too broadly defeats the purpose of a controlled cadence. Enable Inherit Manager's Goals as a safety net rather than a default - pair it with communication nudges so subordinates are aware the window is closing before auto-inheritance triggers. Use the Planning Horizon's automatic date display to validate your configuration before saving - confirm the resolved dates match your intended planning calendar before publishing the cadence to the organization. Review the Goal Creation Limit (Individual Goals per Quarter) in the same settings panel to ensure the cap aligns with the number of goals that may be inherited from a manager, avoiding unintended limit conflicts. Related Questions Click here to learn more about how to set Goal Cadence in Profit.co Click here to learn more about how the Approval Flow for Goals work Click here to learn more about how to view the Goal Dashboard in Profit.co Frequently Asked Questions Q1. What happens if a subordinate already has one goal when the cadence closes - will their goals still be overwritten by the manager's goals? No. Goal Auto-Inheritance only applies to subordinates with zero goals. If a subordinate has created at least one goal - regardless of status - the manager's goals will not be assigned to them. Q2. Can subordinates edit or delete inherited goals after they are assigned? Yes. Once inherited, goals behave as standard employee goals. Subordinates can update progress, edit details, and continue check-ins on any inherited goal, subject to the organization's approval flow settings. Q3. If I change the Planning Horizon from Quarter to Year mid-configuration, will the displayed dates update automatically? Yes. The date display is dynamically calculated based on the selected Planning Horizon and the configured day offsets. Changing the horizon will immediately recalculate and display the updated start and end dates.5 min read
- Which Key Result type to choose?When you get started with OKRs, it seems like there is a lot to learn. Especially, how do you model key results? Is it even worth it to go through the learning process? Answer: Without a doubt! The learning curve is somewhat steep. But once you get past that stage, you'll be left wondering how we survived without these. One of the most intricate ideas in the OKR world is how to represent your key results. We know that there are 6 types of key results in Profit.co. But which type do you choose in a given situation? The simple decision-making flow shown below serves as a guide. The six key result types are, Percentage Tracked Milestone Tracked Task Tracked Increase KPI Decrease KPI Control KPI Can you measure your key outcome, or is tracking the only option? Some examples of measurables are revenue, the number of leads generated, reducing churn rate, increasing employee satisfaction, and so on, which can be measured using the KPIs. Profit.co also has more than 300+ KPIs built into the system by default. Non-measurable /Trackable key result types: Examples of non-measurables are hiring a sales manager, developing a sales plan, and penetrating a new region, which can be tracked using the trackable key results. Let's look at some non-measurables and how to track them in Profit.co. Percentage Tracked: Let’s take an example: Prepare a budget for the product launch or establish a sales process. While you can drill down and create steps to track, it might be preferable to simply indicate the status of the percentage completed. In this case, choosing the Percentage Tracked key result will be the right step. Milestone Tracked: A key result like “Hire VP” can actually have multiple steps like Prepare Job Description Source Candidates Assess Candidates Identify Top 3 Make Offer Start Candidate Since the Hire VP key result involves going through multiple steps before hiring the right person, the Milestone Tracked key result will be the correct approach. Task Tracked: Let’s take an example of a key result “Create 5 blogs related to KPIs” You can create Key Results using Task Tracking non-measurables. With this KR type, your tasks are directly linked to the created key result, allowing you to monitor their progress from the workspace via key results. Measurable key results: Increase KPI This can be used when you are trying to increase the value of a KPI. For example, you may use this option to measure revenue or increase the number of lead-generation activities that your organization focuses on. Depending on what you’re looking to increase, you can use Increase KPI to increase the value of a specific number, percentage, currency, time, etc… Decrease KPI In some instances, it may be best to lower the value of a KPI. For example, an organization may aim to reduce the employee attrition rate, reduce the customer churn rate, or reduce the number of issues in a test or product. With Decrease KPI, you can decrease the numeric value, percentage, currency, or time of the key result. Control KPI The Control KPI, allows you to keep the value of a KPI within a specific range, mostly above or below a certain amount. For example, if you want to control the employee training hours between 20-40 hours a month, and maintain the click per cost at $2 to $4, it can be measured using the control KPI measure type “In between” because you’re looking to maintain a range between certain values. Sometimes, It can be helpful to set goals from time to time. For example, you might aim at least 10,000 visits every week on your website. The "at least" measurement type in the control KPI can be used in this case to measure the visits. Consider the scenario where you want to enforce an upper limit. The key result to "Maintain APIs response at 400 milliseconds" is a classic example. In this case, you are measuring the API response which shouldn't go over 400 milliseconds. Here "at most" measurement type in Control KPI is the right choice to measure the value and progress the key result. Note: Control KPI can also be tracked in Numeric, Percentage, Currency, or Time. Related Answer Post To learn more about decrease KIP, click here.4 min read
- How to view the completed task count in Task Tracked Key Result?Profit.co provides an option to create task tracked key results. Task Tracked key result is one of the non-measurable ways how you can create the key results. Why this feature? Provides a clear, real-time view of how much work has been completed, allowing for accurate progress tracking against goals. Knowing how many tasks have been completed helps in managing deadlines and adjusting priorities as needed. Step 1 Create a key result using the form, and select the Task Tracked key result type. Select the associated tasks level and the tracking type as Completed Tasks % and add From to To values for the key result. Finally, create the key result. Note: You can also associate existing Workspace/Board to track the key result. Step 2 Under the Key Result name, click on the Tasks tab, to create a new task select + Create Task to add a new task. Step 3 For instance, in your Workspace/Board if you’re having five tasks. And you have moved three key result to Completed status. The progress will be 3. Related Blog Post To learn the process of completed task percentage, click here.1 min read
- How to create an OKR using templates?Profit.co provides an option to create OKRs using a template. Why this feature? This feature allows organizations to streamline the process of creating Objectives and Key Results (OKRs). It saves time and ensures consistency across the organization, while also offering a structured framework for setting meaningful and achievable goals. Step 1 Click the + Create Objective button and select the Step by Step Guide option from the dropdown menu. Step 2 On the Create Objective page, Click on the Create From Template tab. You will be getting a set of predefined templates. Choose the template that best suits your needs. Select the Target date and set Visibility for your Objective, you can Align your OKR to any other OKRs based on the organizational needs. After aligning the objective, Click on Complete. The newly created OKR will be reflected. Related Answer Post To learn about the process of creating a new OKR template, click here1 min read
- How do I create a team Objective using step by step guide?Profit allows users to create objectives using the Step by Step Guide. Why this feature? Objectives provide a clear understanding of what needs to be achieved, and they help to define the outcomes and goals that you want to accomplish. This feature provides an option for users to create Team Objectives using the Step by Step option. Note: You must be a member of the team to create team objectives. Step 1 Navigate to the OKR → My Team OKRs from the left navigation panel. Click on the + icon to Create Objective and select Step By Step Guide from the dropdown. Follow the below steps to create your Objective using the Step by Step method: In the first step set a name for your Objective, set the OKR Category, Associate Tags with your Objectives, select Objective examples or set it from a predefined template. In the second step set Target Dates for the Objectives as Quarterly, Yearly, or custom range basis. Also, you can set a custom range or newly generated period for the Objective. In the third step, you can Set Visibility for your Objective by selecting Public, Team, or Access List [with other Departments, Teams & Employees]. In the fourth step, you can change the Default Owner for the Objective. As a final step, you can Align your Team Objective to any other OKRs based on the organizational needs. After aligning the objective, click on Complete. Note: If you click on the Objective checkbox it will be aligned as a Key Result. If you click on the Key Result checkbox it will be aligned as a Sub-Key Result. Related Answer Post To know more on how to add weightage to the Objective, click here.2 min read
- How to add a Matrix Manager to a user in Profit.co?Profit.co provides an option to add Matrix Managers to employees in the organization. Why this feature? Similar to managers, Matrix Managers can be added to an employee to monitor and assess their performance. Matrix Managers can evaluate the performance and provide ratings/comments on the Questions, Competencies, Goals, and OKRs based on the configuration. Step 1 Navigate to Settings → User Management from the left navigation panel. On the Active Users page, edit the employee for whom you want to add the Matrix Manager. Step 2 On the Update User page, select the matrix manager and click Update. Once you click on Update, the selected employee will be added as a Matrix Manager to the user. Related answer Post To learn more about how to create employee job grades, click here.1 min read
- How to align an OKR to multiple OKRs from various levels?Profit.co provides an option to align an OKR to multiple OKRs from various levels. Why this feature? Aligning an OKR to multiple OKRs enhances cross-team collaboration and ensures better visibility and accountability. It helps drive strategic alignment and ensures teams contribute effectively to broader business goals. Step 1 For instance, let’s bottom-up align an Objective. You can align the Objective as a key result or sub-key result to multiple OKRs. Similarly, you can also bottom-up align your key result to multiple different level OKRs as a key result or sub-key result. Note: For both the Objective and Key Result bottom-up alignment process, if you click the Objective checkbox your OKR will be aligned as Key Result. If you click on the Key Result check box your OKR will be aligned as a sub-key result. Related Blog Post To learn more about Bottom-Up Alignment, click here.1 min read
- How do automatic ratings work in Performance Reviews?Profit.co provides an option to Automate ratings for Goals, and OKRs while performing assessments for the Performance Review. Why this feature? In the Performance Review while doing the assessment, according to Goals and OKRs progress cutoff percentage, the ratings will be automatically updated. The Super Users can set automate ratings for Self Assessment, Manager Assessment and Matrix Manager Assessment. Step 1 While performing the assessments the Rating Slider will be automatically progressed according to the Cutt Off Percentage. Related Blog Post To learn how to enable Automate Ratings, click here.1 min read
- How to enable automate ratings in Profit.co?Profit.co provides an option to Automate ratings for Goals and OKRs. Why this Feature? In the Performance Review, during the assessment process, the Goals and OKRs progress will be automatically updated. Users can add new ratings and cut-off percentages for automated ratings. Users can also allow override ratings for the assessments. Step 1 Navigate to Settings → Performance → Reviews from the left navigation panel and switch to the Review Templates tab. Click on the Edit icon of your preferred template. Step 2 In the Review Process section, click on the Edit icon for the assessment you wish to automate ratings. Step 3 In the Assessment Options page, enable the OKRs and Goals toggle and select Automate Ratings. Step 4 In the Goals panel, users can Enable Automate Ratings and Allow Override Ratings. Users can also Add new Goal Cutoff Percentages and Ratings. Once done, click on Update. In the OKRs panel, users can select Assessment Context as OKRs and Key Results as well as OKRs & Key Results combined. Users can also Enable Automate Ratings and Allow Override Rating. Users can Add new OKRs Cutoff Percentages and Ratings. Once done, click on Update. Related Answer Post To learn more about How to link KRs with goals to automate the process, click here.2 min read
- How to associate Key Results/Sub Key Results with goals to automate the process in Profit.co?Profit.co provides an option to associate key results/subkey results with your goals to automate the progress of your goals. Why this feature? By associating Key Results/Sub Key Results with goals, you can automate the progress of your goals via the check-ins that you make. Navigate to Performance → Goals from the left menu. Choose the goal for which you want to link the KRs/Sub KRs. In the edit goal page, click on the Key Result Add button. A list of key results and subkey results will appear on the Associated Key Results page. Select from it. Associate a key result/sub-key result for this Goal. Finally, click Add. Now the subkey result will be associated with the particular goal. According to the check-ins made in the sub-key result, the progress will be automatically updated in the Goals. Note: If you associate a parent KR, the Goal progress will be updated according to the check-ins you have done in the parent KR. Related Blog Post To learn about the process of creating new goals, click here.1 min read
- What are the useful Insights, Analytics, and Reports available in Profit.co?By using these features, you can track and view the progress of OKRs, tasks, and performance reviews in different ways, enabling better data visualization, decision-making, and performance tracking across teams. Alignments - This dashboard visualizes an OKR cascade tree from an up-down or down-up perspective in a neat fashion. It allows management levels to quickly jump in to see the entire company’s progress or shortcomings, and jump in and drill into a specific individual’s OKR to see what went wrong and to get back up and running there. Additionally, it allows all employees, regardless of their role within the organization, to see how their goals align with their manager’s, department’s, and company's level goals, boosting their level of engagement and scope of focus. Progress - The Department progress dashboard provides a multifaceted view of the department's OKRs progress. Users can view the status and track the progress of departmental OKRs from the Department’s progress dashboard. Heat Map - It visually represents the performance of departments and teams, highlighting OKR progress in an easily understandable format. It helps users quickly identify areas of strength and improvement within the organization. Hierarchy Hierarchy refers to the structured arrangement of roles or levels within an organization, where each level has authority over the ones below it. It helps define reporting relationships, decision-making power, and responsibilities. Organization Hierarchy - It refers to the system of structuring employees and roles within a company, outlining the flow of authority and responsibility. It helps define reporting lines, decision-making processes, and organizational structure from top management to entry-level employees. Department Hierarchy - Department hierarchy refers to the organizational structure that defines the relationships and authority within departments, including sub-departments. It outlines the flow of responsibilities, reporting lines, and decision-making authority across different levels within the department and its sub-units. OKR Cockpit – Typically a C-level or Director-level view, the OKR Cockpit showcases the overall progress your organization has made in real-time, with historical comparisons available through a time period filter. It includes pie charts based on OKR status, bar graphs for OKRs by department, and other configurable views. Each graph is interactive, allowing users to drill down into specific OKRs for a more detailed analysis. Task Dashboard - Task Dashboard provides a centralized view of tasks, showing progress status. It helps teams stay organized by visualizing task completion, assignments, and overall workflow efficiency. HR Cockpit - HR Cockpit refers to a centralized dashboard that enables HR teams to monitor, analyze, and optimize key HR metrics.It provides real-time data visualization through charts, graphs, and other insights, helping HR professionals make informed decisions related to employee performance, engagement, and organizational development. Related Answer Post To learn the process of downloading reports for Tasks, click here. To learn about Performance Trend Report, click here. To download the reports of Pulse Survey, click here.3 min read
- What are KR Associated Goals in Profit.co?Profit.co allows you to view the Goals associated with any Key Results that are summarised to give you an overview. Why this feature? This allows users to view all the goals with their corresponding key results from a single window. This feature enables users to access and monitor the status of the goals and their key results progress assigned to them. Users can filter participants and periods to view the Goals associated with the key results. Step 1: Navigate to Performance → Cokcpit from the left navigation panel. Switch to the Dashboard folder → Golas Sub folder in the cockpit. Step 2: Scroll down to the KR Associated Goals widget, where users can view the KR Name, Assignee, and # of Goals. Users can also monitor the status of their Goals. Users can select the Participants filter to view specific employees and departmental Goals. Users can use the Period filter to access specific periods of time. Users can use the Export icon to download the Goals and KR Progress. Related Answer Posts To know more about How to view My Orgs' Goals in Profit.co, click here.1 min read
- How to restrict users from creating Goals within a specific time period?Profit.co provides an option to set restrictions for the users who create Goals on a specific time period. Why this feature? Restricting goal creation during specific time periods helps ensure that goals are set only during designated planning cycles, maintaining alignment with organizational timelines. Limiting goal creation ensures that employees focus on executing current goals instead of creating new ones during critical periods, avoiding unnecessary disruptions. Step 1 Navigate to Settings → Performance → Goals from the left navigation panel. Under the General category click on “Show Advance Options”. Under the Goal Cadence, enable the “Restrict Goal to specific timeframe” toggle and set the days for restricting the Profit Users to create Goals. For instance, if we set 10 days for the Window Starts, the Profit User can start 10 days before the new Quarter to create a new Goal. Also at the same time, if we set 20 days for the Window Ends, the Profit User can’t create new Goals after 20 days from the beginning of a New Quarter. Note: If the Profit user wants to create Goals within the specific time frame the normal approval process will be followed.If the Profit User wants to create a new Goal beyond the timeframe, they will not have access to create new goals. Step 2 Under the Windows extensions section, Add approvers to People who can extend the window. The approvers will be added as shown below, Note: The user needs to get approval to create a new goal after the Extension Period. Now the user will have access to create Goals. Related Answer Post To learn the process of creating new Goals, click here.2 min read
- What is a Dual Manager Assessment?Profit.co provides an option for the matrix managers to perform some actions in the Performance Review. Why this Feature? Similarly, like normal managers, the Matrix Managers can also see the individual’s review to enter the rating/comments on the Questions, Competencies, Goals, and OKRs based on the configuration. Also, they can view the Self and Peer Assessment while performing their matrix manager assessment. Both of the manager's assessments are mentioned as Dual Managers. Step 1: Go to Settings → Performance → Reviews. Note: Only Superusers will be able to access the settings. Enable the toggle for Matrix Manager Assessment. Click on the pencil icon to customize the Matrix Manager Assessment process. Step 2 For instance, let's say that the user Bertram Gilfoyle is the matrix manager for the profit user Richard Hendricks. Once the user and peer perform the assessment, the matrix manager can view it through Performance → My Org’s Review. Note: The dual manager can view the Self, Peer Assessment while doing the Matrix Manager assessment. Also, they can view the Goals and OKRs if they are included in the Performance Review. Related Blog Post, To learn more about adding matrix manager to a user, click here.1 min read
- What is a Matrix Manager Assessment?Profit.co provides an option for the Matrix Managers to evaluate the performance of the employees through Performance Reviews. Why this Feature? Similarly to executives, Matrix Managers can also review individual’s performance in the organization. They can provide ratings/comments on the Questions, Competencies, Goals, and OKRs based on the configuration. Matrix Managers can view the Self and Peer Assessments while performing their matrix manager assessment. Step 1 Navigate to Settings → Performance → Review Templates from the left navigation panel. Click on the Edit icon of the Review template you want to make the changes to. Step 2 In the Edit Review Template page, select the Review Process tab to enable the Matrix Manager Assessment toggle and click on the icon to Edit. Step 3 In the Matrix Manager Assessment Options panel, you can customize the matrix manager assessments by enabling the toggles for performance review assessments based on your organizational needs. For instance, Let’s enable the following toggles: Matrix manager assessment cannot be submitted until all peer assessments are submitted Matrix Manager can provide rating only for Matrix Manager's OKRsand, Matrix Manager can provide rating only for Matrix Manager's Goal. Users can customize the Performance Review Assessment, Manager Nomination, and Who can view matrix manager assessment options according to their organizational needs. Note: Since the first toggle is enabled, the managers and peers cannot submit their assessment until all the matrix managers involved in the review process submit their assessment. Step 4 Navigate to Settings → Performance → Reviews from the left navigation panel. In the Reviews page, select the Summary Info tab and enable the Matrix Manager Overall Rating toggle. Step 5 To add a Matrix Manager to an initiated review, navigate to Performance → HR Administration from the left navigation panel. In the Reviews page, select a review you wish to add matrix manager assessment to an employee. In the HR Dashboard, click on the icon to Add Matrix Manager. Select employees from the drop-down menu and click on Add. Step 6 The Matrix Manager will be notified in the Home for the assessment.Click on the which ill redirect to the Performance page. Note: The Matrix manager can view the Self, Peer Assessment while doing the Matrix Manager assessment. Also, they can view the Goals and OKRs if they are included in the Performance Review. The Matrix Manager’s Overall Ratings will be displayed in Review Summary Information as shown below. Related Answer Post To learn more about how to fill up a manager assessment, click here.3 min read
- How a user can set an approver while creating a new Goal in Profit.co?Profit.co provides users an option to set an approver who approves the newly created Goal by the user. Why this feature? Setting an approver ensures that goals are reviewed and validated by the appropriate person, ensuring alignment and accountability across teams. Assigning an approver, creates a clear ownership structure, making it easier to track goal progress and ensure timely approvals for goal alignment. Step 1 Go to Settings → Performance → Goals from the left navigation panel. Under the Approval Flow section enable the toggle “Allow employees to define their own approvers.” Note: Only Super Users can enable the toggle for the Profit users to set their own approvers for Goals. Step 2 While creating a new Goal the Profit users can set their own Approvers and Submit for Approval. Note: The approver can check-in the Pending Approval Goals menu and approve the Goal. After the approval, the user can make progress towards the goal. Related Answer Post To learn more about the approval flow for Goals, click here.1 min read
- How to set mandatory comments for specific ratings in the Performance Review?Profit.co provides an option to set mandatory comments for the specific ratings when the user performs the assessment in Performance Reviews. Why this feature? By setting mandatory comments the users can identify the reason why the other users have provided us with different ratings for the Competencies, OKRs, and Goals in the Performance Reviews. Note: Only the Super Users can set the Mandatory comments. We can set Mandatory comments on, Self Assessments Manager Assessments Peer Assessments External Reviewer Assessments Matrix Manager Assessments Step 1 Navigate to Settings → Performance → Review Templates from the left navigation panel. Switch to the Reviews tab and edit the Self-Assessment. Step 2 In the Competencies section, set the Satisfactory as a mandatory comment for the rating. After enabling the Mandate Comments, click on Apply. After setting the mandate comments, close the Assessment menu and click Update. Step 3 While performing the self-assessment, if the user gives the rating Satisfactory, the user performing the self-assessment will get a red outline in the input box to provide the comment. If the user tries to submit the assessment without providing a comment, the user will get an alert message to provide a comment. Note: You can now set minimum and maximum character limits for mandatory comments in reviews to keep feedback clear and focused.2 min read
- How do you Reflect/Reset OKRs with Sub KRs?Profit.co allows you to reflect on your OKRs to help you check whether you are on the right track and reset for the next quarter. Why this Feature? This feature enables you to reflect on the achievements for the current quarter and apply the learnings to reset them for the next quarter. Promotes a culture of ongoing learning and adaptation by refining goals based on past performance. Revisiting OKRs with their Sub KRs sharpens focus on what has worked well and what needs adjustments. Step 1 To enable Reflect/Reset navigate to Settings → OKRs → Authoring → Reflect/Reset. Enable the Reflect/Reset toggle. Click on the Question Builder. Note: Only Super Users can enable the Reflect/Reset option. And set the questions for Reflection. You can also restrict the employees to do Reflect/Reset for the OKRs in your organization using the Reflect/Reset Timeframe. Step 2 To Reflect/Reset the key result level with sub-key results navigate to the OKR and click the Parent Key Result. Step 3 In the Parent Key Result overview page, click on the Reflect/Resets tab. On the Reflect/Resets page, you will find the selected OKR with the Reflect and Reset button separately on the right side. Click on the Reflect button first. Step 4 You will be directed to a Reflection Questions page, here you can find a list of questions to reflect upon. Once you have completed answering all the questions click on the Reflect button. Step 5 There are four types of resets available for the Key Results with the Key Results: Extend as is Modify & Continue Add to Backlog Complete & Close Extend as is The "Extend as is" an option can be selected if the key result is incomplete but still relevant to the next quarter. The Check-in Frequency can be changed under this option. Add to Backlog If the key result is not relevant for the upcoming quarter or year the "Add to Backlog" option can be selected even if the key result is completed or not completed. Complete & Close The "Complete & Close" option allows a key result to be completed and closed for the current quarter and not continue for the next quarter. Modify & Continue The Modify & Continue option allows you to change the value of the key metric and push the Key Result to the next period. Step 6 We will have a key result Reset using the action Reset & Continue as shown below. Once the Reset is done. It will be displayed in the Reset Overview. The Parent Key result will reset and present in the list view with the Target Period of the next quarter as shown in the below image. Related Blog Post To know more about Reflect/Reset in the OKR world, click here.3 min read
- How to change the assignment approach for the Key Results?Profit.co provides an option to change the assignment approach by assigning a Key Result as an Objective or Key Result / sub-key Results in the Alignment. Why this Feature? By using this feature, the Objective owner can directly change the Assignment Approach of the Key results. Changing the assignment approach for Key Results enhances accountability by assigning clear ownership and improves collaboration by allowing multiple contributors to track progress effectively. It also ensures better alignment with organizational goals and provides flexibility in tracking performance. Step 1 To change the assignment approach of any key result, navigate to the All My OKRs page, click on the Edit page of the Key Result, and change the Assignment Approach. Note: We can't change the Assignment approach if the key result has already been assigned to the users. Related Blog Post To learn more about Top-down and bottom-up alignment, click here.1 min read
- How to override weights at the review level in Profit.co?Why this Feature? This feature enables users to override the weights distributed for Goals and OKRs in the review level. Employees can define the weights based on the time spent on their Goals and OKRs on each review level while performing assessments. The calculation for Overall Ratings & Overall Percentage is based on the individuals given weights for their Goals and OKRs. Step 1 Navigate to Settings → Performance → Review Templates from the left navigation panel. Click on the Edit icon of the Review template you want to make the changes to. Step 2 In the Edit Review Template page, click on the Scoring Buckets tab to enable the Scoring Buckets toggle, now click on the Show Advanced Options button. Step 3 Enable the Allow override weights at review level toggle on the scoring bucket section. Users can restrict employees weight distribution to sum total of 100% or 1, which prevents them from submitting their self-assessment if they don't meet the set condition. by enabing the Prevent employees from submitting their self-assessment if the weights do not add upto 100% toggle. Click on the icon to Edit and allow employees to override the weights for Goals and OKRs. For instance, Let’s allow override weights for Goals. Click on the icon to Edit. Step 4 A side panel will appear. Enable the Allow the employees to specify the granular weights for Goal Performance Assessment toggle and click Update. Step 5 Navigate to Performance → My Reviews from the left navigation panel.On the Active page, select the Review you want to perform an assessment. Step 6 In the selected assessment, scroll down to Goals and add Weights. Note: The cumulative score of the weight distribution should always be rounded off to 1. The distribution of weights throughout the assessment for Goals, OKRs, and Competencies will be updated automatically and displayed as shown below. Related Answer Post To learn more about defining weights at the Individual Competency level in Profit. co, click here.2 min read
- How to customize the Review Summary Box for Performance Reviews in Profit.co?Profit.co allows users to customize their Review summary box that reflects the performance evaluation scores and ratings of the employee. Why this Feature? Review summary information contains summary boxes that give users a magnified look at the performance scores and ratings. The Review summary box helps users to understand the overall evaluation of the performance review based on the Managers and Peers Rating as well as OKR and Goals scores. Users can now customize the label based on organizational needs. Note: Only Super Users can customize the Review Summary box. Step 1 Navigate to Settings → Performance → Reviews from the left navigation panel and switch to the Summary Info tab. Step 2 On the Summary Info page, click on the Edit icon. You can also Disable the specific summary boxes according to organizational needs. For instance, Let’s customize the OKR Score. Step 3 In the OKR Score side panel, you can select the label as Ranking or Rating from the drop-down menu. And also you can set weights for calculating the OKRs Score. You can set the visibility option for showing the score to those specific users who have performed in the Performance Review. Finally, Update the changes you have made. Step 4 Navigate to Performance → Reviews from the left navigation panel. On the Reviews page, select any review for assessment. The customized Review Summary Box will be displayed in Review Summary Information as shown below. Related Answer Post To learn more about how to add Star Rating in Performance Review, click here. To know how the calculation process of the Summary Information, click here.2 min read
- What are Templates used for? When and where do I use Templates?OKR template is an exclusive feature of Profit.co that allows you to create standard templates for OKRs which will be available for all the employees while creating OKRs. Why this feature? OKR template helps you to quickly select and create an OKR that closely matches your objectives. You can either use the key results as it is in the objective or you can edit them according to your goals. Step 1: Navigate to All my OKRs → Create OKRs → Step by step guide Step 2: You can create your own objectives and key results, or else you can also select from the existing templates to create OKRs. To create from templates, click Create from Template. You can select from the list of templates available in the right panel to create the OKRs. Once you have selected the template for creating OKRs, you can define the target date, visibility, and alignments of the newly created OKRs based on your requirement. Related Answer Post: To know more about How to create an OKR template, click here Related Blog Posts: To know more about How does Profit.co enables users to clearly define their OKRs, click here1 min read
- How to associate Subkey Results with goals to automate the process in Profit.co?Profit.co provides an option to associate subkey results with your goals to update the progress of your goals automatically. Earlier only key results can be associated with goals, but now users can associate the sub key results also while creating goals. Why this Feature? If your sub key result and goals are interconnected then you can link both. By Associating Sub Key Results with goals you can automate the progress of your goals via the check-ins that you make in sub key results, also you can precisely achieve your goal on time with your associated sub key results. Note: The sync of progress will happen only from OKRs to goals and not the other way around. Step 1 Navigate to Performance→ Goals→ My Goals from the left menu. Step 2 Choose the goal for which you want to link Sub key results and click on that goal. Step 3 In the edit goal page click on the Associate KR button. Step 4 A list of key results and subkey results will appear on the Associated Keyresult Page, select from it. Step 5 Once you select the subkey result that you want to associate with your goal, click Add. . Step 6 Now the subkey result will get associated with the particular goal. Step 7 Now you can see that the progress made in the subkey result is reflected in the goal. Step 8 On My Goals page, You can view the associated KRs and SubKRs with a count of the total number of associated KRs and sub-KRs. Click on the count icon to view all the KRs associated with goals. Related Blog Post, To learn about the process of creating new goals, click here.2 min read
- How to fix Administrative Errors while initiating a Performance Review?In Profit.co, Performance Reviews are evaluations based on Competencies, Goals, OKRs, and Q&As. This provides an opportunity for the organization to assess the employees' Quality of work, Skills, and Performance. While performing Assessment reviews, the user may encounter administrative errors based on the following scenarios. Case 1: Errors in Competency The user can encounter errors while creating competencies for The Job Title, Department, and Grades. This can be configured by Settings → User Management → Active Users. Case 2: Errors in Goals The user may face the above error if the Goals toggle is Disabled in the Assessment level of the Performance Review process. The employee may also face the same error if the Goals Period of the employee does not match with the Assessment Performance Review Period. The employee may also face the same error if the Goals Toggle in the main menu is Disabled. Case 3:Errors in OKRs The user may face the above error if the OKRs toggle is Disabled in the Assessment level of the Performance Review Process. The employee may also face the same error if the OKRs Period of the employee does not match with the Assessment performance Review Period. The employee may also face the same error if the Include OKRs in performance review for assessment in the main menu is Disabled. Case 4: Errors in Q&As The user may face the above error if the Q&A toggle is Disabled in the Assessment level of the Performance Review Process. Related Answer posts: To learn more about how to include OKR in Performance Review for performing assessment, click here. To learn more about how to link goals with performance reviews, click here.2 min read
- How do I get Email Notifications for Task Assignments?In Profit.co, we can customize and send email notifications whenever a new task is assigned to the assignee by enabling the Email Notifications toggle in the Action Center. Why this Feature? When the user assigns a new task, the assignee will get an instant notification and will be able to view the task assigned. How to enable the Notification? Step 1 Navigate to Settings → General → Notification from the left navigation panel. You will be landed on the Summary page. Before you enable email notification for tasks, make sure to enable the following toggle on the Summary page. Now switch to the Action Center tab and select the Task tab. Click on the Edit icon for the Task Assignment Request menu. Step 2 Click on the toggle to Enable Email Notification design the notification message using the attributes, and finally, click Update. Related Answer Post To learn the process of setting email notifications for the events in Goals, click here. To learn how to enable and disable the action center and email notifications, click here.1 min read
- How does the External Reviewers option work in Profit.co?Profit.co provides an option to perform the assessment by an external employee to another user. Why this feature? Similarly, like Peer Assessments, externals can perform assessments if they are requested by any other employees. Note: Only Super User have access to enable the option for External Reviewers Step 1 Navigate to Settings → Performance → Reviews from the left navigation panel and switch to the Review Templates tab. Click the Edit icon on your preferred template. On the Edit Review Template page, switch to the Review Process tab. Under the Review Process menu enable the toggle for External Reviewers Assessment. Step 2 Click on the Edit icon to modify the options in External Reviewers Assessment. Note: Users can now configure which sections of the performance review can be shared with external reviewers, including OKRs, Goals, Tasks, Competencies, and Q/A, enhancing the external reviewer functionality. If a Performance Review is initiated, HR can set users to perform the External Reviewer's Assessment through the Performance Review Dashboard. Add the name of the user and enter the email address. Note: Similarly the user and the reporting manager can request other users for External Reviewers Assessment. Finally, click Add. Step 3 Once the External Reviewers are approved to provide feedback, the individuals will be notified via email. In the notification email, the external reviewers will get the link to provide feedback for the individuals. Once the external reviewers click the link, it’ll redirect to the assessment page to provide feedback. Related Blog Post To learn more about the process of secondary reviewer assessment, click here.2 min read
- How do I view the tasks I assigned to others?Profit.co provides an option to view the task that you have assigned to other members. Why this feature? By using this feature you can view the task that you have assigned to others. It enhances transparency and accountability by allowing team members and managers to track progress and ensure alignment with goals. It fosters collaboration, as team members can see each other's tasks and offer support. Note: All the Profit. co users can assign tasks to any team member. Step 1 Navigate to Tasks → My Space and switch to "My Tasks for Others." You can then view the assigned tasks. Related Answer Post To learn the process of adding subtasks, click here. To learn the benefits of Task Management, click here.1 min read
- How to clone an OKR along with the Tasks associated with the Key Result?Profit.co lets you clone a task-tracked Key Result along with its associated tasks — reusing an existing OKR and task structure so you can replicate proven setups across teams or cycles without rebuilding from scratch. Table of Contents What is KR Cloning for Task-Tracked Key Results? Why KR Cloning Matters How It Works (Step-by-Step Guide) Cloning Behavior: Before vs. After the Update Best Practices for Cloning Task-Tracked Key Results Related Questions Frequently Asked Questions Quick AnswerTo clone a task-tracked Key Result, navigate to OKRs, click the More icon (⋯) next to the KR, and select Clone. In the pop-up, choose the task attributes you want to carry over (Assignees, Priority, Status, Tags, KR associations, etc.). Profit.co automatically creates a new board named "Board Name (Copy)" with duplicated tasks assigned unique IDs. What is KR Cloning for Task-Tracked Key Results? Cloning a task-tracked Key Result creates a complete duplicate of the KR along with its associated task board. The cloned KR gets its own independent board — named "Board Name (Copy)" — and each task receives a new, unique task ID, making the clone fully separate from the original. Users can control which task attributes carry over during the clone: Assignees, Priority, Status, Tags, KR associations, and more. Why KR Cloning Matters By using this feature, you can bring the same tasks that were associated with the original Key Result directly into the cloned KR — no manual re-linking required. Instead of creating similar OKRs and tasks from scratch, you can reuse an existing structure and carry forward only the task details that are relevant to the new KR's context. How It Works (Step-by-Step Guide) Step 1: Navigate to OKRs Go to the OKRs module and locate the task-tracked Key Result you want to clone. Click on the More icon (⋯) next to the Key Result. Select Clone from the dropdown menu, then click OKRs with Task to include the associated tasks in the clone. Step 2: Select Task Attributes to Clone A pop-up appears asking: "What would you like to clone?" Select the task attributes you want to carry forward — options include: Assignees, Priority, Status, Tags, KR associations, and more. Step 3: Confirm and Review the Cloned KR Profit.co automatically creates a new board named "Board Name (Copy)" with all selected task details duplicated. Each task in the new board is assigned a fresh, unique task ID. The cloned KR appears on the OKRs list page with progress starting at zero. Cloning Behavior: Before vs. After the Update The scope of what gets cloned depends on how the task is associated: Task Association What Gets Cloned Task associated with a Workspace The entire workspace is cloned along with the board and all tasks Task associated with a Board inside an existing Workspace Only the board is cloned; it remains within the same workspace Best Practices for Cloning Task-Tracked Key Results Review task attribute selections carefully before confirming — only carry forward attributes (Assignees, Priority, Status) that are directly relevant to the new KR's context. Rename the cloned board immediately after creation; the default name "Board Name (Copy)" is a placeholder and should reflect the new KR's scope. Reassign task owners in the cloned board to the team responsible for the new KR, especially if Assignees were carried over from the original. Verify that the cloned KR's progress shows zero before sharing it with the team — confirm no carry-over from the original. Use cloning to replicate proven KR structures across departments, then adjust task details (deadlines, priorities) to fit the new period's goals rather than building from scratch. Related Questions Click here to learn more about How does the KR Clone feature work in Profit.co? Click here to learn more about How to clone/copy OKRs in Profit.co? Click here to learn more about How do I create a task tracked key result in Profit.co? Frequently Asked Questions Q1. Does the cloned KR retain the progress of the original? Yes. The cloned KR retains the progress of the original KR. Q2. What happens if the original KR's task is part of a workspace — is the entire workspace cloned? Yes. If the task is associated with a workspace, the entire workspace is cloned. If the task belongs to a board within an existing workspace, only that board is cloned within the same workspace. Q3. Can I choose not to clone any task attributes and get a bare clone? Yes. The attribute selection pop-up allows you to proceed without selecting any attributes, giving you a clone with task structure but no inherited details from the original. Execute your strategy with confidence Connect OKRs, tasks, and teams in one place with Profit.co Start Free Trial | Book a Demo4 min read
- How to edit a Key Result in Profit.co?Profit.co provides an option to edit key results from the OKR view menu. Why this feature? Allows teams to adjust Key Results in response to changing business priorities or new information. Ensures that OKRs reflect current goals and metrics, maintaining their relevance. Facilitates precise monitoring of progress by keeping Key Results up-to-date. Step 1 Hover your cursor on the key result and click on the icon to edit. After making the changes click on Update. Related Blog Post To learn the process of editing an Objective, click here.1 min read
- How to edit an Objective in Profit.co?Profit.co provides an option to edit the Objectives from the OKR view menu. Why this feature? Editing objectives allows users to adjust goals based on changing priorities or new insights, ensuring that the OKRs align with evolving business needs. By editing objectives, teams can stay aligned with organizational goals, ensuring continuous improvement and clear tracking of progress toward key results. Navigate to the OKRs page from the left navigation panel. Click on the Edit icon of an objective, make the required changes, and click Update. Related Answer Post To learn the process of editing a key result, click here.1 min read
- What is Goal Authoring Status in Profit.co?Profit.co provides a new dashboard view named Goal Authoring Status. Why this feature? It helps track where each goal stands in the goal-setting process, ensuring transparency and accountability. Managers and team members can collaborate effectively to ensure goals are aligned with organizational priorities before finalization Step 1 Go to Performance → Dashboard → Goal Insights from the left navigation panel. Here you can see the number of goals assigned to each employee's count in the graph view format. We have shown a number of employees who did and did not enter goals into the system and are able to filter down for employees who submitted their goals to view approvals completed and not completed in the Donut graph view and the count of goals and employees in a bar chart view. Also, you can see the count of goals assigned to each user under the Users List. Click on the ellipsis icon to view the Goals and other information like Target Date, Weight, Status..etc. Related Blog Post To learn about the process of sharing goals with others, click here.1 min read
- How to enable Overall rating in Performance Review and what is the use of it?Profit.co provides an option to enable/disable the toggle for the Overall rating while performing the self-assessment. Why this feature? In Self Assessment Overall Rating is calculated as an average of the rating on each goal. Once this is enabled then the overall rating option will be displayed in the self-assessment and the score will display the average of the goals given by the individual. This option will be enabled for both the standard and affinity level reviews Step 1 Navigate to Settings → Performance from the left navigation panel, and switch to the Review Templates tab. Click on the Edit icon of the Review template you want to make the changes to. Step 2 Switch to the Review Process tab, and click on the icon to edit the Self Assessment menu. Enable the toggle overall rating under the "Performance Review Assessment includes" section. After enabling the toggle close the Self Assessment menu and click Update. Step 2 When a user performs a self-assessment the Overall Rating progress bar will be reflected. Also when the manager performs the assessment the Overall Rating progress bar will be reflected.1 min read
- How to submit all goals at once for approval?Profit.co provides an option to submit all goals at once for approval. Why this Feature? This feature allows the users to submit all Goals at once and it can be sent for approval by clicking the Send for Approval button. Step 1: Navigate to Performance → Goals from the left navigation panel and switch to My Goals tab. Step 2: On the My Goals page, click on the Goal Name option to select the all goals and select the Send for Approval button. Related Answer Posts, To learn about the process of creating Goals, click here. To learn about the process of setting weights for Goals, click here.1 min read
- How to enable the Add Workspace/Board creating option under a Key Result?Profit.co provides an option to enable/disable adding workspaces/boards options in the dropdown while creating a key result. Why this feature? Enabling this feature allows teams to easily create and link workspaces or boards, ensuring seamless collaboration and clear task organization under each Key Result. By associating workspaces or boards with specific Key Results, teams can stay focused on their objectives, driving better alignment and faster progress toward goals. Step 1 Navigate to Settings → OKRs → Authoring from the left navigation panel. Switch to the Key Results tab, and enable the Workspace/Board option to create key results. Step 2 You will be able to see the option, while creating the Key Result. Related Answer Post To learn more about the process of creating a Workspace/Board under an OKR, click here.1 min read
- How to view the Individual OKRs rank wise?Profit. has a provision to rank by Objectives and Key Results apart from Ranking at levels. Why this feature? Viewing individual OKRs rank-wise allows managers and teams to identify high-priority objectives and allocate resources effectively to meet goals. Rank-wise visualization provides insights into the performance of each OKR, helping organizations focus on areas needing improvement or further attention. Step 1 To enable OKR Ranking, navigate to Settings → OKRs → Authoring from the left navigation panel. Switch to the General tab and enable the OKR Ranking toggle. Step 2 After enabling and setting up the OKR Ranking, you’ll be able to see the rank number on the Objectives and Key results. If you mouse hover over the ranking, it will show the rank name defined.1 min read
- How can I add users to my organization in Profit.co?Profit.co allows you to add users as a process to meet your business goals by working together as a team in your organization. Why this feature? With this feature, you can add users on the active user's page when there is a newly joined employee in your team/organization. You can add their role, job title, grade, department name, and reporting manager name on the active user's page. This feature helps to manage the employees in the organization without any hassles. Note: The first user who signs up will be the Super user by default. Step 1: Navigate to the Settings → User Management → Active user from the left navigation panel. Step 2: In the Active Users page, click on the + icon. Step 3: Now in the Create User page, fill in the required fields like Personal Information, Department Details, and Profit Access Information by clicking on the Next button at the end of each field. Once you finish, click on the Create button. Related Answer Posts: To know more about How to view the login status of active users in Profit.co, click here Related Blog Posts: To know more about people management, click here1 min read
- How to Share OKRs to other employees?Profit.co provides an option to share the OKRs with other employees within the organization. Why this Feature? This helps the employees understand the status of other employees' OKRs in the organization. Users can share the OKRs through a link with other employees. Note: Only Super Users have the access to enable the toggle for sharing the OKRs. Step 1 Navigate to Settings → OKRs → Views from the left navigation panel, and switch to the Objectives tab. Enable the Share toggle under the Actions section. Step 2 Navigate to the My Departments'/Employees' OKRs page. Select the OKR which you want to share, click on the Ellipsis icon and select Share. From the User Search and Select pop up panel, select the employees with whom you want to share the OKR and click Update. Step 3 The user you shared your OKRs with can see them by going to OKRs → Following OKRs in the left menu and selecting OKRs shared with me. Note: You can also export your data by clicking on the Export icon in the right corner. Related Answer Post To learn more about how to share goals with other users, click here.1 min read
- How to override scoring at grade and department level?Scoring buckets at the settings are now available at grades and department levels for manually overriding weights for each grade and department. Now you can override the weightage for goals, competencies, and OKRs at Grade and Department level so that the users can be assessed on their competencies and Goals based on the weightage added at the Grade and Department with respect to their hierarchy. Based on the grade, the weights can be changed at the department level. If the Scoring Buckets toggle is disabled at the Grade and Department level, the users will be assessed based on the weightage added to the Goals and competencies in the Scoring buckets page. Note: Only Super users can access Settings. You can choose to enable the overriding at either department level or grade level. By default, the system will check for the department level score and then for the Grade level score if the admin had not provided the weights at both the level then the weights will be taken from the Scoring bucket. To enable Scoring Buckets, navigate to Settings → Performance → Reviews from the left navigation panel. Select your preferred template on the Review Template page. And switch to the Scoring Buckets tab. Enable the toggle Scoring Buckets. At Grade Level Step 1 Select the Grade Level in the Scoring based on the drop-down. Click on the Edit icon of the Grade for which you want to override competency. Step 2 Override the weights assigned for goals, competencies, and OKRs for the grade and click Update. At Department Level Step 1 If you want to further override the weight at the department level, select the Department level from the dropdown. Click on the Edit icon of the department for which you want to override the score. Step 2 Override the weights assigned for goals, competencies, and OKRs for the department and click Update.2 min read
- How to check the check-in process for each goal level?Profit.co provides an option to track the check-in process of goals from the section called Action in the Audit trial option. Why this feature? This feature helps you to view the progress for your own goals and also the goals which you have assigned to others using the audit trial option. Using this option you can also maintain a record of all the check-ins made to the goals. Go to Performance → Goals from the left navigation menu. Mouse hover the goal which you want to check and click on the More icon and select it. Click on the option Audit Trial. In the column named Action, you can see the history of check-ins and other updates done. The changes you have done can be viewed in the comment section. Related Blog Post To know more about How to Set and Track OKR Goals, click here.1 min read
- How to include OKR in Performance Review for performing assessment?Profit.co provides an option to support the assessment of OKRs in performance assessment by helping you add OKRs. Why this feature? Including OKRs in performance reviews aligns individual goals with company objectives, ensuring a more targeted and measurable assessment of performance and progress. It provides a clear, data-driven approach to performance reviews, enabling managers to evaluate achievements based on specific, measurable outcomes tied to key results. Step 1 Navigate to Settings → Performance → Reviews from the left navigation panel and switch to the Review Templates tab. Edit the required review. Step 2 On the Edit Review Template page, in the Basic Details tab, under the Performance Review Assessment Includes section, enable the OKRs toggle and click on Configure to allow Self, Peer, External Reviewer, Matrix Manager, Manager, and the required OKR Levels to evaluate the OKRs. Finally, click on Update. Note: The selected members can only evaluate the OKRs for the performance review. The users can now view OKRs as part of their performance reviews. While performing the assessment, users can evaluate and add comments for their goals.1 min read
- How to share goals with other users?Profit.co provides the option to share goals with other users. Why this feature? In the event that two or more employees work towards the same goal, you can share the goals with them. Additionally, you can track the changes made to the goals by the shared users. Step 1 Navigate to Performance → Goals. While creating or editing a goal, click on the sharing icon, and a custom list will be displayed. Select the users with whom you want to share the goal. Step 2 On the Shared Goals page, users can view the goals that are shared with them. Related Blog Post To learn about the process of creating a new Goal, click here.1 min read
- How does the system automatically generate a planned value calculated for KR check-in?In Profit.co the system generates a planned value calculated before making the KR check-ins. Why this feature? This feature helps streamline the process of tracking OKRs by automatically generating planned values, reducing manual effort, and increasing accuracy. Users can adjust planned values for more precise tracking of progress, helping teams stay aligned with their goals while accommodating changes in the work schedule or targets Step 1 For instance, let’s create a key result “Increase # of E-book downloads/week from 50 to 250”. In this key result, we use the Increase KPI and the values will be between 50 to 250. Click the Key result and select Modify Plan in the check-ins menu. You’ll be able to see the default check-in value for the check-in day. Note: You can also Modify the check-in values according to your own calculation.1 min read
- What is the difference between OKRs and goals, and how goals system contribute to business growth?In Profit.co OKRs is a goal management framework that helps to focus on the work and improve business performance. Objectives and Key Results is a collaborative goal-setting tool used by teams and individuals to set challenging, ambitious goals with measurable results. With OKRs you can track progress, create alignment, and encourage engagement around measurable goals. Click here to know more about OKRs. On the other hand, Goals are not a framework but a guideline. In Profit.co, Goals are tracking software in the Performance Management module, where you can set your own weights as a target value. Goals are mostly referred to as SMART goals, which are a list of principles to guide crafting an objective alone, with no particular focus on key results or tactics. SMART goals raise the question “what is the goal?” Yet OKRs raise the question “what is the goal and how do we get there? Objectives and key results should connect like puzzle pieces, with the decision on objectives to be reached, the key results must also be achieved which will be hidden within the objective. Therefore, there is an added layer of accountability for reaching the objective. Click here to know more about Goals. Step 1: The main difference is that in OKRs the updates done in the Key result will show progress in the target value i.e. Objective. In Goals, you can make your own measurement as your total target value by setting the weights. The updates you're making in each goal will change the value in target. Step 2: Also we can associate Key Results as a Goal and we can set weight for that. We can include goals in Performance Review by enabling the toggle for goals in performance review in settings. Note: Only Super Users will be able to enable the toggle for including goals in Performance Review for assessment. While doing an assessment for a review the Goals will be present in a separate column. Goals connect with both OKR and performance review to improve business growth.2 min read
- How to add Notes in Goals?Profit.co provides an option to add notes to your Goals. You can also add notes to others' goals. Why this feature? This feature helps you to add additional information like instructions, comments, target date, review date, etc as notes to the goals. These notes will help the employee in scheduling and executing their goals. Note: Only Super users can add notes on others' goals. Step 1: Navigate to Performance→ Goals from the left navigation panel, and switch to the My Goals tab. Hover over your preferred goal, click the More icon, and select the Notes option. Step 2: Click on the + Create Note button, and enter your comment. Once done, click the Create button. Other users can post comments for the Notes. Related Answer Post: To know more about How to view My Orgs' Goals, click here1 min read
- How to edit/delete past goals in Profit.co?Profit.co provides an option to edit or delete previous period goals. Why this feature? This feature helps users to manage past goals efficiently by making the necessary changes, as well as by deleting them, and you save more space for future goals. Note: Only Super Users & PMS Admins have access to edit and delete the past completed goals. Step 1 Navigate to Settings → Performance → Goals from the left navigation panel. In the Goals setting page, enable the "Allow users to Edit/Delete previous quarter goals" toggle. Navigate to Performance → Goals. Select the goal you wish to delete, click on the more icon, and select Delete. Once you click Delete, you will be asked to confirm, and the goal will be deleted. Step 2 To edit the past goal, click on the icon. Once you edit the goal, click on the Update button. Related Answer Post To learn more about how to set weights for goals, click here.1 min read
- How to add Columns in the Goals main menu?Profit.co allows you to add additional columns in the Goals page. Why this feature? This feature provides you an option to customize the menu in the Goals page. Based on your requirement you can decide the fields that you want to have in the goals menu. Step 1: Navigate to Performance → Goals from the left navigation panel and switch to the My Goals tab. In the Goals overview page, click the icon that will be in the right corner of the Goal menu. The fields which are selected will be visible in the Goal menu. Step 2: We can add extra columns by selecting the unchecked fields. Now the selected fields will be visible in the Goals Menu. Related Answer Post: To know more about How to create goals, click here1 min read
- Will I get notified if I don't assign the right weightage to goals?You can now assign the right weightage to goals without any hassle. Why this feature? When you assign weight to goals that are not cumulative of 1, you will be alerted and notified on the goals list page. Step 1: Navigate to Performance → Goals from the left navigation panel. Step 2: When the listed goals are not given weights that amount to 1, you will be notified with the alert icon of the weightage icon. Click on and you will view an alert message saying that Total weight is lesser than or equal to 1 or Total weight is greater than 1 based on the weight you have assigned. Step 3: You can change the weight and click Apply. Step 4: Once the total weight of goals is changed to a cumulative of 1, you will no longer see the alert icon. Related blog post: To learn more about how to set weights in goals Click here1 min read
- How do I customize and create measurements?Profit.co allows you to customize and create Measurements based on your requirements. Why this feature? Strategy measurement is used to measure the effectiveness of the objectives delivered on the expected results. Moreover, it organizes your business goals and also defines how they will be measured. To customize and create measurements follow the following steps. Note: Only Super Users have access to Settings. Step 1 Navigate to Settings → Strategy → Measurements and define who can create Measurements, Click on the Master Layout button, to customize the Measurements layout. Step 2Save the changes and navigate to Strategy → Measurements to create Measurements. On the Create Measurement window, Enter the values for the New measurement and click Create. Create your new measurements, with standard attributes Baseline value Baseline date Target value Target date Unit of Measurement Note: Once the measurements are created they can be associated with strategic initiatives.Once you click Create, the created measurement will be saved and you can view it on the Measurements page. Related Blog Post To know more about How to Implement a Strategy with OKR, click here1 min read
- How do I customize and link the focus area with directives and priorities?Strategic Focus Areas help the management process identify the specific missions of the organization. It will help the business succeed and give a clear direction for the goals so that progress can be measured. You can customize and link focus areas with directives and priorities. Step 1 Navigate to Settings → Strategy → Focus Area from the left navigation panel. Click the Master Layout button to customize the attributes by adding Attributes from the Palette. Note: Only Super Users can customize the Master Layout. The following attributes will be present in the layout by default, you can add or remove attributes in the next step. Save the changes and Navigate to Strategy → Focus Area, to create the focus areas. You can associate it with the directives and priorities while creating the Focus Area as shown in the below image. Related answer post To learn more about customize and create directives, click here1 min read
- How to view the goal dashboard in Profit.co?Profit.co provides an exclusive dashboard for goals to view the progress updates and statuses of all the goals in one place. Why this feature? This feature helps you to view the total number of goals, active goals, completed goals, and the overall progress percentage of goals in a visual dashboard. You can also view the circular pie chart of goals based on the status of the progression of goals. Step 1 Navigate to the Performance → Dashboard → Goals from the left navigation panel. Step 2 On the Goal Dashboard page, you can view the Total Goals, Active Goals, Completed Goals, Overall progress, and Goals by Status in one place. Related Blog Post To learn more about how to create goals for profit.co click here.1 min read
- How to link KRs with goals to automate the process in Profit.co?Profit.co provides an option to link your key results to goals to automatically update the progress of your goals in Profit.co. Why this feature? By linking Key Results with goals you can automate progress to your goals via the check-ins that you make in key results, also you can precisely achieve your goal on time with your associated key results. Note: The sync of progress will happen only from OKRs to goals and not the other way around. Step 1 Navigate to Performance→ Goals from the left navigation panel. On the Goals page select My Goals. Step 2 Choose the goal for which you want to link key results and click on the edit icon. In the edit goal page click on the Associate KR button. Once you click, a list of key results will appear in a pop up menu, select from it. Now the key result will be associated with the particular goal. The progress made in the key result is reflected in the goal. Note: You can associate key results directly from the overview page and view them. Step 3 Also, we can view the KRs on the list page with the total associated KRs count and if the user wants to see all the KRs then click on the count icon to view all the associated KRs for the Goal. Related Answer Post To learn about the process of creating new goals, click here.2 min read
- How to manage scores for goals and competencies?Profit.co helps you to manage the scores for goals and competencies via the Scoring Bucket option. Why this feature? This feature helps you to manage the scores between competencies and goals when you include goals in your performance review process. Based on your requirement you can split the weight among these two in the scoring bucket via Settings. Note: Only Super users can have access to Scoring Bucket. Step 1 To change the default weights, navigate to the Settings → Performance → Scoring from the left navigation panel. Step 2 Enable the Scoring Buckets toggle, and click on the pencil icon to adjust the weight. The below-mentioned example shows 0.7 weight for goals and 0.3 weight for competencies. Step 3 Once you click on the pencil icon of Goals, the Update scoring page will open, you can adjust the weight for goals under the weight option and click Update. The weight will be updated. Note: Make sure that the sum of the weights is equal to 1 or 100%. Related Answer Post To know more about How to set weights for Goals, click here Related Blog post To know more about 360 Degree Performance Reviews, click here1 min read
- What is a Goal Progress dashboard?Profit.co provides an exclusive dashboard to view the progress updates and statuses of all the employee’s goals in one place. Why this Feature? This feature helps users to view the total number of goals, active goals, completed goals, and the overall progress percentage of goals in a visual dashboard. Users can also view the circular pie chart of goals based on the status of the progression of goals. Step 1 Navigate to Performance → Dashboard→ Goals Progress from the left navigation panel. In the Goal Progress Dashboard, scroll right and click on the Ellipsis icon to View the user’s goal status. The selected employee's goal status will be displayed as shown below. You can also select the Department, Owner, Manager, and Periods by clicking on the Filter icon from the top menu to filter the Goals. Users can also Download the Goal Progress by clicking on the Export icon. The file will be downloaded in .CSV format as shown below. Related Answer Post To learn more about the Review Summary Dashboard, click here.1 min read
- How to link goals with performance review?Profit.co provides an option to link goals in the performance reviews. Why this feature? This feature allows the Super User to include the goals in the assessment process of performance reviews. By linking goals with performance reviews, employees can showcase their performance by showing the progress of their goals. Also in the manager assessment, the manager will be able to see the status of the employee’s goal. Step 1 Navigate to Settings → Performance → Reviews from the left navigation panel. Under the Review Template menu edit the template where you want to enable the Goals. Step 2 In the Edit Review Template page, in the Basic Details tab, under the Performace Review Assessment Includes section, enable the Goals toggle and click on Configure to allow Self, Matrix Manager, and Manager to evaluate the goals. Finally, click on Update. Note: The selected members can only evaluate the goals for the performance review. The users can now view Goals as part of their performance reviews. While performing the assessment, users can evaluate and add comments for their goals. Note: Now, you can check in the goals during the review process. Related Blog Post To know more about how to set and track goals, click here.2 min read
- How do I create a team objective instantly?Profit.co provides a quick create option to create Objectives and Key Results, which enables users to quickly create OKRs without any hassle. Why this feature? Objectives provide a clear understanding of what needs to be achieved, and they help to define the outcomes and goals that you want to accomplish. This feature provides an option for users to create Objectives using the Quick Create option. Note: You must be a member of the team to create team objectives. Step 1 Navigate to the OKR → My Team OKRs from the left navigation panel. Step 2 Click on the + icon to Create Objective and select Quick Create from the dropdown menu. Enter the Objective name, and choose the Target period. Then, click Save. Related Answer Post To learn more on how to add weightage to the Objective, click here. To learn more on how to restrict users from Objective and Key Result creation methods, click here.1 min read
- How does the Approval flow for Goals work?Profit.co provides an option to create a flow to approve the goals created/edited/deleted by the employees. Why this feature? Goals are created in order to monitor and manage the work progress and performance. By Using this workflow approval you can give privilege to the Managers or the team head to approve the goal created by the employees and allow them to use the assigned goals. Note: Only Super Users can create flow for goals. Step 1 Navigate to Settings → Performance → Goals from the left navigation panel and switch to the Approval Flow tab, and click the Customize button. Note: The new flow will apply automatically once you disable and enable the toggle. Step 2 Enable the toggle for Enable Approvals for Create/Edit Goals. After enabling the approval flow, you can set the level of value for the approval in the Employee’s manager’s level up to a certain number of levels, After adding Employee manager levels, you can add Additional Managers for goal approval. For instance, let’s set the Matrix manager as the additional manager. Step 3 You can also add a Custom List of employees to approve Goals by enabling the Program team approves toggle. These employees will be notified when the goal is approved. Step 4 After you create a goal, click on the Submit for Approval button. A confirmation pop-up will appear, displaying the manager's name who will approve the goal. Click the Submit button. The newly created goal will be added to My Goals page and the staus of the Goal will be displayed as shown below. Step 5 Next, go to the Pending Approval tab. Click the Review Changes icon. And click the Approve button. After the approval, it will move to all the custom lists of employees. The users present in the list will be getting an approval notification If anyone approves the goal assigned to them. After getting all the approvals, you can progress the Goal. Related Blog Post To learn more about how to set and track OKR goals, click here.2 min read
- How to enable/disable the KPI categories?In Profit.co you can now enable/disable the KPI categories via Settings. Why this feature? KPIs (Key Performance Indicators) are critical metrics that businesses use to measure and evaluate their performance in achieving strategic goals and objectives. This feature helps you to customize the KPIs by Category by Enabling/Disabling the toggles in the category list based on your requirement. Step 1 Navigate to Settings → OKRs → KPIs from the left navigation panel.On the KPIs page click on the Categories. You can enable or disable the toggle of the categories. You can also use the filter option to see the Enabled/Disabled categories list. Related Answer Post To Know more about How to create KPI, click here.1 min read
- Why can't I check-in the Objective?OKRs are goal-setting methodological frameworks that help you to define objectives and track key results with the possible outcomes. You can only track key results by checking- in your progress and the objective defined can’t be checked-in. While you frame your objective you can set challenging and aspirational goals and the key results help you to achieve it by helping you stay committed to your objective. Check-in your key results mean that you're making progress in your objective, so there is no difference as such. OKR tools like Profit.co help you manage your OKRs, Tasks, employee performance, and engagement. In the below-mentioned image, the highlighted one is the objective and the progress that is made in the key results are reflected in the objective. Also, Profit.co allows you to link Key results with OKR status and color codes via the check-in status and the progress of your OKRs through color codes.1 min read
- Is it possible to align corporate OKRs to other levels?Corporate OKRs are the higher level OKRs that we can’t align to other levels such as department, teams individual OKRs, etc in Profit.co. Why this Feature? Helps cascade company objectives down to teams and individuals, keeping everyone focused on shared priorities. Encourages teams to take responsibility for their contributions toward corporate goals. Step 1 When you try to align any OKR present at the corporate level, you’ll see only the other Objective names present at the same level to align and Update it. Note: Other levels such as Individuals, Departments, and teams will be shown to align with corporate OKRs.1 min read
- How to set Custom attributes for Goals?Profit.co provides an option to set custom fields for goals based on their business culture and organizational requirements. Why this feature? This feature allows the employees to customize the Goal creation and check-in page according to their needs. Users can also add the necessary attributes from the predefined set of attributes. Note: Only Super Users can add custom attributes for goals. Step 1 Navigate to Settings → Performance → Goals from the left navigation panel and switch to the Check-in Customization tab. Here you can add custom attributes related to the check-in menu. Step 2 In the Check-in Customization page, you can select the Palette tab to customize the layout for Sections & Attributes according to your requirements. You can insert the attributes by dragging and dropping them inside the section. Select the Inspector tab to set the Fields(Type, Name, and Label Visibility )for the attributes. You can set these attributes as mandatory and also you can set conditional criteria under the Visibility options. Finally, click on the Save button. Step 3 Under the Master Layout tab, you can add custom attributes which will be reflected on the Goal Creation page. Once done, click on Save. Step 4 The custom attributes will be reflected in the Goals creation and check-in menu. Related Blog Post To learn more about how to set and track OKR goals, click here.2 min read
- How do you perform self-assessment?Profit.co allows users to perform Self-assessment in performance evaluations. This provides an opportunity for all employees to showcase their achievements, strengths, weaknesses, and strategies for the future. Why this feature? Initiators can start employee performance reviews, and the users can perform their Self-Assessment. Self-Assessment is the first step of the review process. This will enable employees to self-assess their work before the management and peers begin their assessment. Step 1: Navigate to Performance → My Reviews from the left navigation panel. Step 2: In the My Reviews page, click on the Active Reviews tab and select the Self-assessment review listed below. Step 3: In the My Reviews: Active page, give Ratings for your competencies and click on the Comments option to provide your comments if needed. Step 4: Users can add Peer Reviewers to review their performance apart from their Manager. Click on the Add Peers button and select employees from the drop-down menu and finally click on Add. Step 5: Users can view the Review Summary Information and Weights for their associated Competencies, Goals, and OKRs. Finally, click Submit. Note: Users can view the manager assessment after the employee signs off the review. Related Blog Post: To know more about Employee Self Evaluation Templates, Examples, and Tips, click here.2 min read
- How to delete an OKR before the normal time period expires in Profit.co?You can now close/delete/complete an OKR before the time period expires in Profit.co. Why this feature? Enables teams to promptly remove Objectives that are no longer pertinent due to shifts in business priorities or unforeseen challenges, ensuring that focus remains on impactful goals. Maintains a streamlined OKR dashboard by eliminating outdated or irrelevant Objectives, which aids in reducing confusion and enhancing team alignment. For Instance, Let us delete an OKR with the Period of Q1-2025(Jan-Mar), Step 1 On All my OKRs page, navigate to the Objective that you want to delete and click on the More → Delete option. Step 2 You will get a confirmation message asking “Are you sure want to proceed?” click on Delete. Step 3 The OKR will be removed even before the period ends from the OKR list page. Related Answer Post: To know more about How to enable the edit / delete OKRs Option, click here1 min read
- How to add Competencies at Job title Level?Profit.co provides an option to add competencies to the Job title level. Competencies can be associated with job titles. For example, Leadership ability and Problem-solving are some key competencies for a Project manager. Domain competency, Analytical skills, and Algorithmic and structured thinking are key competencies for a software developer. Why this feature? Competencies are measurable skills or abilities that an individual needs to perform their job roles successfully in an organization. In order to reduce employee turnover and improve the employee retention rate analyzing the employee's competencies is important. The right employees with suitable skill sets in the right positions can help the organization meet its goals and move forward in the right direction. Step 1 Navigate to Settings → User Management from the left navigation panel, and switch to the Job Titles tab. Click on the Edit icon of the Job Title you wish to add to particular competencies. Step 2 In the Update Job Title panel, select the competencies under the Performance Competencies section. Once done, click the Update button. The selected Job Title will be added to the competency. Related answer post To learn more about how to add competencies at the department level, click here.1 min read
- How can I create users?Profit.co allows you to create users as a process to meet your business goals by working together as a team in your organization. Why this feature? With this feature, you can create users on the active user's page when a newly joined employee is in your team/organization. You can add their role, job title, grade, department name, and reporting manager name on the active users' page. This feature helps to manage the employees in the organization without any hassles. Note: The first user who signs up will be the Superuser by default. Step 1 Navigate to Settings → User Management → Active user from the left navigation panel. On the Active Users page, click on the + icon. Step 2 Now on the Create User page, fill in the required fields like Personal Information, Department Details, and Profit Access Information by clicking the Next button at the end of each field. Once you finish, click on the Create button. Related Answer Posts To know more about How to view the login status of active users in Profit.co, click here1 min read
- How to view My Orgs' Goals?You can now view the goals created and managed under My Org’s Goals in Profit.co. My Org’s Goals menu will be visible to users who have reportees under them. Why this feature? This feature allows you to view the high-level goals and OKRs so that you can plan and assign your department/team/individual goals accordingly, which in turn helps you to meet the organizations’ expectations from you. The goal created by you is visible to your reporting manager and your organization. Step 1 Navigate to Performance → Goals from the left navigation panel. Switch to the My Employees’ Goals and you can view the goals of the employees by choosing from the dropdown. Related Answer Post To learn more about how to set and track goals, click here.1 min read
- How to create Statuses and Priorities in Goals?Profit.co provides an option to create a new status and a priority for Goals. Why this feature? This feature allows you to create new statuses and priorities, which helps rank and prioritize your Goals. Navigate to Settings → Performance → Goals. Under the General category, click on “Show Advanced Options”. You will have the option to create new Statuses and Priorities. How to create a new Status? Click on the Create icon to create a new Status. Set a name, color code, and Confidence Percentage for the new status. While updating the Goal, the newly created status will be available. How to create a new Priority? Click on the Create icon to create a new Priority. Set a name and color code for the new priority. While changing the priority for Goals, the newly created priority will be reflected.1 min read